Skip to main content

Full text of "Manila and the Philippines"

See other formats


•3 


II 

fr-s 


"£      03 


f         &      G 

''     2  c3 


AND   THE 


PHILIPPINES 


BY 


MARGHERITA  ARLINA  HAMM. 


F.  TENNYSON  NEELY, 

PUBLISHER, 
LONDON.  NEW  YORK. 


\ 

PRESERVATION 
COPY  ADDED 
ORIGINAL  TO  BE 
RETAINED 

JAN  2.4 1995 


Copyright,  1898, 

by 
F.  TENNYSON 

in 
United  States 

and 
Great  Britain. 

All  Rights~Reserved. 


TO 
RIZAL  AND  AGUINALDO, 

THE  DEAD  MARTYR  AND  LIVING  HERO, 

THIS  BOOK  IS   DEDICATED 

BY  THE  AUTHOR. 


225811 


PREFACE. 


THIS  volume  is  based  upon  notes  made  by  the  au- 
thor while  a  resident  and  traveler  in  the  Far  East. 
Some  have  been  used  in  newspaper  correspondence 
for  the  New  York  Mail  and  Express,  the  New  York 
Sun,  the  New  York  Herald,  the  Baltimore  American, 
the  Chicago  Inter -Ocean,  the  San  Francisco  Ex.- 
aminer,  and  the  Hong  Kong  Telegraph. 

All  has  been  rewritten  and  brought  down  to  date 
as  far  as  it  has  been  possible.  The  difficulties  have 
been  numerous  on  account  of  the  Spanish  official  pol- 
icy of  which  the  chief  object  apparently  is  the  sup- 
pression of  all  information  concerning  their  Colonial 
possessions. 

The  Author  has  met  representatives  from  the  five 
classes  that  compose  Philippine  society:  the  Church, 
the  Army,  the  Office-holders,  the  Merchants,  and  the 
Revolutionists,  and  thus  has  had  the  opportunity  of 
seeing  Spanish  Colonial  dominion  from  as  many 

points  of  view. 

M.  A.  H. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 
The  Routes  to  the  Philippines  9 

CHAPTER    II. 
The  Island  of  Luzon 17 

CHAPTER    III. 
In  Manila 26 

CHAPTER   IV. 
The  People  of_Manila 89 

CHAPTER  V. 
Manila  Architecture — Especially  Roofs 46 

CHAPTER    VI. 
Stores  and  Shops 55 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Manila's  Daily  Bread — Tobacco 65 

CHAPTER   VIII. 
Around  Luzon 72 

CHAPTER    IX. 
Cavite 84 

CHAPTER    X. 
Iloilo 89 

CHAPTER    XI. 
Cebu 96 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Sulu— City,  Island,  and  Sultanate  102 


riii  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER    XIII.  PAGE 

Some  Historical  Notes 118 

CHAPTER    XIV. 

The  Government 120 

CHAPTER   XV. 

The  Philippine  Newspaper  World 128 

CHAPTER    XVI. 
The  Natives 134 

CHAPTER    XVII. 
Some  Native  Industries ...  140 

CHAPTER    XVIII. 
The  Animal  World 151 

CHAPTER    XIX. 
The  Feathered  Population 159 

CHAPTER    XX. 
Fishes  and  Reptiles 166 

CHAPTER    XXI. 
Garden,  Farm  and  Forest 173 

CHAPTER    XXII. 
Mines  and  Metals , 180 

CHAPTER    XXIII. 
Typhoons 184 

CHAPTER    XXIV. 
The  Other  Islands—the  Ladrones,  the  Pelews,  the  Carolines 188 

CHAPTER    XXV. 
The  Story  of  Rizal 207 

CHAPTER    XXVI. 
The  Future  of  the  Philippines , .  213 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


OPPOSITE 
PAGE 


Main  Street,  Manila ........  0.0 22 

A  View  of  Manila , . , 28 

General  View,  Manila — Cathedral „ 44 

A  Half-caste  Lady  of  Wealth. 56 

A  Country  House,  Luzon 64 

A  Country  Church,  Luzon „ 72 

Catholic  Convent,  Interior  of  Luzon. 78 

A  Farm  Buffalo  of  Cavite « 86 

Cock-Fighter  Sulu 110 

A  Native  College  Class 116 

A  Mestizo 122 

Main  Boulevard,  Binonda 130 

Native  Hut „ 136 

Peddlers  of  Oil  Industry 142 

Packing  Manila  Sugar . 148 

Cock-Fight  in  Luzon 162 

Native  Fishing — the  Banca 170 

A  Buffalo  Cart  on  Runners. 0 182 

A  View  of  Interior  Village 186 

Native  Lumbermen  at  Rest „.  <,....«.., 196 

Natural  Bridge  and  Native  Vegetation 202 

A  Street  Restaurant 210 

A  Sugar  House. .,...,.....,......,,«., .,..,, 21§ 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER    I. 

THE   ROUTES   TO    THE   PHILIPPINES. 

THE  Philippine  Islands,  roughly  speaking,  are  eleven 
thousand  miles  west  by  south  of  New  York  City  and  four- 
teen thousand  miles  east  by  south.  By  train  and  mail 
steamer  they  are  thirty  days'  journey  going  westward  and 
thirty-five  going  eastward.  Though  a  civilized  land 
they  are  comparatively  difficult  of  access.  The  chief 
way  of  reaching  them  is  by  one  of  the  four  lines  running 
regularly  between  Hong  Kong,  Amoy  and  Manila.  One 
of  these  lines  is  Spanish  and  the  rest  British.  There  is 
a  small  Spanish  line  which  goes  directly  from  Spain, 
stopping  at  Singapore  as  the  last  station  before  Manila 
is  reached.  There  is  also  a  Japanese  way  which  runs 
from  the  land  of  the  Mikado  via  Foo  Chow  and  Formosa. 
But  neither  the  Spanish  nor  the  Japanese  lines  have  as 
yet  attained  the  status  of  excellence  demanded  by  trav- 
elers. It  may  be  said,  therefore,  that  you  begin  your 
voyage  to  the  Philippines  at  Hong  Kong. 

When  you  buy  your  ticket  you  realize  very  thoroughly 
that  you  are  going  to  a  country  run  upon  a  very  differ- 
ent system  from  any  that  you  have  ever  been  in  in  other 
parts  of  the  world.  The  company  cannot  sell  you  a  pas- 
sage until  you  produce  your  passport,  vised  by  your  own 
consul  and  by  the  Spanish  consul  at  Hong  Kong.  Tour 


10          *  'MANILA'AN^'^HE  PHILIPPINES. 

own  consul  charges  you  nothing,  but  the  other  one 
must  be  paid  a  nice  fee.  You  must  also  be  identified. 
If  it  turns  out  that  you  are  a  missionary  on  evangelical 
business  bent,  you  receive  immediate  notice  that  you 
cannot  enter  the  Philippines.  If  you  are  a  Protestant 
clergyman  traveling  for  health,  you  are  notified  that 
you  are  free  to  come  and  travel,  but  that  if  you  endeavor 
to  convert  people,  or  to  express  opinions  at  variance  with 
those  held  by  the  Spanish  government,  you  will  be 
arrested  and  deported. 

This  sounds  strange  enough  in  the  last  part  of  the 
nineteenth  century,  but  is,  nevertheless,  based  upon 
actual  facts  in  that  part  of  the  world.  Nor  is  this  all. 
You  are  notified  in  respect  to  smuggling,  to  apparel, 
equipment,  literature,  and  money.  If  you  bring  more 
than  a  certain  amount  of  clothing  there  are  fees  to  be 
paid.  If  you  take  a  weapon  with  you,  it  is  subject  to 
confiscation  and  you  to  fine.  If  you  carry  with  you  any 
book,  magazine  or  paper  which  is  heretical,  revolution- 
ary, or  anarchistic,  or  which  throws  odium  upon  the 
Church,  or  reflections  upon  the  government  the  matter 
is  liable  to  seizure  and  you  to  fine,  imprisonment,  and 
deportation.  Should  you  venture  to  express  surprise  at 
this  harsh  system,  or  to  indicate  doubt  as  to  the  enforce- 
ment of  the  law,  a  polite  clerk  tells  you  the  fate  of  Dr. 
Eizal,  the  Philippine  patriot  who  was  arrested  and  im- 
prisoned because  in  his  trunk  there  was  found  a  single 
pamphlet  recommending  reforms  in  the  civil  and  ecclesi- 
astical administration  of  his  country.  Your  wardrobe 
for  the  Philippines  is  about  the  same  as  what  you  would 
take  for  the  West  Indies,  linen  and  flannel  suits,  dress 
coats  made  of  alpaca  or  black  silk,  a  straw  hat,  and  a 
pith  helmet  for  a  gentleman ;  the  lightest  and  thinnest 
pongees,  silks,  laces,  and  nets  for  a  lady.  BDth  man 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  11 

and  woman  should  have  rubber  shoes,  a  waterproof  gos- 
samer, a  sunshade  and  umbrella,  and  silk,  linen  or  cotton 
gloves.  A  large  supply  of  handkerchiefs,  of  underwear, 
and  of  hosiery  is  a  necessity  in  view  of  the  climate  and 
the  customs  of  the  land. 

A  stranger  to  that  part  of  the  world  should  carry  a 
medicine  chest,  or  in  default  of  that  a  fair  supply  of 
quinine  pills,  chlorodyne,  and  sun  cholera  mixture.  The 
traveler  should  have  been  vaccinated  within  five  years. 
In  hygienic  matters  the  Spaniard  is  a  fatalist  and  laughs 
at  the  idea  of  vaccination.  The  result  is  that  smallpox 
is  endemic  in  all  Spanish  possessions,  and  in  the  win- 
ter months  often  epidemic. 

An  American  consul,  who  was  a  famous  wit,  expressed 
this  very  epigrammatically  by  saying  "that  there  were 
two  seasons  in  Manila,  the  smallpox  season  and  the 
cholera  season." 

After  you  have  complied  with  all  the  formalities  de- 
manded by  Spanish  law,  and  have  procured  the  right 
kind  of  money  for  use  on  the  steamer  and  at  your  desti- 
nation when  you  land,  you  make  your  peace  with  the 
Lord  and  embark  upon  one  of  the  steamers  for  the 
Islands  of  King  Philip. 

The  trip  across  the  China  Sea  is  alwajrs  pleasant  and 
sometimes  very  exciting.  The  steamers  are  very  strong 
and  seaworthy  and  the  captains  are  men  of  more  than 
ordinary  intelligence  and  culture.  I  recall  one,  Captain 
George  Tayler,  of  the  Esmeralda,  who  would  have  been 
a  star  in  any  drawing-room.  They  speak  English  and 
Spanish  with  a  smattering  of  Chinese,  "pidgin  English," 
and  Malay.  They  have  to  possess  much  tact  and  diplo- 
macy in  order  to  keep  on  good  terms  with  the  Spanish 
officials,  and  to  avoid  the  disastrous  consequences  of 
violating  that  extraordinary  body  of  jurisprudence 
known  as  Spanish  law. 


1$  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

A  few  illustrations  may  give  a  fair  notion  of  this 
system.  If  a  ship's  manifest  calls  for  a  hundred  barrels 
of  flour  there  must  be  one  hundred  barrels  of  flour  to 
verify  the  manifest.  If  there  be  one  hundred  and  one, 
or  ninety-nine,  the  captain  is  liable  to  arrest,  fine  and 
imprisonment,  and  the  ship  to  seizure  and  confiscation. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  prove  any  intent  in  the  matter  nor 
can  an  excuse  be  legally  pleaded  for  excess  or  deficiency. 
At  the  furthest  an  excuse  or  explanation  may  be  urged 
in  mitigation  of  the  offense.  In  that  case  the  authori- 
ties may  graciously  annul  the  judgment  of  confiscation, 
and  substitute  therefor  a  heavy  fine.  If  a  stowaway, 
especially  one  of  a  prohibited  class,  is  found  on  board, 
the  same  list  of  punishments  await  the  captain  and  the 
ship.  If  a  passenger  on  board  has  no  passport,  or  loses 
it  en  route,  or  if  it  is  too  old  or  does  not  describe  the 
passenger  accurately  enough,  there  is  another  list  of 
penalties  awaiting  ship  and  master  upon  arrival. 
Of  course  the  principle  underlying  all  this  red  tape  is 
simply  the  extortion  of  money  from  commerce.  It  is 
true  that  the  money  extorted  is  paid  back  by  degrees  in 
the  shape  of  higher  freights  and  heavier  charges  of  all 
sorts,  but  this  repayment  comes  from  the  entire  com- 
munity, and  not  from  the  officials,  who  are  entitled  to 
two-thirds  of  the  fines  as  perquisites  of  office.  The  run 
from  Hong  Kong  to  Amoy  skirts  the  China  coast,  and 
gives,occasional  glimpses  of  towns  and  fishing  villages  of 
pagodas  and  joss-houses,  in  decay.  The  shore  line  is  an 
ancient  granite  formation,  which  has  been  beaten  by  the 
storms  of  countless  ages  into  all  sorts  of  fantastic  shapes 
and  outlines.  Sometimes  for  miles  it  is  a  wall  of  peaks 
and  cones  of  a  dull  yellow-brown,  where  apparently  no 
life  exists  or  ever  has  existed.  Then  again  it  becomes 
rolling  country  with  sand  and  gravel  beaches,  fields, 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  IB 

and  meadows  beyond,  and  here  and  there  the  mighty 
banyan  tree,  in  whose  shade  five  hundred  people  can 
find  comfort  and  ease.  At  another  place  infinite  labor 
has  terraced  the  hillsides  until  they  are  seamed  and 
scarred,  looking  for  all  the  world  as  if  the  earth-spirit 
had  started  to  ornament  her  outward  garment  with  fine 
tucks  and  pleats. 

Then  again  the  shore  is  broken  by  some  river  which 
announces  its  restless  activity  miles  away  by  floods  of 
yellow  water  slowly  mixing  with  the  blue  of  the  sea. 
There  are  islands  large  and  small  along  the  route.  To 
the  northeast  of  Hong  Kong  lies  Pedro  Blanco,  or  the 
White  Stone,  which  rises  a  noble  monolith  higher  than 
the  tallest  mast  of  passing  vessels.  On  the  other  side, 
near  to  the  land,  is  the  famous  group  of  rocks  known  aa 
the  Nine  Pins  or  the  Devil's  Nine  Pins,  which  are  high, 
narrow  blocks  of  stone,  some  straight,  some  apparently 
about  to  fall  as  if  stricken  by  an  invisible  giant  ball 
thrown  by  a  genii.  Halfway  up  the  coast  is  Namoa 
Island,  the  home  of  the  pirates.  Here  up  to  the  beginning 
of  this  century  was  a  community  of  freebooters,  whose 
ferocity,  daring,  and  seamanship  were  celebrated  the 
world  over.  Even  up  to  1830,  when  there  were  warships 
on  the  coast,  piracy  was  a  recognized  profession.  The 
introduction  of  steam  wrought  its  end.  The  steamship 
was  too  fast  to  overtake,  and  the  steam  warship  could 
always  overtake  the  pirate  craft.  Even  at  the  present 
time  there  are  still  pirates  on  the  coast,  and  every  ship 
in  those  waters  carries  at  least  a  dozen  rifles,  and  two 
dozen  revolvers. 

At  Amoy  the  Manila  steamers  stop  a  half  or  a  whole 
day.  There  is  a  large  commerce  between  China  and  the 
Philippines  even  in  spite  of  the  obstacles  and  burdens  of 
Spanish  law.  From  Amoy  the  steamers  carry  paving 


14  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

stones  for  the  streets  of  Manila  and  other  cities,  earthen- 
ware, china,  porcelain,  dried  fish,  provisions,  table 
delicacies,  medicines,  and  many  textiles,  more  especially 
Chinese  silk,  and  the  various  kinds  of  grass  cloth  made 
in  Formosa,  Chang  Chow,  and  Swatow.  Here  the 
steamer  is  visited  by  the  Spanish  consul  at  Amoy,  or  his 
clerk.  The  functionary  looks  over  the  manifest,  the  pas- 
senger list,  and  the  passports.  He  vises  the  ship's 
papers,  and  of  course  receives  a  fee  for  his  trouble. 
From  Amoy  the  steamer  runs  southeast,  not  for  Manila, 
but  for  the  north  end  of  Luzon.  This  is  done  to  take 
advantage  of  the  strong  currents  of  the  China  Sea  which 
range  from  one  to  four  knots  an  hour.  There  is  one 
current  in  particular  which  runs  southward,  parallel  to 
the  coast  of  Luzon,  which  is  said  to  reach  five  miles  an 
hour  at  certain  seasons  of  the  year. 

The  China  Sea  has  often  been  compared  with  both  the 
Caribbean  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.  It  has  points  in 
common  with  both.  It  appears  to  be  the  generating 
center  of  a  large  body  of  warm  water  which  flows  north- 
ward and  eastward,  and  it  is  also  the  scene  of  very 
violent  storms.  The  weather  of  the  China  Sea  is  its  most 
extraordinary  feature.  It  may  be  said  to  consist  of  the 
two  monsoons,  broken  in  the  summer  by  typhoons  and 
in  the  winter  by  northern  gales.  The  southeast  or  sum- 
mer monsoon  is  a  mild,  warm,  and  balmy  breeze  which 
blows  continuously  and  scarcely  ruffles  the  water.  Tho 
northeast  or  winter  monsoon  is  stronger  and  more  fitful, 
running  as  high  as  fourteen  and  fifteen  knots,  and  pro- 
ducing at  some  points  a  choppy  sea,  as  disagreeable  as 
that  of  the  British  Channel,  and  at  others  a  heavy,  ugly 
sea,  which  is  the  dread  of  all  nervous  or  qualmish  trav- 
elers. The  northeast  monsoon  is  broken  by  occasional 
gales  which  play  havoc  with  the  largest  ships.  It  was 


£ 

O        Hd 

ffi     e 


W    -ts 


I! 


I 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  15 

One  of  tnose  storms  which  disabled  the  powerful  P.  &  O. 
steamer  Bokhara,  October  10,  1892,  and  drove  it  as  a 
strong  team  draws  a  plow  among  the  shoals  and  banks  of 
the  Pescadores.  It  is  difficult  to  imagine  the  force 
which  can  drag  an  ocean  steamer  of  the  largest  size 
along  a  sea  bottom  of  rocks  and  coral  sand,  until  the 
plates  and  even  the  frames  of  the  hull  are  ground  away 
in  the  process  of  erosion.  But  the  fiercest  of  these 
northeastern  gales  is  a  child  alongside  of  the  typhoon, 
the  scourge  of  the  China  Sea.  Old  travelers  pronounce 
the  cooking  on  these  Manila  steamers  to  be  the  best  in 
the  world.  The  chefs  are  Chinamen,  who  are  cooks  by 
both  education  and  inheritance,  and  their  training  has 
made  them  masters  of  Spanish,  French,  English,  Hindu, 
and  Japanese  cooking,  as  well  as  of  their  native  styles. 
Upon  the  table  may  be  found  curries,  green,  red,  and 
white;  chutneys,  preserved  and  green;  pressed  fresh  Ma- 
cassar fish;  Bombay  ducks,  which  are  not  ducks,  but  a 
kind  of  cartillaginous  fish ;  gauvas,  fresh  or  in  the  form  of 
jelly,  jam  and  paste;  alligator  pears,  served  with  sherry 
wine,  or  removed  and  made  into  a  wonderful  salad ;  the 
white  hearts  of  the  tops  of  young  cocoanut  trees  slivered 
into  fibres  an  inch  in  length,  and  then  served  as  either  a 
salad,  a  vegetable,  or  a  sweetmeat;  golden  mangoes,  which 
are  simply  unapproachable;  mangosteens,  the  daintiest 
fruit  this  side  of  paradise ;  and  glorious  ramputas,  nick- 
named by  godless  youths,  "white-whiskered  straw- 
berries." 

Here  the  epicure  can  find  the  Celt-Iberian  delicacies, 
bacalao  a  la  Biscayeuse,  chile  Carne,  rojo  viejo,  and  frijolas 
con  farina.  As  if  to  show  how  closely  the  world  was 
tied  up  together  one  can  eat  prepared  by  a  Chinese  cook 
the  delicious  pilau  of  Manila,  which  the  Spaniards 
learned  from  the  Malays,  which  the  Malays  learned  from 


16  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

their  Mohammedan  conquerors  centuries  ago,  which  thesd 
learned  from  their  ancestors  in  India.  These  in  turn 
from  the  people  of  Persia,  and  they  from  Armenia  when 
Armenia  was  an  opulent,  powerful  and  luxurious  empire. 
The  coffee,  whether  of  Java  or  Manila,  is  admirable  and 
the  tea  puts  to  shame  that  which  is  served  in  the  great 
hotels  and  restaurants  of  either  New  York  or  London. 
Then  there  are  delicacies  which  are  unknown  to  the 
Western  world,  the  Canton  rice  bird,  only  an  inch  and  a 
half  in  length,  and  a  half  an  inch  in  thickness.  These 
are  stuffed  with  a  curried  stuffing,  and  then  roasted  or 
fried,  or  else  they  are  brochettedwith  alternating  layers 
of  bacon  and  of  mushrooms.  There  is  stewed  terrapin 
made  from  either  the  marsh  terrapin  of  Luzon  or  the 
mountain  terrapin  of  the  Chinese  hills,  either  of  them 
equal  to  the  diamond  backs  of  the  late  John  Chamber- 
lain. Then  there  are  curious  confections  made  from 
tropical  fruits,  some  dried,  some  smoked,  some  preserved 
with  honey,  others  with  molasses,  and  still  others  with 
white  sugar,  and  then  as  if  to  stir  up  the  happiest  of 
all  mental  complaints,  homesickness,  there  are  canned 
Bartlett  pears  from  California,  peaches  from  Delaware, 
succotash  from  Maine,  and  strawberries  from  New  York. 
The  Anglo-Saxon  genius  is  undermining  the  globe.  In 
the  loneliest  waters  of  the  Philippines  may  be  found  the 
British  tramp  steamer  and  in  the  smallest  village  Ameri- 
can canned  vegetables  and  on  both  a  Waterbury  watch. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER    II. 

THE   ISLAND    OP   LUZON. 

ALL  voyages  come  to  an  end,  and  on  the  second  day 
from  Amoy  there  is  a  cry  of  "Land  ho!"  and  there  upon 
the  horizon  lies  an  irregular  dark  purple  wall,  making  a 
royal  contrast  in  color  with  the  sky  above  and  the  sea 
below.  As  the  ship  approaches  the  color  changes  and  at 
last  resolves  itself  into  a  green,  richer  and  deeper  than 
that  of  the  Emerald  Isle.  On  the  deck  of  the  ship  it  is 
easy  to  see  that  Luzon  and  the  other  members  of  the 
Philippines  are  the  result  of  ages  of  volcanic  action  and 
much  longer  ages  of  erosion  and  weathering,  of  coral 
building,  and  the  growth  and  decay  of  swamps  and 
forests.  Such,  indeed,  has  been  its  history.  Its  vol- 
canic features  are  almost  numberless,  and  remind  one 
partly  of  Japan  and  partly  of  that  long  line  of  desert 
rocks  known  as  the  Aleutians.  On  the  other  hand  the 
coral  reefs  and  beds  suggest  the  great  barrier  reef 
of  northeastern  Australia.  Strangely  enough,  too,  the 
fauna  and  flora  are  equally  ambiguous,  if  that  term  may 
be  applied  to  the  living  kingdom.  Unlike  the  mainland 
'there  are  no  wild  members  of  the  cat  family  in  the 
Philippines.  On  the  other  hand  there  are  many  types 
which  are  Australian  in  character,  and  which  are  not 
found  upon  the  Asiatic  mainland  or  even  upon  Formosa. 

The  floral  world  has  in  it  features  of  both  Australia 
and  Asia,  and  even  the  human  world  has  in  it  types  as 
low  if  not  lower  than  the  aborigines  of  Australia,  and 


18  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

other  types  as  high  as  those  of  the  Malay  states.  It 
would  seem,  therefore,  that  the  Philippines  represent 
the  results  of  two  different  epochs.  One  was  the  epoch 
which  formed  the  long  axis  which  begins  in  the  Aleu- 
tians, runs  through  Japan,  the  Loo  Choos,  and  Formosa, 
and  the  other  epoch  which  brought  up  from  the  deep 
Australia  and  parts  of  Java,  Sumatra,  Borneo,  and 
Celebes.  The  combination  in  the  case  of  the  Philippines 
is  a  very  happy  one.  The  volcanoes  produce  mountains 
many  of  which  are  now  nine  thousand  feet  high,  and  in 
some  geologic  age  must  have  been  a  mile  higher.  These 
mountains  supplied  soil,  sand,  gravel,  rocks,  and  ores. 
The  coral  polyps  built  numberless  walls  and  plateaus 
which  were  elevated  until  they  reached  the  air,  and  then 
served  as  walls  and  breakwaters  behind  which  pools, 
shallows,  marshes,  and  finally  meadows  rich  and  fertile, 
came  slowly  into  being. 

From  the  steamer  one  can  see  the  endless  variety  of 
scenery  and  topography  which  resulted  from  this  dual 
cause.  Here  is  a  mountainous  district  and  around  it  is 
another  district  which  may  be  compared  with  Holland, 
or  even  the  city  of  Venice.  Lakes  and  lagoons  beyond 
number — bays  and  harbors,  landlocked  gulfs,  fiords, 
streams  and  canals  are  everywhere,  and  then  again  come 
hilly  districts,  followed  by  meadows  and  mountain  dis- 
tricts, ranging  all  the  way  from  Cape  Bojeador  down  to 
Serangani  Point  in  the  far  south. 

The  process  of  land-making  is  still  going  on.  Many 
of  the  volcanoes  are  still  active,  and  the  patient  coral 
polyps  never  cease  their  labors.  It  increases  the  beauty 
of  the  landscape  to  have  mountains  that  smoke  by  day, 
and  glare  like  titanic  lanterns  by  night.  At  the  same 
time  it  is  not  altogether  comfortable.  Such  instrumen- 
talities of  nature  are  usually  accompanied  by  earth- 


MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES.  19 

quakes, and  earthquakes  are  certainly  the  most  disagreea- 
ble visitors  known  to  civilized  man. 

Luzon  is  the  most  important  of  all  the  Philippines. 
It  is  the  most  populous,  having  about  five  million  people 
within  its  shores,  and  it  is  also  the  richest  and  most  civil- 
ized. It  is  as  large  as  New  York,  Massachusetts,  and 
Ehode  Island,  and  has  a  shore  line  which  if  rectified 
would  reach  from  the  Bay  of  Fundy  to  Key  West.  Of 
its  resources  but  little  is  thoroughly  known.  Spanish 
policy  has  been  toward  discouraging  all  enterprise  by 
native  as  well  as  by  foreigner,  and  the  territory  of  to- 
day is  the  same  as  it  was  a  century  ago,  so  far  as  investi- 
gation and  exploitation  are  concerned.  This  much, 
however,  is  known.  It  contains  large  quantities  of  gold, 
and  undetermined  amounts  of  silver,  mercury,  iron, 
copper,  lead,  brown  coal  or  lignite,  petroleum  and  true 
coal.  It  has  an  immense  supply  of  hard,  tropical  woods, 
and  is  fertile  beyond  all  belief. 

The  Chinese  and  Tagal  gardeners  raise  seven,  eight 
and  even  ten  crops  a  year  upon  their  little  farms.  This 
is  due  to  a  rich,  loamy  soil,  an  unfailing  supply  of  water, 
good  natural  drainage,  and  bright,  sunny  weather  nine- 
tenths  of  the  year.  Everything  grows  as  if  by  magio. 
A  yard  left  unoccupied  for  a  few  months  becomes  a  wil- 
derness of  flowers  and  weeds.  If  left  a  year  untouched 
it  becomes  a  jungle.  All  of  this  is  suggested  to  the 
observer  on  the  steamer's  deck.  The  rocks  are  green 
with  moss,  heavy  masses  of  creepers  and  vines  hang  upon 
the  face  of  every  cliff,  thick  forests  are  visible  near  the 
shore  and  far  away  in  the  interior. 

Scarcely  a  tilled  field  is  brown  or  shows  the  earth. 
The  sprouting  time  is  so  short  that  the  plowed  field 
of  to-day  takes  a  greenish  tinge  to-morrow,  and  has  a 
rich  tint  the  day  .after.  There  are  other  indication!* 


20  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

of  prosperity  and  fertility.  There  are  many  native  boats 
along  the  shore,  little  Spanish  steamers  puffing  noisily 
as  they  creep  from  place  to  place.  There  are  wagons 
drawn  by  buffaloes  on  every  road.  There  are  huts  and 
hovels  in  every  direction,  and  through  a  glass  human 
beings  can  be  seen  engaged  in  their  daily  vocations. 
Further  down  the  coast  the  steamer  passes  Cape  Bolinao, 
a  bold  promontory  which  runs  out  into  the  sea.  Here  is 
the  signal  station  from  which  the  ship's  approach  is 
telegraphed  to  Manila.  Here  also  is  the  cable  station 
which  sends  the  messages  under  the  China  Sea  to  far- 
away Hong  Kong.  Near  them  is  the  lighthouse,  that 
ever  welcome  sight  to  navigator  and  passenger  alike. 
The  station  is  very  picturesque,  the  mountains  and 
forests,  the  great  gulf  of  Lingayen,  and  the  thousand 
and  one  shades  of  green  tend  to  make  a  tableau  of 
memorable  beauty.  From  here  it  is  but  a  few  hours  to 
Manila  Bay,  which  on  account  of  its  vast  size  ought  to 
be  called  a  gulf.  The  opening  is  quite  narrow  and  is 
made  all  the  smaller  by  one  large  rocky  island  in  the 
center  of  the  passage  known  as  Corregidor  and  some 
smaller  ones  between  Corregidor  and  the  mainland. 
Upon  Corregidor  is  an  ancient  fort  of  more  beauty  than 
utility,  but  giving  a  very  pretty  effect  to  the  rocky  walls 
and  the  dark-green  vegetation  which  surround  it.  Once 
past  the  line  of  islands  the  great  bay  opens  up  as  if  the 
explorer  was  starting  into  a  new  ocean.  It  must  be 
thirty  miles  in  one  direction  and  thirty  in  another. 
Even  then  the  figures  are  misleading,  because  at  many 
points  the  bay  passes  into  shoals  and  salt  marshes  which 
are  part  land  and  part  water,  and  reach  for  miles  up  into 
the  interior.  Streams  run  into  the  bay  in  every  direc- 
tion. In  the  rainy  season  they  bring  down  huge  bodies 
of  silt  and  even  gravel  and  bowlders,  so  strong  is  the 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  21 

force  of  the  running  water.  It  is  this  detritus  which 
has  made  the  marshes,  the  shoals,  and  banks  of  the  bay, 
and  which  is  gradually  converting  that-  great  body  of 
water  into  a  swamp,  to  change  ultimately  to  noble 
meadow  land.  The  progress  of  the  change  is  indicated 
by  the  yellow  water  of  the  bay,  which  at  some  points 
looks  like  liquid  mud,  and  by  scores  of  buoys,  some 
floating  and  others  driven  into  the  mud  beneath,  which 
indicate  the  rising  of  the  bottom  toward  the  surface  of 
the  sea. 

It  takes  a  skilled  navigator  to  run  Manila  Bay  at  full 
speed.  Nearly  every  ship  which  comes  there  slacks  or 
stops  with  signal  flags  thrown  out  for  one  of  the  official 
pilots  who  make  an  excellent  living  at  their  trade.  As 
the  ship  goes  on  Cavite  comes  into  sight  and  then 
Manila.  Cavite  is  a  town  on  a  small  peninsula  which 
runs  out  from  the  mainland  in  a  general  northwestern 
direction,  inclosing  a  fine  bay  a  little  larger  than  that  of 
New  York.  On  the  other  side  of  the  bay  lies  the  capital 
of  the  Philippines.  At  Cavite  is  the  government  arsenal, 
shipyards,  docks,  forges,  and  repair  shops.  There  are 
forts  facing  both  west,  north  and  northeast,  formida- 
ble in  appearance,  and  seemingly  armed  with  powerful 
guns.  The  steamer  passes,  slackens  its  speed,  and  finally 
drops  anchor  anywhere  from  a  half-mile  to  two  miles 
from  the  city  proper.  The  voyage  is  done,  and  the  trav- 
eler is  now  under  the  shadow  of  the  red  and  yellow  ban- 
ner of  Spain.  The  anchor  is  scarcely  down  when  a 
vicious  little  steam  tug,  laden  with  customs  officials  and 
soldiers,  dashes  up  to  the  side  and  makes  fast  to  the 
companion  ladder.  Then  a  small  regiment  of  men  pour 
out  of  the  craft  on  board  the  steamer.  There  is  an  in- 
spector, proud  and  imperious,  who  goes  immediately  to 
the  captain's  private  room,  He  receives  the  ship's 


22  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

papers  and  the  passports  of  all  the  passengers,  which 
must  be  taken  to  the  government  house,  and  there  be 
entered  and  again  vised.  There  is  another  inspector 
whose  duty  apparently  is  to  see  that  the  ship  is  in  good 
sanitary  condition,  and  that  there  is  no  contagious 
disease  on  board.  There  is  a  third  inspector  whose 
duties  are  seemingly  to  keep  a  sharp  watch  upon  the 
officers  of  the  ship  lest  these  should  take  wings  and  fly 
away.  A  fourth  inspector,  and  a  fifth,  stand  on  either 
gunwale  to  prevent  wicked  passengers  or  seamen  from 
passing  dutiable  goods  out  of  the  portholes,  or  dropping 
them  with  telltale  floats  into  the  water  below.  Then 
there  are  several  inspectors  or  searchers  who  go  through 
the  ship.  Most  important  of  all  is  a  small  company  of 
soldiers  who  belong  to  the  Spanish  army  of  the  Philip- 
pines. Ifc  is  considered  a  great  privilege  to  do  customs 
work,  and  to  get  an  occasional  cup  of  coffee,  table  deli- 
cacy, or  cigar,  from  some  one  on  board  of  the  steamer. 
So  the  thoughtful  Spanish  general  assigns  his  best  men 
to  this  branch  of  the  service. 

In  seeing  these  soldiers,  therefore,  you  see  the  best  of 
the  Spanish  infantry  in  the  far  East.  They  are  not  a 
bad-looking  set.  They  are  nearly  all  young,  ranging 
from  sixteen  and  seventeen  years  of  age  to  about  thirty. 
Some  are  Spaniards,  some  are  Malays,  and  some  are 
half-breeds,  whom  it  is  difficult  to  determine.  The 
Philippines  from  time  immemorial  have  been  the  bat- 
tleground of  many  races.  On  Luzon  there  have  been  a 
Negroid  race,  a  Papuan  race,  two  Malay  races  at  least, 
Chinese  settlers,  Japanese,  and  Spanish.  None  of  these 
races  have  kept  themselves  aloof  from  others,  and  each 
and  all  have  blended  and  reblended,  until  in  the  course 
of  time  men  and  women  have  been  produced  in  whose 
veins  was  the  blood  of  at  least  six  different  ethnic  or 
anthropologic  types. 


<  Cft 

i-J       <U 

i  * 


W    -2 

g  :- 


<  ^ 

^ 

'o 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  23 

The  commonest  are  the  Spanish  Malay  half-caste,  next 
are  the  Chinese  Malay,  and  then  the  Chino-Spanish,  or 
Eurasian.  All  three  mixtures  are  satisfactory  physically 
and  mentally,  if  not  morally.  There  is  in  Manila  the 
same  prejudice  or  superstition  that  is  found  in  many 
parts  of  this  country,  namely,  that  half-breeds  generally 
combine  the  vices  of  both  parent  races. 

The  assumption  is  probably  as  true  there  as  it  is  here, 
that  is  to  say  not  true  at  all.  The  real  meaning  is  one 
that  pride  forbids  to  confess  (namely)  that  the  half-breeds 
represent  the  unrighteous  living  of  the  men  who  make 
the  declaration.  As  a  matter  of  fact  these  half-breeds, 
poor,  ignorant,  and  uncared  for,  make  very  good  soldiers. 
They  are  sober,  faithful,  and  obedient.  When  it  comes 
to  action  they  are  brave,  patient,  and  enduring.  They 
are  not  very  neat  in  their  appearance,  their  clothing  is 
old  and  shabby,  their  trousers  a  little  bit  fringed  at  the 
bottom,  and  many  go  barefoot,  or  wear  shoes  through 
which  the  brown  skin  is  painfully  visible.  They  are 
small  in  stature,  thin,  lithe,  and  sinewy.  They  are 
graceful  and  many  of  them  quite  comely.  Their  weapons 
are  in  fair  condition,  but  are  not  of  the  latest  pattern. 
But  all  from  the  highest  to  the  lowest  are  exceedingly 
polite.  Everbody  bows  to  everybody  else,  everybody 
smirks,  everybody  is  perpetually  expressing  an  interest 
in  the  health  and  welfare  of  everybody  else.  If  you  be- 
longed to  the  same  family  as  your  visitors  you  could 
not  receive  greater  attention.  Everyone  with  whom 
you  have  any  official  transaction  hopes  that  you  have 
had  a  good  voyage,  and  have  enjoyed  the  trip,  the  ship, 
and  the  courtesies  of  the  officers.  He  hopes  that  your 
health  is  faultless,  that  all  of  your  relatives  are  in  good 
spirits,  that  you  will  grace  Manila  and  the  Philippines 
for  many  years,  and  that  you  will  take  the  same  delight 


24  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

in  the  pleasant  people  of  your  nationality  ashore  that  he 
and  all  of  his  circle  do,  and  that  the  climate  will  prove 
agreeable  in  every  respect.  There  are  twenty  kind  ques- 
tions and  thirty  friendly  hopes  expressed  by  each  inspec- 
tor, searcher,  and  soldier.  You  are  expected  to  smile 
and  thank  him  at  each  pause,  and  at  the  end  to  ask  a 
similar  seiies  in  return. 

It  is  a  very  pleasant  system,  but  oh,  it  does  so  delay 
travel!  After  the  first  steam  launch  goes  away,  leaving 
soldiers  and  a  few  other  officials  on  board,  another 
launch  comes,  bringing  health  officers  and  more  soldiers; 
then  comes  a  third  launch  bringing  the  agent  of  the  con- 
signees. Then  come  cargo  and  passenger  boats  of  various 
sizes  and  kinds.  The  passenger  boats  are  called  bancas 
and  are  long,  heavy,  clumsy  craft  about  two  and  a  half 
or  three  feet  wide,  and  thirty  or  forty  feet  long.  A 
large  part  is  hooded  over,  the  hood,  with  a  boat,  forming 
a  dark  tunnel  into  which  you  crawl.  If  you  are  not 
careful  in  stepping  into  the  banca,  or  if  you  are  too 
careful,  you  go  into  the  water,  and  have  to  be  fished 
out.  The  banca  combines  many  virtues. 

It  can  be  rowed  like  a  shell,  paddled  like  a  canoe,  and 
poled  like  a  canal  boat.  It  can  also  be  sailed  like  a  cat- 
boat.  In  each  capacity  it  is  extremely  uncomfortable 
and  wearisome.  It  is  undoubtedly  a  survival  of  the  ship 
of  the  prehistoric  man,  which  consisted  of  a  large  log 
hollowed  out,  and  the  most  charitable  desire  on  the  part 
of  a  Christian  is  that  it  may  be  buried  with  the  aborigi- 
nal gentleman  who  invented  it. 

You  get  into  the  banca  in  prayer  and  trembling,  and 
then  sit  there  calmly  doing  nothing  until  the  boatman, 
the  steamer  steward,  and  the  customs  officials,  and  the 
soldiers  allow  your  baggage  to  be  transferred  from  your 
stateroom  to  your  side.  If  you  are  shrewd  you  will  give 


MANILA  AND    THE  PHILIPPINES.  25 

every  man  a  tip  or  you  will  give  the  captain  of  the 
soldiers  a  large  Mexican  dollar.  This  investment  saves 
considerable  time.  With  it  your  baggage  is  put  on 
board  in  about  five  minutes;  without  it  the  time  varies 
from  a  half-hour  to  a  full  hour.  When  everything  is 
on  board,  the  banca  pushes  off,  and  moves  leisurely  to 
the  city.  It  passes  into  the  river  which  flows  between 
walls  of  stone  and  is  more  truly  a  canal,  and  finally  stops 
at  a  landing,  where  it  is  made  fast  in  due  fashion.  You 
and  your  baggage  alight,  and  you  are  again  on  terra 
firma  in  the  good  city  of  Manila, 


26  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  HI. 

IN    MANILA. 

MANILA,  strictly  speaking,  has  three  meanings.  It  is 
the  ancient  walled  city,  which  is  the  legal  meaning.  It 
is  the  walled  city  and  its  suburbs,  which  is  the  popular 
meaning,  and  it  is  also  the  province,  district,  or  county, 
of  the  Island  of  Luzon,  where  the  city  is  situated.  The 
walled  city  lies  on  the  southern  bank  of  the  Pasig  River, 
and  is  walled  in  a  way  that  suggests  the  towns  and  cities 
of  the  middle  age.  The  walls  are  of  gray  stone  lined 
with  brick  or  rubble,  and  have  parapets,  bastions,  and 
machicolations.  They  look  picturesque  and  even  impos- 
ing. On  the  northern  side  the  river  serves  as  a  moat, 
and  on  the  west  the  sea,  or  more  properly  speaking,  the 
bay.  On  the  east  and  south  there  are  well-made  moats, 
paved  on  the  bottom  and  faced  with  stone  on  the  out- 
side, which  can  be  filled  with  water  in  the  event  of 
assault  by  an  enemy.  They  are  filled  by  large  oluice- 
ways,  equipped  with  heavy  gates  which  connect  the  east 
moat  with  the  river. 

The  last  time  they  were  employed  was  in  the  war  with 
Britain,  when  General  Draper,  with  a  strong  naval  and 
military  force,  attacked  and  captured  the  city.  These 
fortifications  were  built  three  hundred  and  eight  years 
ago  (1590)  by  General  and  Governor  Gomez  Perez  Das- 
marinas.  They  were  built  partly  by  forced  labor,  and 
partly  by  coolies  brought  over  from  China,  The  walls 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  2? 

altogether  are  about  two  miles  and  a  quarter  long,  and 
from  ten  to  twenty  feet  thick.  All  along  the  top  are 
ancient  cannon,  some  dating  from  the  latter  part  of 
the  fifteenth  century,  and  others  being  breech-loaders  of 
the  present  period. 

None  of  them  are  high-power  guns,  and  none  would 
be  of  use  against  modern  weapons,  -whether  of  warships 
or  of  siege  batteries.  The  masonry  was  good  honest 
work.  It  withstood  the  onset  of  war  without  showing 
any  particular  damage,  and  what  was  a  greater  test  of 
its  merit,  the  shocks  of  hundreds  of  earthquakes,  large 
and  small.  They  left  telltale  marks  of  their  enormous 
force.  That  of  1880  threw  down  an  arch  in  one  of  the 
gates,  and  others  fractured  walls  here  and  there,  produc- 
ing crevices  which  are  utilized  by  mouse  and  rat,  bat 
and  lizard,  and  occasionally  by  a  snake.  A  large  part  of 
the  moats  are  in  a  revolting  condition,  being  half-filled 
with  a  hideous  mixture  of  vegetable  matter,  stagnant 
water  covered  with  slime,  mud,  and  the  refuse  of  a  large 
city.  It  is  known  to  produce  fever  and  malarial  diseases 
and  for  that  reason  the  Spaniards  are  afraid  to  clean  it, 
lest  by  disturbing  the  foul  matter  the  evils  are  suddenly 
increased. 

"While  the  fortifications  are  no  protection  in  modern 
warfare,  they  might  be  of  use  in  the  event  of  a  riot,  or 
possibly  of  a  rebellion.  It  would  depend  entirely  upon 
the  arms  possessed  in  such  a  case  by  the  insurgents. 
The  medieval  idea  is  still  further  carried  by  having  a 
garrison  composed  of  Caucasians,  half-breeds  and  Malays, 
which  guards  the  gates,  patrols  the  walls,  and  keeps  up 
the  make-believe  of  war. 

It  should  not  be  forgotten  that  the  Philippines  have 
never  been  thoroughly  civilized  by  the  Spaniards,  and 
that  as  late  as  1849  piratical  craft  from  Mindanao  and 


28  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

Sulu  came  up  to  within  a  few  miles  of  the  city  walls. 
They  afterward  retired  to  their  inaccessible  harbors  in 
the  south  without  particular  molestation  from  the  Span- 
iards. Nearly  all  of  the  destruction  of  piracy  in  those 
seas  has  been  accomplished  by  British  gunboats,  which 
may  be  said  to  have  done  more  for  the  protection  of 
Manila  than  both  its  walls  and  fleets  combined.  Against 
these  freebooters  of  the  sea  these  fortifications  would  be 
always  serviceable. 

The  walled  city  has  eight  gates,  each  one  of  which  is 
provided  with  a  clumsy  drawbridge.  All  of  them  were 
provided  with  portcullises,  but  these  are  no  longer  used. 
Up  to  1852  the  drawbridges  were  raised  every  night  at 
eleven,  and  lowered  every  morning  at  four.  Inside  the 
walls  are  many  government  offices,  the  branch  post 
office,  telegraph  office,  the  old  custom  house,  some  col- 
leges, convents,  a  weather  observatory,  an  arsenal,  a  cathe- 
dral, and  eleven  churches.  There  are  seventeen  streets 
crossing  at  right  angles,  and  many  shops  and  small 
stores.  In  the  past  ten  years  there  has  been  an  attempt 
to  beautify  both  the  city  and  suburbs  by  the  establishing 
of  little  parks  and  public  gardens.  On  the  other  side  of 
the  river  is  the  island  and  district  known  as  Binondo, 
which  is  the  great  trading  center  of  the  city,  and  the 
site  of  the  foreign  merchants  and  the  Chinese  quarter. 

The  streets  are  quite  wide  and  well  paved,  and  here 
and  there  are  the  beginnings  of  attempts  to  construct 
boulevards.  Taken  as  a  whole  the  district  looks  very 
prosperous,  but  both  neglected  and  unfinished.  The  ex- 
port and  import  business  is  chiefly  in  the  hands  of  the 
British,  the  retail  business  is  controlled  by  the  Chinese. 
There  are  twenty-four  Chinese  merchants  of  great  wealth 
and  position,  who  receive  the  social  and  political  recog- 
nition denied  to  the  average  member  of  their  race  in 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  £9 

Manila.  Although  Chinese  labor  is  supposed  to  be  dis- 
countenanced, yet  a  large  part  of  the  hardest  work  in 
the  metropolis  is  done  by  that  race.  In  every  part  of 
both  city  and  suburbs  the  commonest  sight  is  that  of 
half-naked  coolies  carrying  loads  upon  their  heads  and 
shoulders,  driving  carts,  and  performing  the  most  servile 
work.  They  also  control,  but  they  do  not  monopolize, 
such  industries  as  boot  and  shoe  making,  furniture-mak- 
ing, cabinet  work,  blacksmithing,  iron  casting,  metal 
smithery,  tin-working,  tanning  and  dyeing.  The 
working  classes  live  in  a  district  of  the  city  called 
Tondo.  It  is  well  worth  visiting ;  but  no  one  should  go 
there  without  taking  a  good  dose  of  quinine,  and  spray- 
ing the  body  and  clothing  with  disinfectants.  The 
houses  are  hovels,  packed  close  together,  and  alive  with 
human  beings  and  animals,  not  to  speak  of  vermin. 
There  are  no  sewers.  The  drainage,  garbage,  and  silt 
lie  upon  the  ground,  forming  noisome  pools  or- slowly 
oozing  into  open  ditches,  always  choked  up,  which  are 
found  in  every  street  and  ally. 

In  this  district  the  death  rate  is  often  two  hundred  to 
the  thousand,  and  here  every  year  starts  the  epidemic 
fever,  which  carries  off  tens  of  thousands.  The  other 
suburbs  are  more  rustic,  cleaner  and  beautiful. 

The  land  is  low  and  the  waters  of  the  river  and  of  the 
sea  form  long  arms,  canals,  ponds  and  lakes  in  endless 
variety.  This  "part  of  Manila  has  often  been  compared 
to  Venice,  and  might,  if  treated  by  capable  landscape 
gardeners  and  engineers,  be  made  into  an  earthly  para- 
dise. 

On  the  shore  is  a  narrow  park  or  driveway  called  the 
Lunetta,  where,  every  evening  during  the  season,  a  fine 
concert  is  given  by  a  military  band.  Americans  encoun- 
ter a  familiar  spectacle  in  a  horse-oar  line,  which  runs 


30  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

through  the  city  and  suburbs,  and  which  terminates 
near  the  station  of  a  small  railway  connecting  Binondo 
with  the  pretty  village  of  Malabon.  In  Manila  every- 
body has  his  own  vehicle  and  horse.  The  vehicles  are 
a  queer  collection.  The  best  consists  of  a  small  and 
cheap  victoria  or  barouche,  while  the  cheapest  and  poor- 
est is  a  square  box  with  a  ladder  at  the  end  set  upon 
two  wheels,  without  strings,  and  drawn  by  a  dilapidated 
horse.  The  rates  charged  for  the  use  of  the  conve- 
niences are  very  reasonable.  For  a  good  barouche  and 
team  the  tariff  is  about  twenty-five  cents  for  a  short 
trip,  while  for  a  little  box  cart  it  is  ten  cents  if  you 
engage  all  the  accommodation,  and  five  cents  if  you  are 
one  of  a  party  of  three  or  four.  The  drivers  are  very 
polite,  and  also  kind  to  their  animals.  They  have  an 
odd  habit  of  keeping  up  an  extended  conversation  with 
their  horses,  and  prefer  to  direct  them  by  voice  rather 
than  by  pressure  upon  the  reins.  The  same  thing  is 
done  by  the  driver  of  the  buffalo  cart,  so  that  a  street 
crowded  with  vehicles  is  quite  a  noisy  assemblage. 

There  are  many  drug  stores  in  both  the  city  and  the 
suburbs.  The  largest  and  best  is  an  enormous  English 
establishment  run  as  a  branch  by  a  Hong  Kong  corpora- 
tion. One  or  two  are  conducted  by  Germans,  while  the 
rest  are  managed  by  natives,  half-caste  and  Chinese. 
Many  years  ago  the  apothecaries  of  the  Philippines  were 
nearly  all  Germans;  but  the  progress  of  education  in 
that  part  of  the  world  introduced  the  study  of  pharmacy. 
The  opportunity  was  immediately  embraced  by  half- 
castes  and  Chinese,  and  these  in  the  course  of  time  drove 
the  Europeans  out  of  business. 

The  poorest-paid  German  drug  clerk  usually  receives 
ten  dollars  a  week,  while  the  Chinese  and  half-breed 
drug  clerks  are  glad  to  work  for  that  sum  a  month.  On 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  31 

account  of  the  climate  the  busy  hours  are  in  the  after- 
noon and  evening,  when  two  or  three  clerks  are  neces- 
sary, so  that  the  difference  in  expense  in  clerk  hire 
alone  would  put  the  German  establishment  at  a  serious 
disadvantage. 

The  people  of  Manila  are  not  good  patrons  of  the  stage 
and  the  opera.  There  is  no  theater  in  the  city  proper, 
nor  opera  house,  and  there  are  but  three  places  of  amuse- 
ment in  the  suburbs.  At  the  Teatro  Filipino,  the  build- 
ing is  largely  an  open  framework  so  that  the  performance 
can  be  seen  from  the  yard  or  garden  beyond  it,  and 
partly  from  the  street  outside.  At  the  Teatro  del  Prin- 
cipe, there  is  a  stock  company  which  gives  low  comedy, 
dialect  entertainments,  and  rather  dreary  farces;  while 
the  third  house,  the  Teatro  de  Tondo,  is  situated  in  what 
we  would  call  the  slums,  and  gives  popular  melodramas. 
Now  and  then  the  city  is  visited  by  dramatic  companies, 
the  Italian  opera,  or  a  good  concert  organization,  and 
patronizes  its  visitors  in  a  very  handsome  manner.  The 
most  popular  amusement  is  the  American  circus.  No 
matter  what  the  manager  or  performers,  every  circus  in 
the  far  East  is  known  as  "American,"  and  in  fact  most  of 
them,  as  a  matter  of  business  enterprise,  own  the  rights  of 
some  American  organization. 

When  these  go  to  Manila  they  receive  an  almost  royal 
ovation,  Europeans  and  natives  alike  flock  to  the  per- 
formances, of  which  two  are  given  a  day.  Crowds  of 
country  people  will  ride  or  walk  in,  sometimes  taking 
journeys  of  ten  and  fifteen  miles  to  see  the  show.  No 
company  plays  a  shorter  term  than  three  weeks,  and 
many  play  eight  weeks.  These  visits  are  profitable,  as 
the  board  of  man  and  beast  is  very  cheap,  the  cost  of 
laborers  small,  and  a  band  of  Malay  or  Manila  musicians 
oan  be  secured  for  twenty-five  cents  a  performer  a  night. 


8*  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

Barnum  is  not  the  first  to  charter  a  steamer  and  cross 
the  sea  to  give  a  circus  performance  in  another  land.  It 
has  been  done  for  twenty  years  in  the  far  East,  the  ships 
going  from  Hong  Kong  or  Amoy  to  Manila. 

There  is  a  bull  ring  in  the  suburb  of  Paco,  and  here 
the  noble  sport  of  torturing  and  killing  bulls  for  human 
amusement  sinks  down  to  its  lowest  depths.  No  self- 
respecting  Spanish  toreador  will  come  out  to  the  Philip- 
pines, so  that  the  artists  are  "native  talent."  In  place 
of  the  fierce  Andalusian  bulls  which  are  bred  for  ring 
purposes,  they  have  the  low-spirited  and  decepit  animals 
of  the  Philippines.  European  cattle  do  not  thrive  in 
that  part  of  the  world,  and  although  they  manage  to 
exist,  they  are  sorry  specimens  compared  with  the  origi- 
nal stock.  Beside  being  small,  poorly  developed,  and 
timid  they  are  also  lazy  and  slow.  The  ring  performers 
take  advantage  of  these  peculiarities  in  order  to  win 
cheap  applause  from  the  audience.  The  heroic  toreador 
frequentb'  catches  hold  of  the  bull's  tail  and  has  the 
affrighted  animal  pull  him  around  the  ring.  An  agile 
bandillerist  will  vault  over  the  bull  in  motion  or  will 
dodge  under  him  when  at  rest.  The  poor  quadruped 
seems  in  a  daze  and  does  his  best  to  escape.  The  bipeds 
chase  him  about  the  place,  striking  him  with  spear 
points  or  with  the  butts  of  lances,  pricking  him  with 
various  instruments,  kicking  him  at  times  with  their  feet, 
and  after  a  disgusting  entertainment  of  fifteen  or  twenty 
minutes  they  murder  the  animal  in  cold  blood.  The 
local  aristocracy  declines  to  patronize  the  institution 
upon  the  ground  of  the  inferiority  of  the  sport,  but  the 
Spanish  lower  classes,  the  half-breeds,  and  a  few  natives 
attend  the  performances,  partly  to  gratify  their  cruel 
nature,  and  partly  to  imitate  the  example  of  their  supe- 
riors in  Spain. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  33 

If  the  bull-fighting  is  bad  at  Manila,  the  cock-fighting 
is  of  the  best  quality.  The  Spaniards  are  monomaniacs 
on  the  subject,  and  the  natives  have  been  trained  to 
imitate  their  masters.  It  is  a  source  of  revenue  to  the 
Spanish  government,  which  not  alone  taxes  it  but  rents 
out  the  tax  to  the  highest  bidder.  In  this  way  the  gov- 
ernment gets  a  nice  income  from  the  sport,  and  a  shrewd 
speculator  is  enabled  to  feather  his  financial  nest. 

There  is  a  legal  code  of  cock-fighting  which  is  as  well 
known  to  the  people  as  the  code  of  civil  procedure  is  to 
a  New  York  lawyer.  Among  the  regulations  is  one 
which  confines  the  sport  to  Sundays  and  feast  days. 
Another  regulation  extends  the  time  for  Manila  alone, 
where  Thursdays  are  also  set  aside.  Each  place  has  the 
official  gallery  or  cockpit,  and  if  the  fighting  is  held  any- 
where else  all  participants  are  liable  to  arrest,  fine  and 
imprisonment.  The  laws  or  rules  of  the  pit  are  strict,and 
are  amended  by  the  government  every  year  or  two,  so  as 
to  increase  the  interest  or  excitement  in  the  sport.  All 
people  are  allowed  to  bet,  but  no  one  may  bet  more  than 
fifty  dollars  on  one  contest.  A  cock  may  wear  one  metal 
spur,  but  not  two.  The  spur,  however,  is  made  of  the 
best  steel,  and  is  ground  and  pointed  until  it  may  be 
compared,  in  a  small  way,  to  a  first-class  bowie  knife. 
The  fight  is  held  to  be  terminated  on  the  death  of  one  or 
both  cocks,  or  when  one  of  them  turns  and  runs  away. 
The  code  on  this  subject  contains  no  less  than  one  hun- 
dred specific  sections.  Wealthy  men  breed  fighting- 
cocks  on  a  large  scale,  while  poor  enthusiasts  will  buy 
the  eggs  and  hatch  and  raise  one  or  two  for  their  own 
benefit.  The  birds  are  very  handsome,  in  fact,  hand- 
some than  those  of  Spain  or  the  United  States.  This  is 
due,  according  to  connoisseurs,  to  crossing  the  breed  with 
the  wild  cock  of  the  Philippines,  which  is  the  most  beau- 


34  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

tiful,  muscular,  and  agile  member  of  the  gallinaceous 
family. 

The  clergy  are  among  the  best  patrons  of  the  sport. 
They  are  successful  breeders  skillful  handlers,  and  regu- 
lar bettors.  The  officers  of  the  army  and  navy  are  good 
patrons,  but  confine  themselves  chiefly  to  betting. 
Wealthy  men  back  their  own  entries  at  the  fight,  but 
consider  it  undignified  to  handle  or  assist  at  the  fight- 
ing. The  gallery  is  well  patronized  at  all  times.  On 
Thursday  the  place  is  well  filled,  but  on  Sundays  and 
feast  days  it  is  often  crowded  to  suffocation. 

There  is  much  music,  public  and  private,  at  Manila, 
and  some  of  it  is  of  more  than  average  quality.  The 
friars  make  music  a  part  of  the  school  curriculum  and 
also  regard  it  as  a  means  to  a  livelihood.  There  must 
be  several  thousand  natives  and  half-castes  who  have 
been  thoroughly  educated  in  the  use  each  of  one  or  more 
instruments,  and  after  that  as  a  member  of  a  band  or 
orchestra.  The  Spanish  army  is  provided  with  good 
regimental  bands,  and  each  ol  the  native  regiments  in 
times  of  peace  has  a  small  band  attached  to  it.  The 
commanding  officers  by  picking  the  individual  perform- 
ers will  often  establish  military  bands  which  will  com- 
pare favorably  with  the  more  famous  organizations  of 
the  United  States.  Beside  the  public  performances 
there  are  private  concerts,  and  also  musical  entertain- 
ments given  by  staff  officers,  schools,  churches,  and  other 
institutions. 

The  Malays  take  kindly  to  martial  music  and  display 
enthusiasm  over  a  brass  band.  On  the  other  hand,  the}' 
do  not  seem  to  care  for  fine  music,  especially  that  which 
requires  stringed  and  wooden  instruments.  The  Span- 
iards have  no  very  great  love  of  it  either.  They  are 
crazy  over  dance  music,  popular  operatic  airs,  and  light, 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  35 

and  comic  opera,  but  manifest  no  interest  in  the  higher 
compositions.  Nearly  all  concerts  in  Manila  consist  of 
marches,  overtures  to  famous  operas,  familiar  arias  writ- 
ten for  a  full  band,  dances,  popular  songs,  and  war 
music. 

There  is  a  good  jockey  club  in  the  city,  which  holds  a 
race  week  every  year,  and  does  creditable  work,  consid- 
ering the  conditions  of  the  place.  The  president  is 
usually  a  Spanish  nobleman,  while  the  working  members 
are  Englishmen,  Americans,  and  Spaniards  who  have 
been  educated  in  England.  The  club  has  a  tine  track, 
and  by  offering  an  extraordinary  number  of  prizes,  in- 
cluding consolation  rewards,  makes  it  possible  for  young 
men,  who  are  well  to  do,  but  not  wealthy,  to  become 
patrons  of  the  turf. 

During  the  race  week  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  and 
fifty  horses  are  entered  in,  the  various  events.  The  rid- 
ing is  done  by  gentlemen  jockeys,  there  being  no  profes- 
sionals in  the  country.  The  best  animals  are  Chinese 
ponies,  and  next  to  them  the  Timor  ponies.  As  the 
animals  are  very  small  and  the  riders  are  usually  well 
built  young  men,  the  times  made  in  the  races  are  exceed- 
ingly good.  The  strength  of  these  little  animals,  their 
endurance  and  vitality,  are  truly  remarkable.  The 
pony  will  enter  three  races  in  one  day  carrying  a  man 
weighing  a  hundred  and  thirty-five  pounds,  will  run  at 
full  speed  the  entire  distance,  and  will  be  seemingly  as 
fresh  and  alert  at  the  end  of  the  last  race  as  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  meeting.  The  races  are  popular,  and 
bring  out  the  social  world  much  more  than  do  races 
around  New  York  City.  In  place  of  a  grand  stand,  and 
long  boards,  the  practice  in  the  Orient  is  to  have  a  small, 
handsome  stand  for  officers  of  the  club  and  invited 
guests  and  numbers  of  private  stands,  each  belonging  to  a 


36  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

member.  The  stands  are  two  stories  high,  the  lower 
one  being  used  as  a  stable,  and  the  upper,  which  is  open 
on  three  sides,  as  a  place  where  the  owner  entertains  his 
friends.  Lavish  hospitality  is  shown  during  race  week, 
every  stand  owner  keeping  open  house.  The  table  is  set 
at  the  back  part  of  the  stand,  and  is  supplied  with  cold 
meats,  salads,  biscuit,  cake,  sweetmeats,  coffee  and  tea, 
and  also  champagne,  vino  tinto  Bordeaux,  brandy, 
Scotch  whisky,  ale,  beer,  and  soda.  The  festivities  last 
all  day,  both  eating  and  drinking  running  on  con- 
tinuously. 

Social  pleasures  are  few  and  small,  consisting  chiefly 
of  formal  visits,  or  an  interchange  of  courtesies  between 
carriages.  As  for  hotels,  but  little  can  be  said  in  com- 
pliment to  Manila.  There  is  only  one  hotel  worthy  of 
the  name,  the  Hotel  de  Oriental.  It  is  very  small  meas- 
ured by  American  standards,  having  only  eighty-three 
rooms  for  public  service,  and  accommodations  for 
twenty-five  horses.  It  is  clean,  neat,  well  ventilated, 
and  attractive.  The  service  is  first  class,  and  the  cook- 
ing admirable.  Beside  the  leading  dishes  of  the  French 
cuisine  it  serves  the  national  dishes  of  Spain  so  as  to 
captivate  the  most  fastidious  eater.  Its  chicken,  chile 
peppers  and  rice  are  a  revelation  to  those  who  have 
never  eaten  that  ancient  Barcelona  dish.  On  occasions 
it  serves  tamales  larger  than  the  Mexican  article  with  a 
filling  made  of  game  instead  of  chicken,  as  is  the  case 
with  the  latter.  Most  notable  of  all,  it  dispenses  a  curry 
equal  to  the  finest  productions  of  Bombay  or  Calcutta. 
Its  most  popular  curry  is  one  made  of  camerones  or  large 
prawns,  and  the  side  dishes  served  with  it  include  the 
Bombay  duck,  the  Macassar  red  fish,  fried  breadfruit, 
fried  onions,  granulated  roast  peanuts,  Spanish  anchovies, 
grated  young  cocoanut,  green  and  red  chile  ribbons, 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  37 

mango  chutney,  green  chutney,  English  pickled  wal- 
nuts, English  mustard  pickles,  and  palm  farina.  It  is 
the  most  elaborate  curry  east  of  India,  and  is  superior  to 
anything  in  either  the  United  States  or  even  in  Europe 
itself. 

The  punkahs,  or  huge  broad  fans  suspended  from  the 
ceiling,  and  swung  with  a  rope  by  a  coolie  in  an  ad- 
jacent corridor,  are  spotlessly  clean,  and  very  artistic  in 
design.  The  hotel  floral  decorations  are  elaborate  and 
very  sightly.  The  Hotel  de  Madrid  in  Intramuros,  the 
Hotel  del  Universa,  and  La  Catalanta  have  good  Spanish 
cooking,  bad  rooms,  and  very  inferior  service.  La 
Esperanza  Intramuros  has  the  best  cooking  of  all  the 
Spanish  establishments,  and  the  worst  lodging  accommo- 
dations. There  are  others  of  which  the  reputation  has 
traveled  far  and  wide.  They  are  said  to  be  inferior  to 
the  vile  inns  of  the  Mongolian  steppes  where  men, 
camels,  horses,  pigs,  and  goats,  sleep  together  in  the 
same  room. 

At  some  period  in  the  past  a  governor-general  with  a 
little  more  intelligence  and  less  dishonesty  than  most  of 
his  class  started  a  botanical  garden.  It  opened  with  a 
flourish  of  trumpets  and  made  a  very  attractive  spot  for 
citizen  and  visitor  alike,  but  the  next  governor-general 
gave  it  no  attention,  and  the  poor  garden  has  gone  on 
from  bad  to  worse,  until  it  is  now  a  very  mournful 
spectacle. 

The  annual  budget  shows  that  it  is  provided 
for  by  the  authorities,  and  that  several  eminent  gentle- 
men of  scientific  accomplishments  take  care  of  it,  and  are 
paid  therefor  by  the  state.  They  are  never  seen  at  the 
garden,  and  according  to  popular  rumor  are  to  be  found 
at  the  colonial  office  in  Madrid,  where  it  is  to  be  believed 
they  draw  or  discount  their  salaries  with  official  prompt- 


38  MANILA   AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

ness.  A  few  policemen-soldiers  are  detailed  to  the 
garden  to  prevent  British  travelers  from  running  away 
with  the  trees — and  a  handful  of  beggars  monopolize  the 
prettiest  spots  in  the  place,  where  they  whine  and  howl 
for  alms  at  the  approach  of  every  comer. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  39 


CHAPTER    IV. 

THE   PEOPLE    OP   MANILA. 

WHILE  Manila  covers  a  large  territory  it  is  not  as  popu- 
lous as  other  cities  of  the  same  size.  It  grows  steadily, 
and  with  a  wise  administration  would  be  one  of  the  first 
cities  of  the  far  East,  but  it  is  already  surpassed  by  Hong 
Kong  and  Shanghai  in  population,  and  by  both  these 
cities  as  well  as  by  Yokohama,  Nagasaki,  Singapore,  and 
Batavia,  in  commerce,  wealth,  beauty,  power,  and  civili- 
zation. The  Spaniards  who  come  out  there  do  so  with 
the  intention  of  making  a  fortune,  no  matter  by  what 
means,  in  as  short  a  time  as  possible,  and  of  then  return- 
ing to  their  native  land.  Thus  the  governing  class  is 
forever  changing,  and  the  institutions  in  which,  by 
reason  of  their  official  position,  they  take  a  leading  part, 
have  no  opportunity  of  developing  in  legitimate  manner. 
The  houses  built  by  the  government,  or  built  at  the  gov- 
ernment's expense,  make  fine  residences  and  add  a  cer- 
tain dignity  to  the  place,  but  they  are  few  in  number, 
and  do  not  accommodate  more  than  a  tenth  of  the  transi- 
tory office  holders.  These  having  no  local  interest  ex- 
cepting that  of  greed  and  rapacity,  live  the  best  they 
can  and  make  no  improvements  in  the  country  of  which 
they  ought  to  be  the  chief  supporters  and  aids.  Many 
of  the  officials  have  a  room  or  two,  a  little  bungalow, 
and  live  and  eat  in  the  Spanish  club,  or  at  the  cheap 
restaurants  in  the  citadel  or  the  suburbs.  The 


40  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

thing  applies  to  a  large  extent  to  the  foreign  merchants. 
Even  if  they  like  the  place  well  enough  to  remain,  the 
attitude  of  the  governing  classes  is  such  that  each  and 
all  are  desirous  of  leaving  the  country  at  the  earliest 
moment.  Nevertheless,  these  men  have  far  more  public 
spirit  than  the  officials. 

They  build  fine  homes,  create  beautiful  gardens,  erect 
substantial  and  even  luxurious  business  establishments, 
subscribe  for  improvements  and  co-operate  in  measures 
for  the  public  welfare.  The  Spaniards  who  live  there 
are  very  poor,  and  through  either  the  climate  or  heredity 
are  slothful,  unambitious,  and  unenergetic.  The  natives 
are  sufficiently  industrious  to  earn  a  comfortable  living, 
but  go  no  further  for  fear  that  they  might  be  robbed  by 
the  official  classes.  The  busiest  people  there  are  the 
Chinese  and  the  Chinese  half-breeds.  These  are  always 
working,  no  matter  what  the  weather.  They  bring  the 
thrift  and  patience  of  Canton  across  the  China  Sea,  and 
although  they  are  "squeezed"  and  blackmailed,  they  gen- 
erally manage  to  accumulate  a  competence.  These 
varying  tendencies  express  themselves  in  the  growth  and 
character  of  the  population.  A  careful  study  of  the 
census  indicates  very  clearly  the  direction  in  which 
Manila  is  growing.  The  present  population  has,  of 
course,  been  diminished  by  the  war  with  the  United 
States  and  the  insurrection  of  Kizal  and  Aguinaldo. 
It  is  estimated  to  be  about  three  hundred  thousand,  of 
which  natives,  chiefly  Tagals,  number  two  hundred  thou- 
sand, the  Chinese,  forty  thousand ;  and  the  Chinese  half- 
breeds  fifty  thousand,  the  Spaniards,  including  officials 
and  Creoles,  five  thousand;  the  Spanish  half-breeds  about 
twelve  thousand,  and  Europeans  and  Americans,  about 
four  hundred. 

The  number  of  Spaniards  is  very  little  larger  now  than 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  41 

it  was  forty  years  ago.  The  number  of  foreigners  is 
about  the  same.  The  number  of  Chinese  increases 
slowly,  of  natives  more  rapidly,  and  of  both  Spanish  and 
Chinese  half-breeds  more  rapidly  still.  These  half-breeds 
tell  an  eloquent  tale  of  the  condition,  both  social  and 
political.  The  Chinese  half-breeds  are  an  evidence  of 
polygamy.  A  Chinese  merchant  usually  has  a  Chinese 
•wife,  and  one  or  more  native  slaves,  servants  or  wives, 
the  legal  status  being  very  vague.  It  is  contrary  to 
Spanish  law  and  has  to  be  paid  for  accordingly.  The 
state  of  affairs,  however,  is  not  as  bad  as  the  statistics 
seem  to  indicate.  To  the  Chinaman  these  half-breed 
children  are  generally  as  dear  as  those  by  his  Chinese 
wife.  He  educates  them  carefully,  and  brings  them  up 
in  his  own  business.  They  inherit  from  their  mother 
the  qualities  which  fit  them  for  the  climate,  and  from  the 
Chinese  side  of  the  house  the  perseverance  and  indomi- 
table will  which  mark  that  race.  They  become  prosper- 
ous merchants  and  wealthy  men.  The  Spanish  half- 
breeds  on  the  other  side  represent  a  very  different  condi- 
tion. They  are  usually  the  children  of  Spanish  officers 
and  officials  by  native  women,  and  are  viewed  with  no 
affection  by  their  male  parents,  but,  on  the  contrary, 
with  dislike  and  even  aversion.  The  father  goes  home 
to  Spain  after  three  or  four  years,  making  no  provision 
for  the  unfortunate  offspring.  These  grow  up  with 
no  advantages,  and  with  a  stigma  about  them  which  is 
bound  to  hold  them  down  through  life. 

From  this  class  the  dangerous  element  of  Manila  is 
largely  recruited.  Some  of  them,  it  must  be  confessed, 
are  remarkably  handsome.  They  inherit  the  oval  face 
and  regular  features  of  the  Spaniards,  the  magnificent 
eyes,  smooth  velvety  skin,  and  the  supple  grace  of  the 
Malay.  They  have  the  courtesy  of  the  one,  the  sweet- 


42  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES, 

ness  and  kindness  of  the  other.  They  have  a  small  moral 
nature,  and  a  weak  will  power.  The  men  become  gam- 
blers and  the  women  usually  drift  into  the  ranks  of  the 
lost. 

If  things  were  left  to  themselves  it  is  only  a  question 
of  time  when  Manila  would  become  a  Chinese  city,  and 
it  seems  probable  that  under  free  access  to  the  land  the 
Philippines  themselves  would  in  a  hundred  years  be- 
come a  territory  as  thoroughly  Chinese  as  Formosa  itself. 

In  regard  to  costumes  the  streets  of  Manila  afford  a 
pleasant  study  for  the  traveler.  The  Spanish  men  dress 
either  in  their  national  style  or  imitate  their  next  door 
neighbors  the  French.  Even  in  the  tropics  ^they  wear 
at  times,  the  unlovely  stovepipe  hat,  the  black  frock 
coat,  and  the  black  patent-leather  shoes  which  seem  to 
have  a  perpetual  fascination  for  many  branches  of  the 
Latin  race.  Some  of  them  modify  this  costume  with 
comfortable  results.  The  black  cloth  coat  is  replaced  by 
one  of  silk,  alpaca  or  mohair,  the  vest  and  trousers  are 
of  white  or  yellow  linen,  and  the  shoes  are  of  black  or 
white  cloth  and  cut  very  low  about  the  ankle.  Some  of 
then  dispense  with  the  vest  and  display  a  spotless  linen 
shirt  of  the  finest  quality. 

It  may  be  said  at  this  point  that  the  Spanish  linen 
goods  of  Manila  are  equal  to  anj'thing  in  the  world. 
They  are  made  by  old-fashioned  methods  and  are  a  trifle 
heavier  than  those  worn  by  Americans,  and  they  are  also 
three  times  as  strong  and  durable.  The  half-breeds 
usually  follow  either  their  Spanish  parent  or  else  take  after 
the  foreigners.  The  foreign  fashions  are  led  by  the  Eng- 
lish. The  hat  is  a  soft  felt  known  as  a  terai,  a  light  pith 
helmet  covered  with  white  or  gray  cloth,  and  sometimes 
a  straw  hat  of  either  Manila  or  Panama. 

The  clothing  is  of  white  linen,  white  cotton,  Japanese 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  43 

crepe,  thin  cloth,  Nankin  karkee,  or  seersucker.  The 
cotton  is  the  military  sack  buttoned  close  up  to  the  neck. 
Under  it  is  worn  a  singlet,  but  no  shirt  or  waistcoat. 
The  Chinese  wear  proudly  the  costumes  of  Canton.  The 
Chinese  coolies  wear  a  mere  breech-cloth,  or  else  a  pair 
of  cotton  overalls  reaching  to  the  knee.  The  Chinese 
clerks  wear  dark  blue  blouses  and  light  blue  baggy 
trousers,  while  the  Chinese  merchants  wear  handsome 
robes  of  silk  and  satin,  oftentimes  richly  embroidered. 
Many  of  the  half-breeds  and  the  poorer  Spaniards  have 
an  odd  trick  of  wearing  the  shirt  over  the  trousers. 
This  funny  practice  is  adopted  likewise  by  many  of  the 
natives,  some  of  whom  make  it  all  the  more  ridiculous 
by  wearing  over  the  shirt,  which  is  of  white  linen  or 
yellow  pina  cloth,  a  dark  colored  short  tailors'  coat  or 
jacket.  The  soldiers  who  are  Spaniard  and  half-castes 
wear  their  uniforms. 

Neither  Spanish  women,  nor  women  of  other  nationali- 
ties, are  seen  much  on  the  street.  Under  Spanish 
etiquette  it  is  bad  form  for  a  woman  to  go  out  walking 
alone,  or  with  one  of  her  own  sex,  and  it  is  also  bad  form 
for  them  to  be  escorted  by  any  man  excepting  their 
brother,  husband,  or  father.  When  they  do  go  out  it  is 
in  a  vehicle  of  some  sort.  They  then  dress  for  the  occa- 
sion, and  display  good  taste  and  a  well-developed  love  of 
color  in  their  apparel.  The  Chinese  women's  servants 
go  about  the  streets  with  long  coats  of  glazed  brown,  black 
or  blue  cotton  cloth,  and  trousers  of  the  same  material. 
Chinese  ladies  are  never  seen  in  the  streets,  unless  it  be 
in  a  half-closed  carriage.  They  are  then  attired  in  silk 
in  all  the  colors  of  the  rainbow.  The  native  women 
have  all  the  Malay  love  of  color.  The  skirt  is  usually  in 
two  or  more  colors,  the  favorite  tint  being  red,  next  to 
that  white,  and  next  to  that  green.  They  do  not  wear 


44  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

corsets,  but  a  low  white  chemisette  and  a  neckcloth  or 
collarette,  which  meets  the  chemisette  both  at  the  front 
and  back.  The  chemisette  is  finished  by  two  immense 
baggy  sleeves,  and  the  head  is  often  covered  with  a 
mantle  or  mantilla  in  thin  material.  They  wear  no 
stockings,  but  slip  their  feet  into  a  queer  little  slipper 
which  consists  of  a  small,  flat  sole  with  a  little  band  or 
strap  which  goes  across  the  foot.  The  peasant  women  come 
into  the  city  every  day  with  fruits  and  vegetables,  eggs, 
and  chickens,  wear  a  short  skirt  which  is  covered  in  turn 
by  a  serong,  or  long  piece  of  goods  wrapped  around  the 
lower  half  of  the  body.  The  Visaya  women  wear  a 
serong  and  a  kind  of  wrapper  starting  at  the  shoulders, 
and  belted  in  at  the  waist.  On  holidays  the  native 
women  wear  gaudy  gowns  of  silk  or  satin  when  the 
wearer  is  well-to-do,  and  of  cotton  or  mixed  goods  when 
they  are  poor.  Spaniards  and  natives  alike  are  passion- 
ately fond  of  jewelry.  They  wear  it  upon  all  occasions 
whether  festive  or  mournful,  and  on  the  great  church 
holidays  they  wear  every  article  of  adornment  which 
they  can  attach  to  themselves.  The  intense  activity  of 
northern  cities  is  unknown  to  Manila.  Everybody  goes 
slowly  and  takes  his  ease.  Business  is  done  leisurely. 
Even  the  street  peddlers  sit  motionless  by  the  hour  chat- 
ting, smoking,  or  dozing.  The  only  healthful  activity 
noticeable  is  that  of  the  Englishman  or  American  at  one 
extreme,  and  the  Chinaman  at  the  other.  On  account  of 
the  climate,  which  is  conducive  to  indolence,  nearly  every- 
body who  can  afford  the  time  takes  a  nap  or  siesta  in  the 
middle  of  the  day.  The  hours  are  not  onerous  in  any 
calling.  Coffee  and  fruit  are  served  in  the  early  morn- 
ing. Breakfast  is  had  about  eight  o'clock,  tiffin,  which  is 
a  substantial  luncheon  with  several  hot  dishes,  is  taken 
about  noon,  and  dinner  is  served  at  about  eight  at  night. 


I 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  45 

The  theatersopen  at  half-past  eight  or  nine.  The  influ- 
ence of  one  race  upon  another  is  well  illustrated  in  Manila 
by  the  funerals.  To  one  accustomed  to  the  silent  de- 
corum observed  in  northern  lands,  the  Manila  practice  is 
a  queer  combination  of  grewsome  levity  and  bad  taste. 
In  place  of  a  hearse  there  is  a  hideous  bier  on  wheels, 
decorated  with  all  sorts  of  cheap  and  tawdry  ornaments. 
The  team  which  draws  the  affairs  must  be  of  white 
horses,  and  the  driver,  a  tall  Malay,  must  wear  black 
cloth,  and  the  highest  variety  of  stove-pipe  hat.  In 
front  of  the  bier  is  a  band  of  native  musicians,  whose 
numbers  depend  upon  the  wealth  or  the  generosity  of  the 
bereaved  family.  They  play  dance  music,  the  latest 
songs,  and  the  most  popular  airs  from  Europe,  and  never 
anything  solemn  or  serious.  Behind  the  bier  is  a  long 
line  of  carriages,  the  longer  the  most  fashionable,  and  in 
the  carriages  everj'body  is  talking,  smoking,  and  having 
a  good  time.  If  it  were  not  for  the  bier  the  procession 
would  be  mistaken  for  a  very  jolly  picnic  party,  and  even 
the  bier  itself  with  its  ridiculous  assortment  of  orna- 
ments and  decorations,  and  the  driver  with  stovepipe 
hat,  solemn  coat,  trousers  to  the  knee,  and  bare  legs  and 
feet,  present  a  spectacle  at  which  the  traveler  must 
smile. 


4:6  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  V. 

MANILA   ARCHITECTURE ESPECIALLY   ROOFS. 

A  TRAVELER  arriving  in  Manila  is  impressed  strongly, 
and  at  first  unconsciously,  by  the  buildings.  He  sees 
around  him  a  large,  populous,  and  wealthy  city,  the  evi- 
dences of  an  extensive  commerce,  and  everywhere  the 
resources  which  in  all  other  lands  produce  palatial  edi- 
fices, grand  churches,  and  noble  public  buildings.  But 
here  it  is  all  different.  The  only  high  buildings  are  the 
churches,  and  these  are  built  with  monstrously  thick 
walls,  strong  enough  to  serve  as  fortifications.  The 
towers,  instead  of  rising  in  straight  lines,  go  up  in  a 
series  of  steps ;  the  roofs  are  squat,  heavy,  and  resemble 
the  roofs  of  factories  where  vast  machinery  is  in  motion, 
and  furnaces  are  ever  pouring  out  flame  and  smoke. 
The  few  public  buildings  are  heavy,  gloomy  and  jail-like 
in  their  exterior  and  interior.  In  the  business  quarter 
the  houses  are  two  stories,  with  enormously  thick  walls 
and  partitions,  and  with  beams  and  floors,  cut  with  an 
apparently  spendthrift  hand,  out  of  the  choicest  woods. 
In  the  suburbs  are  Malay  bungalows  supported  on  tiles 
or  stone  foundations,  one-storied,  and  covered  with 
thatch.  In  the  Chinese  quarter  the  buildings  are  chiefly 
one-storied,  and  where  two-storied  have  the  lower  one  as 
solid  as  the  everlasting  hills,  and  the  upper  one  light, 
and  seemingly  fragile.  Here  and  there  are  buildings  in 
which  a  wooden  skeleton  has  been  covered  with  huge 


s  1 


m 

&l 

^ 

ffi 

CJ 

H 

PU 

^ 

§ 

HH 

^d 

c 

<y> 

r2 

^ 

^ 

w 

^J 

CJ 

ctf 

X 

^ 

a  3 

' 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  47 

sheets  of  galvanized  iron.  At  other  places  are  edifices 
which  seem  to  be  a  cluster  of  cells,  such  as  might  have 
been  a  cloister  for  monks  in  long-gone  years.  Every- 
thing is  flat,  horizontal,  squat,  and  heavy.  Barring  the 
grace  of  the  bungalow,  there  is  nothing  cheerful  and 
artistic  in  any  direction. 

The  feeling  of  weight  grows  upon  the  visitor  and 
probably  gives  a  tinge  of  melancholy  to  his  thoughts. 
It  is  not  until  a  few  days  or  weeks  have  passed  by  that 
he  realizes  the  meaning  of  this  flattened-out  architec- 
ture. The  truth  comes  upon  him  suddenly,  and  then  his 
feelings  are  changed  from  dislike  to  admiration.  This 
architecture  represents  surrounding  conditions.  The 
architect  and  the  builder  have  tried  time  and  again  to 
reproduce  the  beauty  of  European  and  Asiatic  structures 
in  this  land  but  have  failed.  They  were  fighting  against 
nature  and  nature  was  too  strong  for  them.  He  who 
desires  to  put  up  a  house  in  that  country  must  contend 
against  many  terrible  foes.  There  is  first  the  heat  of 
the  climate  and  its  heavy  rain.  These  forbid  light  and 
flimsy  construction.  He  must  make  preparation  for  the 
typhoon,  which  in  its  might  will  shatter  an  ordinary 
building  like  a  house  of  cards.  He  must  make  allow- 
ance for  the  earthquake,  which  comes  and  goes  as  regu- 
larly as  the  revolving  moon,  and  last  of  all  he  must  fight 
from  the  day  he  sets  a  beam  until  it  crumbles  a  mass 
of  dust  and  sawdust  the  white  ant,  the  worst  plague  of 
civilized  life  in  the  far  East. 

Imagine  for  a  second  the  strength  and  cruelty  of  these 
conditions.  A  twenty-four  inch  brick  wall  is  considered 
extra  strong  for  a  two-story  house  in  the  United  States, 
but  in  earthquake  and  typhoon  countries,  it  collapses  im- 
mediately. The  average  beam  in  American  dwelling 
houses  is  three  inches  thick.  A  pine  beam  of  those 


4$  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

dimensions  will  be  eaten  through  and  through  by  whitd 
ants  in  the  tropics  in  a  single  year.  A  beam  consisting 
of  the  trunk  of  a  tree  fifteen  inches  in  diameter  may  be 
eaten  through  at  one  or  more  points  within  two  years 
by  these  voracious  insects.  It  is  therefore  evident  that 
the  less  wood  used  the  better  for  tha  safety  of  the 
occupant.  The  people  of  those  lands  have  tried  every 
conceivable  experiment  to  overcome  the  white  ants. 
They  have  tried  varnishing  the  woods,and  painting  them 
with  poisonous  paints,  but  these  seem  to  excite  the  ap- 
petite of  the  insects.  They  have  tried  and  compared 
every  kind  of  wood  which  can  be  used  for  building  pur- 
poses. There  is  not  one  but  what  may  be  attacked  by 
the  ants. 

The  insects  manifest  preferences,  however.  They  attack 
pine,  hemlock,  chestnut,  cherry,  cedar,  larch,  and  beech 
with  every  seeming  indication  of  delight,  while,  on  the 
other  hand,  they  rarely  approach  ebony,  teak,  ironwood, 
mahogany,  and  lignum-vitse.  They  like  black  walnut, 
but  are  indifferent  to  bamboo.  They  like  apple  and  ash, 
but  dislike  oak-bark  and  pitch-pine.  The  people  in 
those  countries,  when  they  can  afford  it,  use  those 
woods  in  their  building  operations  which  are  the  least 
pleasing  to  the  white  ants. 

"Where  a  ceiling  is  employed,  it  is  nearly  always  of 
wood,  and  around  it  is  a  border  of  hatch-work.  The 
openings  allow  light  and  air  to  enter  the  space  between 
floor  and  ceiling,  thus  serving  as  an  obstacle  rather  than 
a  preventive  of  the  ants.  At  the  present  time  many  of 
the  roofs  of  city  houses,  and  formerly  nearly  all,  were 
tiled.  So  many  accidents  occurred  from  the  collapse  of 
a  rocrf  by  the  ants'  eating  out  a  beam  or  two  that  the 
iron  roof  was  introduced,  and  thereafter  the  roof  of  cor- 
rugated and  galvanized  iron.  This  is  proof  against  in- 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  49 

sects,  and  is  also,  when  well-constructed,  an  impregnable 
defense  against  typhoons  and  tropical  rainstorms.  So 
popular  has  this  use  of  the  metal  become  that  many 
business  edifices,  storehouses,  and  factories,  are  now 
made  of  a  framework  of  hard  wood  and  iron,  walled  and 
roofed  with  the  corrugated  metal.  It  is  employed  also 
for  the  roofs  of  churches,  and  frequently  for  church  tow- 
ers and  spires.  Not  much  can  be  said  in  favor  of  it  on 
the  score  of  beauty.  The  climate  brings  out  rust  in  a 
short  time,  so  that  the  general  effect  is  cheap,  inartistic, 
and  dirty. 

It  is  a  good  conductor  of  heat,  so  that  the  iron  houses 
in  summer  are  about  as  hot  as  the  stoke  room  of  an  ocean 
steamer.  Iron  stairs,  banisters,  balconies,  railings,  and 
sills,  are  replacing  wooden  ones  in  Manila  and  a  few  of 
the  smaller  cities.  In  many  factories,  business  build- 
ings and  private  residences,  stone  stairs  and  even  stone 
balustrades  are  not  uncommon.  The  conditions  men- 
tioned render  cellars  dangerous  and  even  deadly.  There 
are  a  few  made  of  stone  in  Manila,  but  they  are  heir- 
looms of  antiquity.  Neither  tenant,  buyer,  nor  builder 
will  have  them.  They  will  never  come  into  vogue  in 
the  islands  until  house  materials  are  confined  to  iron, 
steel,  stone,  brick,  slate  and  terra-cotta.  On  account  of 
the  white  aats,  brick  and  stone  are  used  as  far  as  possi- 
ble in  house  building.  The  beams  of  floors,  and  espe- 
cially of  roofs,  are  thick  and  often  massive.  They  are  in- 
spected regularly  in  order  to  ascertain  if  the  insects  have 
effected  an  entrance  into  the  interior.  The  inspection 
consists  in  examining  the  ends  of  each  beam,  and  strik- 
ing it  at  intervals  along  the  surface  with  a  light  hammer 
or  mallet.  If  the  ants  have  begun  to  consume  the  inte- 
rior, the  blow  is  followed  by  a  hollow  dead  sound.  The 
beam  is  immediately  replaced  by  a  new  one.  To  hare 


50  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

every  facility,  the  average  room  is  not  ceiled,  and  more 
curious  still,  the  beams  go  through  the  walls,  the  enda 
being  flush  with  the  exterior  of  the  wall.  In  modern 
constructions  of  the  better  class,  iron  and  steel  beams, 
girders,  and  posts  are  employed,  but  the  cases  are  rare 
exceptions  to  the  general  practice. 

The  planks  of  the  'flooring  are  very  thick  and  wide. 
In  the  houses  and  offices  of  the  prosperous,  they  are 
made  of  teak,  ironwood  and  other  hard  timbers.  In  a 
few  mansions  they  are  of  ebony  and  other  precious  woods, 
and  are  cleaned  and  polished  every  day,  producing  a  rich 
and  beautiful  effect.  As  the  floors  age  and  shrink  with 
weathering,  they  are  worn  thinner,  and  knots  and  pieces 
are  loosened  and  fall  to  the  floor  below.  At  the  United 
States  Consulate  in  Manila  it  was  possible  to  look  through 
the  door  of  one  of  the  rooms  and  see  people  in  the  drive- 
way beneath,  while  the  main  stairway  was  so  perforated 
by  wear,  tear,  and  knotholes  that  it  resembled  those 
structures  made  of  cast-iron  lattice  work  used  in  front  of 
office  buildings  in  New  York. 

The  earthquakes  and  typhoons  are  reinforced  in  some 
parts  of  the  Philippines  by  volcanoes.  No  one  builds  in 
those  territories  without  taking  these  factors  into  her 
calculation.  Of  the  terrors,  the  earthquake  is  probably 
the  most  formidable.  That  of  1627  obliterated  one  of 
the  highest  mountains  in  the  Archipelago.  It  fell  in 
with  a  roar  which  was  heard  for  hundreds  of  miles.  In 
1675,  an  earthquake  split  in  half  a  high  mountain  near 
the  coast  of  Mindanao.  The  crevice  must  have  reached 
far  down  into  the  interior  of  the  earth,  because  the  ocean 
rushed  in  with  such  force  as  to  inundate  the  country  be- 
yond over  many  square  miles.  Even  in  the  present  gen- 
eration there  have  been  several  tremendous  seismic  dis- 
turbances. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  51 

One  began  on  September  16,  1852,  and  lasted  for 
twenty-six  days,  during  which  period  over  ten  thousand 
houses  were  shaken  down.  In  1863  was  another  power- 
ful series  of  shocks  which  did  great  damage.  In  1880 
one-third  of  Manila  was  wrecked  as  if  it  had  been  bom- 
barded by  modern  artillery.  The  visitor  can  obtain 
good  ideas  of  the  enormous  force  of  these  convulsions  of 
the  earth  at  many  points  in  the  more  crowded  portions 
of  the  city.  Not  far  from  the  river  Pasig  are  the  foun- 
dation walls  of  a  handsome  church,  which  was  utterly 
ruined  by  an  earthquake  many  years  ago.  It  had  been 
built  to  withstand  a  very  strong  shock.  The  walls  were 
nearly  ten  feet  thick,  and  were  made  of  well-cut  rock  set 
in  the  best  mortar  and  cement,  and  yet  the  portion  that 
remains  is  marked  and  marred  by  crevices  from  an  inch 
to  two  feet  in  width,  and  the  stones,  many  of  them  of 
large  size,  which  were  split  in  half  during  the  catastrophe, 
not  only  are  separated  by  a  wide  breach  between  the 
halves,  but  the  levels  have  been  changed  in  many  re- 
spects by  several  inches.  It  must  have  been  that  during 
the  occurrence,  the  earth  behaved  more  like  a  mass  of 
liquid  than  like  a  solid.  At  different  points  it  exhibited 
different  kinds  of  motion.  At  one  place  it  lifted  every- 
thing, at  another  it  sank  a  foot  or  more  downward;  at  a 
third  it  slid  laterally,  and  at  a  fourth  it  appeared  to  pro- 
ject objects  upon  the  surface  obliquely  upward.  The 
gloomy  cathedral  of  Manila  is  said  to  have  been  much 
handsomer  originally  than  it  is  to-day.  When  first  built 
in  1578,  it  was  on  a  par  in  size  and  beauty  with  many 
cathedrals  in  Europe.  It  had  a  high  roof  and  towers, 
buttresses,  and  considerable  ornamentation,  but  the  first 
earthquake  that  came  along  leveled  it  to  the  earth.  It 
was  rebuilt  with  walls  twice  as  thick,  heavier  and  lower 
towers,  and  broader  and  stronger  buttresses.  Again 


52  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

the  earthquake  brought  it  a  mass  of  fragments  to  the 
ground.  It  has  been  rebuilt  entirely  four  or  five  times, 
and  repaired  thirty  or  forty. 

It  is  a  fine-looking  building  to-day,  but  it  is  more 
massive  and  gloomy  in  its  appearance  than  the  immortal 
temple  of  Luxor  on  the  Nile.  In  the  old  walled  city  of 
Manila  there  are  many  ancient  buildings  belonging  to 
both  the  government  and  the  Church.  Many  of  them 
possess  considerable  architectural  merit,  especially  when 
allowance  is  made  for  their  surrounding  conditions. 
Yet  all  of  these  are  marked  by  the  same  heavy,  stolid, 
and  dismal  feeling.  The  walls  are  reinforced  by  oblique 
buttresses,  and  in  many  cases  are  slightly  oblique  them- 
selves. There  is  little  external  ornament,  and  none  of 
the  class  which  can  be  dislodged  by  movements  of  the 
earth's  surface.  The  doors  and  windows  are  small; 
many  of  the  former  have  strong  iron  bars,  and  the  latter 
iron  bars  and  gratings.  All  show  the  marks  of  neglect 
and  decay,  and  many  of  them  bear  the  telltale  marks  of 
ancient  earthquakes.  They  impress  a  person  in  the 
same  way  as  the  great  ruined  temples  of  Egypt,  Italy, 
and  Greece. 

The  interior  arrangement  of  the  houses  tends  to  follow 
the  example  of  houses  in  Spain.  In  the  interior  of  the 
house  is  an  open  quadrangle,  or  else  there  is  a  driveway 
through  the  house  with  a  small  courtyard  in  the  interior 
or  at  the  rear  of  the  building,  or  the  house  sets  back  from 
the  street,  from  which  it  is  secluded  by  a  high  wall. 
These  private  houses  are  neat,  and  in  view  of  all  the  cir- 
cumstances, comfortable  and  attractive.  The  ground 
floor  is  flush  with  the  street  or  raised  one,  two  or  three 
steps.  Rooms,  halls,  carriageway,  and  the  little  quad- 
rangle in  the  interior,  are  usually  well  paved  with  blocks 
of  gtone  brought,  strange  to  say,  not  from  their  own 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  53 

quarries,  but  from  far-away  Amoy  in  China.  Nearly 
every  steamer  of  the  local  lines  brings,  as  an  important 
part  of  its  cargo,  a  thousand  or  more  well-trimmed  blocks 
of  granite,  or  paving  stones  from  that  ancient  and  in- 
dustrious city.  The  stone  walls  are  bare  or  covered  with 
whitewash.  The  thick  surfaces  of  lath  and  plaster, 
familiar  to  American  eyes,  are  practically  unknown  out 
here.  The  reason  is  very  simple;  the  first  earthquake 
that  came  along,  the  smallest  member  of  the  earthquake 
family,  would  shake  it  loose  and  down  upon  the  floor. 
Whitewash  is  just  as  clean,  and  involves  no  such  danger. 

Stone  stairways  with  an  iron  balustrade  leads  up  to 
the  second  floor,  which  is  scarcely  any  cosier  or  brighter 
than  the  ground  floor.  Overhead  is  a  tile  or  iron  roof, 
often  doubled  in  order  to  have  an  air  chamber  between 
the  two  roofs.  Windows  and  doors  are  left  open  as 
much  as  possible,  and  a  good  breeze,  cool  and  refresh- 
ing, prevails  in  the  night  and  early  morning,  and  often 
throughout  the  day.  The  ground  floor  if  it  be  gloomy, 
is  comparatively  cool  and  comfortable,  although  the  land 
is  naturally  low  and  marshy.  Manila  and  Ilo-Ilo,  and,  in 
fact,  in  most  of  the  civilized  settlements  there  is  very 
little  malaria.  This  is  probably  due  to  the  enormous 
animal  and  vegetable  life  forever  preying  upon  itself,  the 
liberal  use  of  whitewash,  the  cleanly  habits  of  the  natives, 
and  the  dry  heat  of  the  climate. 

It  is  a  common  error  that  the  Philippines  are  damp. 
Many  of  the  neighboring  lands  are  noted  for  their  rain- 
fall, and  the  reputation  has  been  extended  to  the  Philip- 
pines. Not  far  away  is  Singapore,  of  which  Sir  Stamford 
Raffles  said:  "It  has  two  seasons,  the  dry  and  the  wet. 
In  the  former  it  rains  every  fifteen  minutes;  in  the  latter 
it  rains  all  the  time." 

In  the  Philippines  the  rainfall  is  modsrate,  being 
about  one  hundred  and  twenty  inches  a  year;  that  at 


54  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

Luzon  averaging  about  ninety-five,  and  at  Mindanao 
about  one  hundred  and  thirty.  When  it  does  rain  the 
fall  is  very  copious  and  rapid.  It  thus  combines  the 
advantages  of  heavy  rains  which  clean  the  country,  and 
a  moderate  rainfall  -which  does  not  permit  of  the  decay 
and  decomposition  found  in  Borneo  and  New  Guinea. 
With  the  exception  of  the  few  buildings  noticed — the 
cathedral,  the  governor-general's  palace,  the  custom 
house,  one  or  two  church  colleges,  some  monasteries  and 
hospitals,  there  are  practically  no  handsome  buildings 
in  the  Philippines.  There  are  many  which  are  very 
comfortable  and  pleasant  to  the  eye.  Chief  among  these 
are  the  bungalows,  which  are  wooden  houses  with  a 
heavy  thatch,  and  small  European  buildings,  half-covered 
with  vines  and  flowers.  It  requires  no  exertion  on  the 
part  of  an  owner  to  make  a  home  and  house  beautiful. 
Nature  will  do  it  all  for  her.  Mosses  and  moulds  form 
on  every  shaded  wall  and  niche;  vines  and  creepers 
spring  from  the  soil  and  climb  over  every  facade.  Flow- 
ers spring  from  the  earth,  and  even  from  the  walks  in 
the  yard,  and  trees  sprout  everywhere,  as  if  endeavoring 
to  bring  back  the  wonderful  forests  which  once  covered 
nine-tenths  of  the  islands.  This  beautifying  force  of 
nature  makes  the  newer  portion  of  the  city  and  the 
suburbs  a  spectacle  which  always  affords  profound 
pleasure  to  the  traveler's  eye.  Trees  of  every  kind  from 
the  statuesque  palm  to  the  marvelous  banyan  and  artistic 
bamboo,  blazes  and  splashes  of  floral  color  at  every  place 
expected  and  unexpected ;  the  air  full  of  birds  and  but- 
terflies, each  tree  populated  with  a  little  colony  of  ani- 
mals; the  brownish-green  color  of  the  thatched  roofs,  the 
moss-grown  walls  of  the  older  houses;  the  level  roads 
where  the  grass  and  weeds  forever  fight  the  pedestrian 
and  the  vehicle,  all  tend  to  make  a  picture  of  exquisite 
beauty. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES  55 


CHAPTER    VI. 

THE     STOKES   AND     SHOPS. 

IN  its  retail  stores,  Manila  offers  an  interesting  combi- 
nation of  Spanish,  Chinese,  and  native  characteristics. 
As  the  Spanish  themselves  imitate  the  French,  the  mix- 
ture is  all  the  more  striking.  There  are  attractive  cafes 
like  those  of  Madrid,  and  restaurants  which  are  like,  but 
still  a  long  distance  from,  those  of  Paris;  there  are  tailor 
shops  and  shoe  stores,  shirt  stores,  and  dry  goods  em- 
poriums, which  are  almost  copies  of  French  and  Spanish 
originals.  There  are  hundreds  of  Chinese  stores  which 
are  weak  imitations  of  those  in  Hong  Kong  and  Canton. 

The  curious  system  of  taxation  pursued  by  the  Spanish 
government  bears  so  heavily  upon  trade  that  it  does  not 
pay  to  employ  enterprise,  or  to  carry  large  stocks  of 
goods.  The  tax  assessor  regards  goods  and  wares  as  in- 
vested wealth,  the  same  as  paintings,  bank  accounts,  and 
gems.  In  fact,  he  prefers  them  for  official  purposes,  be- 
cause they  cannot  be  concealed  like  the  other  things 
mentioned.  It  makes  no  difference  that  goods  may  be, 
and  generally  are,  bought  on  credit;  that  the  only  interest 
of  the  merchant  is  a  small  percentage  of  the  value  which 
will  pay  the  expenses  of  his  transactions,  and  yield  a 
small  profit — that  is  beyond  the  taxgather's  intelligence. 
The  tax  comes  down  like  the  rain  upon  the  just  and  un- 
just alike.  The  result  of  this  system  is  that  the  mer- 
chant carries  as  small  a  stock  as  is  possible  in  his  sales- 


56  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

room  and  leaves  the  rest  in  a  bonded  warehouse.  He 
also  makes  as  little  display  as  he  can,  because  all  dis- 
play means  money,  and  all  money  is  taxed.  The  condi- 
tion is  a  profound  surprise  to  American  and  English 
women  accustomed  to  the  large  establishments,  the 
numerous  clerks  and  the  wide  assortment  of  goods  which 
mark  the  dry  goods,  millinery,  boot  and  shoe  trades  of 
the  Western  world. 

The  evil  has  its  good  side.  If  the  stores  carry  small 
stocks  of  ready-made  goods  they  are  eager  and  prompt 
in  making  things  to  order.  A  man  gets  measured  in  his 
own  room  in  the  hotel  for  shirts  and  linen  clothing,  select- 
ing the  goods  from  a  little  book  of  samples.  The  tailor, 
who  may  be  a  Chinaman,  half-breed  native  or  foreigner, 
and  scarcely  ever  a  Spaniard,  may  have  the  goods  at 
home  or  in  the  storehouse.  He  gets  them  out,  makes 
them  up  in  his  own  house,  and  delivers  them  with  a 
promptitude  worthy  of  being  followed  by  American 
dealers.  A  woman  has  a  similar  experience.  The  dealer 
brings  samples,  or,  if  necessary,  large  pieces  of  the  goods, 
for  her  to  exercise  a  wise  selection.  Silks  and  pongees, 
laces  and  linens,  nets  and  cotton  goods;  ribbons  and 
passementeries,  each  has  its  price  fixed  and  the  price  of 
the  labor — very  low,  by  the  way — is  given  by  the  dealer. 
She  has  her  measure  taken  just  about  the  same  as  in  a 
tailor-made  garment  store  in  the  largest  cities  of  the 
United  States. 

The  goods  are  brought  to  try  on,  and  within  a  brief 
period — not  less  than  twenty-four  hours — they  are 
returned  finished.  This  system  compels  every  woman  to 
exercise  her  own  judgment,  and  produces  a  far  greater 
variety  in  costumes  and  styles  than  what  obtains  in  most 
civilized  communities.  It  is  very  pleasantly  visible  on 
opera  nights,  when  all  the  women  in  good  spciety  ar§ 


8 


*  3s 


<     e   2   £  5 
O     o  3  —   «» 


d 

N 

§ 

s 


h 

s  .55  - 

S  c   § 

-  a^  rt 

•s  «  -  a    • 

.*->    ra 

«J  «4_    <L»    >-,  S 

^  ^  .>  ^d    g 

^  -d  -S  ^  .2 

s  3  3  « 1 

^  xS  _,  '  s  ^ 

BJ     '  * 

o3  ^  ^  ^   !? 

^  g  a  1 1 

•S  I|  M 

g^g-o^ 

cu  3  O     I 

!|s 

.%  & 

g 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  57 

supposed  to  come  and  "show  themselves  in  dress  parade. " 
The  Spanish  woman  has  a  fine  artistic  taste,  inheriting 
the  Spaniard's  love  of  rich  goods,  the  Moorish  love  for 
color,  and  acquiring  the  French  love  for  contrast  and 
decoration.  In  the  audience  there  will  be  three  hun- 
dred costumes,  all  different,  and  each  worthy  of  the  seal 
of  approval  by  a  fastidious  critic.  One  costume  will  be 
of  a  softly-tinted  silk  or  satin,  with  bare  arms,  low  neck 
and  back,  with  an  over-garment  from  neck  to  wrist  and 
throat  to  slippers,  of  old  Spanish  lace  and  passementerie, 
or  net  and  bars  of  ribbons.  Another  striking  costume  is 
an  underwaist  and  skirt  of  golden  grayish  pongee  and  a 
glove-fitting  over-garment  of  black  lace  trimmed  with 
black  velvet  applique.  Through  the  meshes  the  rich 
olive  skin  of  the  wearer's  arms  and  throat  gleams  out  in 
delightful  contrast.  A  fourth  delightful  costume  will 
consist  of  a  low,  glove-fitting  waist  in  bright  satin,  pink* 
blue  or  light  green,  embroidered  with  gold  or  silver  braid 
and  over  it  a  lace  and  satin  bolero,  caught  at  the  neck 
with  a  single  jewel,  or  fastened  there  with  a  light  chain 
of  silver  or  of  gold. 

There  will  be  stately  duennas  in  black  velvet,  dark 
maroon,  olive,  or  the  deepest  blue  rich  materials.  The 
traveler  who  attends  the  opera  in  Manila  expecting  to 
see  people  in  queer  or  cheap  attire  is  bound  to  be  griev- 
ously disappointed. 

The  jewelry  stores  in  Manila  are  interesting  and  ex- 
cellent. The  Spanish  artificer  learned  his  trade  from  the 
Moors,  and  like  a  true  Bourbon  has  forgotten  none  of 
its  good  qualities.  He  has  taught  the  natives  in  turn, 
and  here,  strange  to  say,  the  native  women  have  sur- 
passed the  men  in  taste,  creative  power,  and  workman- 
ship. In  fact,  the  jewelry  made  by  the  Philippine  women 
is  famous  throughout  the  East  for  its  excellence,  Span- 


58  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

ards  love  a  profusion  of  such  ornaments  as  chatelaines, 
•watchchains,  necklaces,  belts,  bracelets  and  rings,  and  in 
the  making  of  these  the  native  women  exhibit  wonderful 
skill.  They  do  not  limit  themselves  to  one  or  two  types, 
but  display  ever-changing  novelty  in  each  design.  At 
the  jewelry  stores  it  is  possible  to  buy  chains  of  which 
each  link  is  seemingly  made  of  golden  hair  arranged  in  a 
tiny  coil  and  tied  with  a  true  lovers'  knot,  with  the  ends 
BO  as  to  prevent  its  unraveling,  or  else  with  the  seeming 
hairs  braided  into  an  exquisite  and  flexible  braid.  The 
little  women  do  all  this  work,  starting  with  the  crude 
gold  from  the  mines  of  the  country,  making  their  own 
alloys,  drawing  out  the  gold  wire,  beating  it  with  ham- 
mer and  anvil,  and  using  every  process,  even  the  most 
scientific,  known  to  the  metal-smith.  They  set  gems, 
but  here  they  confine  themselves  chiefly  to  Spanish 
styles.  The  latter  imbed  the  precious  stones  in  metal 
rather  than  raise  them  on  frames  so  that  the  light  can  be 
reflected  and  refracted  at  every  facet  and  angle. 

Silver  is  still  popular  as  an  ornamental  metal,  and  for 
such  purposes  as  belts  and  heavy  necklaces  is  as  popular 
as  gold,  and  in  some  instances  is  preferred  to  the  latter 
metal.  The  women  jewelers  are  also  extremely  skillful 
in  making  hatpins,  hairpins,  stickpins,  and  breast- 
pins. Here  they  follow  nearly  every  school  of  ornament, 
using  Spanish,  Italian,  French,  English,  Chinese,  and 
Japanese  models,  and  at  times  producing  what  are  proba- 
bly modifications  of  the  ancient  savage  ornaments  of 
their  own  race.  Of  the  latter  may  be  mentioned  pins 
whose  heads  represent  creeses,  with  pearl  or  mother-of- 
pearl  handles,  and  rubies,  garnets,  or  red  coral  set  in 
the  blade  to  give  the  impression  of  drops  of  blood. 
Equally  savage,  but  quite  pretty,  are  jeweled  and  in- 
crusted  lizards,  half  an  inch,  or  even  an  inch  in  length, 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  59 

•which  are  decorated  with  such  a  view  to  chromatic  con- 
trast that  the  little  figures  seem  irridescent  in  a  strong 
light. 

The  shops  and  stands  where  the  natives  sell  different 
kinds  of  basket-work  are  well  worthy  of  visit  and  even 
study.  In  their  savage  state  they  were  very  skillful  in 
preparing  all  sorts  of  vegetable  fibers  for  braiding  pur- 
poses, and  made  hats,  mats,  clothes  baskets  and  household 
utensils,  which  were  of  remarkable  strength,  durabil- 
ity and  finish.  The  Spanish  occupation  has  been  of  con- 
siderable benefit  in  this  field.  The  Sisters  of  the  various 
Orders  have  taught  their  pupils  the  artistic  designs  of 
Europe,  as  well  as  many  secrets  in  dyeing,  mottling,  and 
enameling  straws  and  the  other  materials  employed.  The 
Manila  straw  hats  are  famous  even  in  New  York  and 
London  for  their  lightness  and  beauty.  They  are  equal 
to  the  finest  Panamas,  and  the  best  qualities,  which  sel- 
dom reach  the  market,  command  as  high  as  fifteen  and 
twenty  dollars  gold  apiece.  The  fiber  employed  in  mak- 
ing these  hats  is  the  outer  skin  of  a  family  of  rattans. 
Only  those  canes  are  employed  which  are  smooth, 
healthy,  and  free  from  discoloration.  They  are  washed, 
dried,  kept  for  a  brief  period  in  which  they  undergo 
some  sweating  treatment,  and  then  the  outer  skin  is  re- 
moved with  a  sharp  knife.  It  is  softened  with  water 
and  cut  into  filaments,  some  as  thick  as  a  match  and  some 
as  thin  as  strong  sewing  thread.  The  mats  made  from 
this  material  are  about  the  best  covering  for  a  mattress 
in  warm  weather  that  is  known.  The  fibers  are  not  cut 
particularly  small,  ranging  from  a  quarter  of  an  inch  to  a 
sixteenth.  After  they  have  been  cut  they  are  steeped  in 
strong  dyes,  the  object  being  first  to  color  the  tissues, 
second  to  make  them  stronger,  and  more  durable,  and 
third  and  most  important,  to  make  them  disagreeable  to 


60  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

all  forms  of  insect  life.  The  favorite  colors  are  black, 
dark  scarlet,  dark  green,  and  dark  yellow,  deep  gray, 
and  olive.  They  are  then  woven  into  mats  ranging 
from  two  feet  to  seven  feet  square,  the  favorite  size 
being  five  feet  square.  When  spread  upon  a  bed  they 
permit  the  air  to  circulate  through  their  interstices  as 
well  as  to  allow  any  perspiration  to  escape  in  the  same 
manner. 

Their  fiber  is  a  non-conductor  of  heat  and  electricity, 
and  possesses  a  hard  polished  surface,  which  is  extremely 
grateful  and  cooling  to  the  skin  in  warm  weather. 
These  bed  mats  are  found  in  nearly  every  house,  and  are 
carried  about  by  travelers  both  rich  and  poor. 

Wealthy  people  with  artistic  tastes  use  this  handsome 
matting  to  wainscot  and  to  upholster  rooms.  It  is  also 
employed  upon  lounges,  sofas,  chairs,  hassocks,  cush- 
ions, and  even  pillows. 

There  are  many  bakeries  and  candy-makers,  and  their 
products  are  inviting  to  the  eye  as  well  as  to  the  palate. 
Sugar  is  very  cheap  in  the  country,  being  made  by 
European  methods,  and  various  kinds  of  flour  are  obtaina- 
ble from  both  European  and  Chinese  merchants.  The 
Castilians  have  a  very  sweet  tooth,  and  use  cakes,  candies 
and  preserves  more,  probably,  than  any  other  people  in 
Europe.  They  show  the  same  tastes  in  their  Eastern 
colonies.  At  every  meal  a  standard  dish  is  a  paste  or  a 
very  hard  and  firm  sweet  fruit  jelly,  boiled  down  until  it 
is  almost  solid.  It  is  made  from  guava,  loquot,  and  other 
fruits  and  is  very  good  eating.  Even  it  is  the  native 
women  who  do  the  best  work.  They  learned  the  indus- 
try from  the  Spaniards,  but  have  surpassed  their  teachers 
in  the  purity,  uniformity,  and  excellence  of  their  goods. 

There  are  a  few  art  stores  in  Manila,  but  their  wares 
are  apt  to  produce  a  smile  on  the  part  of  a  critic.  There 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  61 

are  poor  paintings  from  Europe,  and  still  poorer  copies 
of  these  by  Chinese  and  native  artists.  Poorest  of  all 
are  gaudy  and  hideous  religious  chromolithographs  im- 
ported from  Europe  and  intended  for  the  ignorant 
whites  and  natives.  The  favorite  is  also  one  of  the  most 
terrible.  It  is  the  picture  of  the  Virgin  with  reddish, 
yellow  hair,  a  blue  robe,  long  emaciated  hands  holding 
in  them  a  bleeding  heart  nearly  as  large  as  her  head,  and 
from  the  heart  are  leaping  tongues  of  yellow  flame,  and 
little  clouds  of  white  and  black  smoke.  The  picture  is 
so  ghastly  as  to  be  funny,  but  it  appeals  to  the  instinct 
of  many  human  beings,  and  so  probably  does  its  own 
little  work  of  good,  no  matter  how  unpleasant  the  impres- 
sion it  may  produce  uprn  the  tourist's  mind. 

The  restaurants  of  Manila  are,  as  a  class,  not  up  to  the 
standards  of  other  cities  in  that  part  of  the  world. 
There  are  one  or  two  patterned  after  the  French  which 
may  be  recommended;  there  are  several  in  the  Chinese 
quarter  which  are  models  of  cleanliness,  neatness,  and 
good  cooking;  but  the  rest  are  cheap,  none  too  clean,  and 
redolent  of  salt  codfish,  onions,  garlic,  poor  oil,  and 
other  reminders  of  the  Celt-Iberian  Peninsula.  It  must 
be  remembered  that  in  Manila  there  are  many  poor 
Spaniards.  They  are  compelled  to  work  like  those 
about  them,  and  having  no  political  influence  they  are 
unable  to  get  even  one  of  the  poorly-paid  clerkships  in 
the  government  offices.  They  are  obliged  to  compete 
with  half-castes,  half-educated  natives,  and  with  young 
Chinamen  ambitious  to  learn  the  principles  of  European 
commerce.  In  such  a  competition  wages  sink  to  the 
lowest  Asiatic  levels,  and  hundreds  of  clerks,  Spanish, 
half-breeds  and  natives — alike  work  for  less  than  what 
is  paid  to  an  office  boy  in  the  United  States.  Clerks  can 
be  secured  for  twelve  and  ten  dollars  a  month,  and  even 


62  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

nine  and  eight.  Upon  this  they  manage  somehow  to 
support  themselves  and  families.  Their  daily  fare  is  of 
the  simplest  kind,  consisting  of  much  rice,  a  little  pork, 
a  little  fresh  and  salted  fish,  a  fair  amount  of  onions  and 
garlic,  and  a  large  amount  of  cabbage,  yam,  and  [other 
cheap  vegetables. 

These  are  the  patrons  of  the  cheap  restaurants,  at  some 
of  which  the  meal,  such  as  it  is,  can  be  secured  for  five 
cents. 

The  fans  of  the  bazaars  deserve  passing  notice.  Every- 
body uses  that  handy  little  article  and  the  supply  is 
large,  cheap,  and  varied.  The  ordinary  palm  leaf  costs 
but  a  fraction  of  a  cent.  The  woven  palms  made  by  the 
Tagal  women  are  a  trifle  more  costly,  ranging  from  one 
to  five  cents  apiece,  but  are  light,  pretty,  and  durable. 
They  are  related  apparently,  to  the  fans  of  Siam  and  the 
Malay  states.  There  are  handsome  fans  from  Madrid 
made  of  ivory,  bone,  lancewood,  ebony,  teak,  and  sandal 
wood,  trimmed  with  silk,  or  laces  and  often  ornamented 
with  paintings,  beads,  spangles,  and  even  jewels.  These 
are  as  expensive  in  Manila  as  they  are  in  America.  Both 
natives  and  Chinese  imitate  the  imported  Spanish  fans, 
and  do  their  work  so  well  that  none  but  an  expert  can 
distinguish  the  difference.  There  are  also  rich  fans  from 
Canton  in  which  ivory  plain  and  carved  is  decorated 
with  the  tips  of  peacock  feathers,  or  with  quills  dyed 
into  a  thousand  flaming  hues.  There  are  very  neat  fans 
made  with  sandal-wood  handles  and  eagle  plumes,  and 
the  plumage  of  other  birds.  These  seem  very  fragile, 
but  in  reality  are  more  durable  than  the  palm  leaves.  A 
pretty  fan,  half  Spanish  and  half  Malay,  is  manufactured 
of  silk  stretched  upon  an  elastic  wooden  frame  fastened  to 
a  handle,  the  silk  being  decorated  with  seed  pearls, 
silver  and  gold  spangles,  and  sometimes  embroidery  in 
colors,  silver  and  gold. 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  63 

There  are  almost  no  book  stores  in  Manila.  There  are 
said  to  be  two  in  the  business  district,  and  these  carry  a 
stock  of  a  few  cheap  novels  in  French  and  Spanish,  and 
a  small  assortment  of  prayer  books  and  religious  works. 
All  the  foreigners  and  the  well-to-do  Spaniards  import 
what  reading  matter  they  use.  In  the  case  of  the  Span- 
iards it  does  not  seem  to  be  a  very  large  quantity. 

The  hot  climate  renders  parasols  and  umbrellas  a  nec- 
essity as  well  as  a  luxury.  Every  man  and  woman  owns 
at  least  a  couple  of  umbrellas,  and  every  woman  an 
assortment  of  parasols.  A  few  are  imported  from  France 
and  England,  but  the  larger  quantity  are  made  by  native 
artificers.  Economy  is  relished  in  Manila  more,  per- 
haps, than  in  the  big  cities  of  the  world.  Both  parasols 
and  umbrellas  when  shabby  or  injured  are  promptly  re- 
paired or  recovered,  and  thus  do  duty  for  a  long  time. 
The  cheapness  of  both  labor  and  silk  renders  these  re- 
pairs inexpensive,  so  that  even  the  working  classes  are 
frequently  the  owners  of  umbrellas  that  in  the  United 
States  would  cost  several  dollars  apiece.  The  china  and 
earthern  market  is  supplied  from  many  sources. 

The  well-to-do  import  their  table  ware  from  England, 
France,  and  Germany,  and  also  patronize  Chinese  and 
Japanese  goods.  The  middle  classes  use  cheap  Chinese 
articles,  while  the  poorer  classes  employ  the  earthenware 
and  pottery  made  by  natives  and  half-breeds.  This  is 
well  made,  and  some  of  it  is  notably  neat  and  attractive. 
All  of  it  is  strong  and  very  cheap.  There  is  an  abundant 
supply  of  good  clay  on  the  islands,  and  an  inexhaustible 
amount  of  fuel  wood,  and  lignite  or  brown  coal.  These 
enable  the  native  potters  to  turn  out  cheap  clay  cooking 
and  eating  utensils  in  any  desired  amount.  The  most 
useful  of  these  products  are  the  "monkeys"  or  water 
jars.  These  are  unglazed  earthenware  bottles  with  a  very 


64  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

large  body,  a  broad  neck  and  a  clay  stopper.  They  ard 
usually  plain,  but  a  few  are  decorated  with  line  work 
and  geometrical  figures.  When  filled  with  water  they 
are  placed  on  the  window  sill  or  a  table  in  the  line  of  a 
draught.  The  water  percolates  very  slowly  through  the 
earthenware  forming  a  light  perspiration  on  the  surface. 
This  is  evaporated  by  the  draught,  absorbing  heat  from 
the  monkey  and  its  contents  and  thus  cooling  the  water 
several  degrees  below  the  temperature  of  the  surround- 
ing air. 

It  was  the  only  cool  water  that  was  had  in  Manila 
until  American  ships  brought  out  cargoes  of  ice,  and 
afterward  an  enterprising  capitalist  established  ice- 
making  machinery  in  that  city. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  65 


CHAPTER  VII. 

MANILA'S  DAILY  BREAD — TOBACCO. 

JUST  as  the  stockyards  of  Chicago  are  the  first  attrac- 
tiono  which  is  offered  to  the  stranger  within  its  gates,  so 
the  cigar  factories  of  Manila  are  regarded  by  its  citizens 
high  and  low.  The  view  is  justified  by  the  facts.  The 
tobacco  industry  is  the  chief  source  of  revenue  to  both 
state,  church  politicians,  and  merchants.  To  the 
state  it  brings  in  at  least  eight  million  dollars  a  year;  to 
the  church  about  two  million,  to  politicians  a  million, 
and  to  merchants  about  two  millions.  It  gives  employ- 
ment to  several  hundred  thousand  people,  starting  with 
the  field  laborers  on  the  tobacco  plantations  to  the  opera- 
tives in  the  factories,  and  the  makers  of  cigar  ribbons, 
cigar  box  labels,  and  other  trade  supplies.  "While  there 
is  a  native  tobacco  which  grows  in  the  Philippines  it  is 
never  used  for  commercial  purposes.  It  belongs  to  the 
same  family  as  the  Chinese  and  Japanese  leaf,  which  is  so 
harsh  and  penetrating  as  to  be  exceedingly  offensive  to 
European  nostrils.  The  famous  Manila  tobacco  is  a  de- 
scendant of  plants  taken  from  Mexico  by  missionaries  in 
the  latter  part  of  the  seventeenth  century.  The  plants 
thrived  remarkably  in  their  new  home,  and  in  a  few 
years  grew  numerous  enough  to  make  several  large  plan- 
tations. In  1686  the  navigator  Dampier  found  its  cul- 
tivation carried  on  upon  a  large  scale,  and  great  multi- 
tudes of  natives  passionately  addicted  to  the  weed.  At 


66  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

that  time  it  was  a  rarity  in  Europe,  and  it  had  not  yet 
been  selected  by  financiers  as  a  leading  support  for  gov- 
ernmental treasuries.  The  Spaniards,  strange  to  say,  did 
not  realize  the  opportunity  in  this  respect  until  1781, 
when  by  a  royal  decree  the  entire  tobacco  business  was 
made  a  state  monopoly.  This  lasted  until  1882,  during 
which  time  the  government  paid  little  or  no  attention  to 
the  scientific  culture  of  the  plant.  Its  uniform  excel- 
lence during  that  long  period  is  convincing  evidence  of 
the  richness  of  the  Philippine  soil.  During  all  this  time 
the  Spanish  government  paid  no  attention  to  anything 
but  the  raising  of  aa  large  an  income  as  was  possible.  By 
one  expedient  after  another,  by  laws  of  remarkable 
cruelty,  they  succeeded  in  raising  the  revenue  from  about 
two  millions  in  1840  to  about  five  millions  in  1859,  and 
to  about  eight  millions  in  1870.  The  story  of  this  legis- 
lation and  political  work  will  probably  never  be  known 
in  full;  but  the  fragments  which  may  be  found  in 
Spanish  official  publications  reveal  a  system  of  tyranny, 
injustice,  and  inhumanity,  so  terrible  as  to  be  almost  in- 
credible. In  1846,  for  example,  the  natives  in  Mindoro 
refused  to  bring  in  their  crops,  because  they  had  not 
been  paid  for  two  years. 

Soldiers  were  sent  into  the  tobacco  district,  and  the 
ringleaders  of  the  disaffection  were  shot.  Others  were 
flogged,  imprisoned,  and  otherwise  maltreated,  partly  to 
punish  them  for  their  contumely,  and  partly  to  frighten 
them  into  complying  with  the  government's  wishes. 
This  was  the  straw  which  broke  the  camel's  back.  The 
natives  set  fire  to  their  plantations,  and  ran  away  to  the 
mountains,  and  the  tobacco  industry  of  Mindoro  was 
practically  annihilated.  Laws  were  passed  authorizing 
compulsory  labor,  and  the  natives  in  the  northern  prov- 
inces of  Luzon  were  compelled  to  plant  tobacco  where 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  67 

before  they  planted  maize  and  rice.  All  refusing  to 
obey  the  commands  were  treaded  as  malefactors  and 
punished  according  to  the  enormity  of  their  disobedi- 
ence, and  the  dicretions  of  the  military  officer  of  the 
district.  The  poor  creatures  planted  the  tobacco  so  as 
to  comply  with  the  law,  but  then  spent  most  of  their 
time  in  making  small  clearings  elsewhere,  and  raising 
food  for  their  families.  This  pitiful  attempt  at  self-sus- 
tenance was  promptly  met  by  the  authorities  with  an- 
other law.  Every  family  was  compelled  to  raise  at  least 
four  thousand  plants  per  annum  under  a  penalty  of  fine, 
dispossession,  imprisonment,  or  all.  This  not  bringing 
enough  yield,  another  law  was  passed  whereby  any  land 
not  cultivated  in  tobacco  was  appropriated  by  the  gov- 
ernment, and  given  to  any  appointee  upon  condition  that 
he  would  devote  it  to  the  precious  leaf. 

When  under  the  pressure  of  this  frightful  tyranny 
and  of  actual  starvation  the  natives  left  their  farms  and 
went  into  the  fastnesses  of  the  interior,  the  government 
sent  colonies  from  the  middle  islands  of  the  archi- 
pelago up  to  the  deserted  fields,  and  there  put  them  to 
work  with  a  company  of  soldiers  within  a  day's  march- 
ing distance.  "When  it  was  found  that  some  philan- 
thropic Spaniards  had  helped  the  disobedient  planters, 
an  ancient  law  was  revived  whereby  a  native  could  not 
be  held  responsible  for  a  debt  exceeding  five  dollars;  and 
all  emigrants,  colonists  and  tobacco  farmers  were  per- 
mitted to  liquidate  them  out  of  their  earnings  at  tobacco 
planting.  There  appears  to  be  no  connection  between 
these  two  things,  but  nearly  all  the  Spaniards  who  did 
these  things  were  creditors  of  the  natives,  advancing  to 
them  moneys  for  their  support  and  that  of  their  families 
to  be  repaid  when  the  tobacco  was  sent  in.  The  new 
laws  enabled  every  dishonest  native  to  evade  his  debts, 


68  MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

and  gave  the  officials  the  power  to  cut  down  his  govern- 
ment credits,  so  that  the  outside  creditor  would  be  un- 
able to  receive  anything  upon  the  debt.  There  is  a  cer- 
tain diabolic  ingenuity  about  this  which  is  worthy  of  the 
Sublime  Porte. 

In  1880  the  condition  of  affairs  had  grown  so  bad  that 
even  the  Spanish  landowners  began  to  protest.  If  a 
landowner,  for  example,  dared  to  smoke  a  leaf  of  tobacco 
growing  on  his  own  land,  cultivated  by  his  own  hand,  at 
any  place  excepting  inside  the  tobacco  shed  he  was  liable 
to  arrest,  and  a  fine  with  costs  of  seven  dollars  and 
thirty-seven  cents  for  one  cigar,  and  one  dollar  and 
eighty-seven  cents  for  a  cigarette.  When  it  is  remem- 
bered that  a  cigar  in  the  Philippines  costs  about  one 
cent  in  our  money,  and  a  cigarette  one  mill,  the  severity 
of  the  fine  can  be  imagined,  and  yet  in  one  province 
alone  the  annual  average  of  fines  for  this  kind  of  offense 
rose  from  the  passage  of  the  law  up  to  seven  thousand 
dollars.  Another  law  gave  the  officials  the  right  of 
domiciliary  search.  The  officers  were  allowed  to  enter  a 
house  at  any  time  from  sunrise  to  sunset  to  examine  every 
part  of  the  building,  and  the  furniture,  including  trunks, 
boxes,  barrels,  and  bales,  and  to  strip  men,  women  and 
children,  and  examine  their  clothing  after  it  had  been 
removed.  In  more  than  one  thousand  cases  justly  indig- 
nant husbands,  fathers,  brothers,  and  sons,  attacked  the 
officers  of  the  law  for  their  indecent  treatment  of  the 
women  of  the  household  and  killed  them.  In  over  one 
thousand  cases  they  wounded  the  officials,  but  all  those 
who  displayed  true  manhood  in  this  way  were  hunted 
down  and  shot  as  wild  beasts. 

Finally  the  government  began  to  pay  treasury  notes 
instead  of  money  for  the  tobacco,  and  starvation  threat- 
ened the  poor  planters  throughout  the  islands.  In 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  69 

1883  the  monopoly  was  at  last  abolished  by  law,  and 
against  the  protests  of  many  of  the  leading  statesmen  of 
Madrid.  It  was  not  the  cruelty  and  inhumanity  which 
caused  the  abolition  of  the  system,  but  the  certainty  that 
the  vast  scheme  would  collapse  and  bring  nothing  to  the 
state.  Since  that  time  the  tobacco  industry  of  the 
Philippines  has  prospered,  using  the  term  in  a  relative 
sense. 

The  annual  output  has  grown  from  year  to  year,  and 
there  has  been  some  attempt  made  to  improve  the  quality 
of  the  leaf.  The  exports  the  first  year,  1883,  were  one 
hundred  and  ninety  millions  of  cigars,  and  seven  thou- 
sand tons  of  leaf  tobacco,  while  in  1895,  the  last  year  of 
which  there  is  any  published  record  accessible,  the 
cigars  had  leaped  to  two  hundred  millions,  and  the 
tobacco  to  fifteen  thousand  tons.  At  the  present  time 
the  business  is  conducted  without  any  interference  on 
the  part  of  the  government.  The  Spanish  law  tends  to 
favor  its  own  citizens  at  the  expense  of  foreigners,  and 
the  largest  establishment  is  a  huge  corporation  styled 
The  General  Company  of  Tobaccos  of  the  Philippines. 
There  are  a  number  of  Chinese  manufacturers  who  do  a 
very  excellent  business,  and  many  smaller  Spanish  and 
native  houses.  Strange  as  it  may  seem  to  the  govern- 
ment at  home,  the  royal  treasury  at  Madrid  receives  far 
more  money  under  the  present  system  than  it  did  in  the~~~~r~ 
cruelest  days  of  the  monopoly.  The  tobacco  factories  in 
Manila  range  from  small  shops  to  establishments  employ- 
ing hundreds,  and  even  thousands  of  operatives.  They 
are  large,  roomy  buildings,  well  ventilated,  and  kept 
clean  and  well  sanitated.  The  trade  itself  is  healthful, 
emanations  of  the  leaf  being  very  distasteful  to  all  forms 
of  insect  life,  and  acting  as  a  germicide  of  some  effi- 
ciency. The  operatives  are  mainly  girls  and  women. 


70  MANILA   AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

mostly  half-castes  and  natives.  They  are  industrious, 
well-behaved,  neat  in  their  appearance,  and  aa  a  class 
attractive.  They  compare  favorably  with  the  cigarette 
girls  of  the  eastern  cities,  and  like  them  are  fond  of 
light  social  recreation  when  their  work  is  done. 

In  the  same  factory  all  branches  of  work  are  carried 
on.  In  one  section  cheroots  are  produced,  in  another 
cigars,  in  a  third,  rolls  similar  to  American  stogies,  in  a 
fourth  folded  cigarettes,  in  a  fifth  pasted  cigarettes,  in 
a  sixth  picadura,  or  short-cut  smoking  tobacco,  and  in  a 
seventh  prepared  leaf  for  exportation.  There  is  also  a 
box-making  department  where  improved  American 
machinery  turns  out  cigar  boxes,  in  a  never  ending 
stream,  a  paste  board  box  division,  a  packing  box  de- 
partment, and  a  printing  department  for  labels  and 
wrappers. 

"  Everybody  smokes  in  the  islands,  native  and  foreign, 
man,  woman  and  child.  The  market-woman  whiffs  her 
cigarette  and  the  Tagal  grandmother  may  be  seen  draw- 
ing upon  a  huge  cheroot.  The  tobacco  is  milder  and 
not  so  well  flavored  as  the  Cuban.  It  comes  close  to  the 
Mexican  leaf  from  which  it  is  descended,  but  according 
to  experts  is  a  trifle  better  than  the  latter.  Under  good 
local  government  the  industry  would  quickly  double  and 
treble  its  present  proportions.  The  fields  are  not  prop- 
erly cultivated  owing  to  the  lack  of  efficient  imple- 
ments. 

The  greater  burden  upon  it  is  the  absence  of  not  only 
railroads,  but  of  even  decent  thoroughfares.  While 
there  are  many  good  roads  on  Luzon  they  only  serve  to 
make  the  other  and  more  numerous  ones  look  worse  by 
comparison.  Good  roads  running  through  the  tobacco 
district,  and,  better  still,  well-managed  railways,  would 
open  up  splendid  districts  now  unavailable,  and  reduce 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  71 

the  expense  of  transportation  to  a  quarter,  and  even  less, 
of  what  it  now  is. 

For  some  mysterious  reason  the  United  States  has  not 
thus  far  been  a  good  customer  of  the  Philippine  tobacco 
industry  We  take  enormous  quantities  of  sugar  and 
hemp,  but  of  their  cigars,  cigarettes  and  tobacco,  we 
took  according  to  last  advices,  only  about  five  thousand 
dollars'  worth  in  a  year,  not  so  much  as  any  one  of  the 
leading  European  nations,  China,  Japan,  India,  Egypt, 
Australia,  or  even  New  Zealand.  The  only  explanation 
which  can  be  offered  is  that  the  American  palate  has 
been  spoiled  by  the  Vuelta  Abajo  leaf  of  Cuba,  and  the 
golden  leaf  of  Virginia,  North  Carolina,  and  Kentucky. 


72  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER 

ABOUND   LUZON. 

THE  absence  of  proper  railway  facilities  is  not  a  great 
drawback  in  the  Philippines,  the  wonderful  coast-line 
enables  the  traveler  to  do  her  journeying  in  a  much  more 
pleasant  fashion  by  water.  There  are  little  light- 
draught  steamboats  which  go  almost  everywhere,  and 
which  charge  very  low  fares  and  upon  every  navigable 
steam,  lake,  and  bay,  are  bancas,  canoes  and  other  boats 
which  can  be  hired  for  an  insignificant  sum.  Thus  to 
reach  the  northern  part  of  Luzon,  you  take  a  broad- 
bowed  and  fat-bellied  steamboat  which  looks  for  all  the 
world  like  the  hull  of  an  American  ferryboat  fitted  with 
the  upper  works  of  an  English  channel  steamer.  It  goes 
from  port  to  port,  stopping  apparently  at  any  place  where 
it  can  pick  up  a  passenger,  or  a  piece  of  freight.  It 
goes  as  far  as  San  Fernando,  which  is  not  far  from  Cape 
Bojeador,  where  it  lands  at  a  wooden  pier  similar  to  the 
dilapidated  wharves  that  are  found  at  decaying  towns  on 
the  Long  Island  Sound. 

There  is  no  hotel  at  the  place,  not  even  an  inn  of  the 
lowest  type,  the  people,  however,  are  hospitable  here  as 
they  are  throughout  the  country.  It  should  be  said  to 
the  credit  of  the  Spaniard  that  he  is  always  hospitable 
as  well  as  always  courteous.  This  hospitality  does  not 
mean  generosity,  because  he  expects  the  same  hospitality 
when  he  goes  to  any  other  town.  Thus,  in  the  course  of 


v 


8  y 

C     <U 

5.§ 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  73 

a  year,  the  number  of  people  he  has  entertained  is  just 
about  the  same  as  the  number  of  times  he  has  been 
entertained. 

From  here  the  favorite  route  for  the  tourist  is  to  the 
little  town  of  La  Trinidad.  The  country  is  mountainous 
and  picturesque.  In  its  general  appearance  it  suggests 
the  Catskills,  although  the  mountains  probably  average  a 
little  higher.  The  official  surveys  give  a  few  summits  at 
four  thousand  feet  and  a  great  many  at  three  thousand. 
The  valleys  are  sharp  and  well  defined,  and  even  in  the 
dry  season  there  are  numberless  waterfalls  of  extraordi- 
nary beauty.  Vegetable  growth  is  more  than  luxuriant, 
and  prevents  a  passenger  from  riding  out  of  the  road  or 
beaten  path  even  if  she  so  desires. 

There  is  very  little  danger  to  the  traveler  in  this  part 
of  Luzon.  The  natives  are  docile,  and  seldom  run 
amuck  or  join  the  oath-bound  organization  known  as  the 
juramentada.  There  are  no  wild  beasts  worthy  of  men- 
tion, the  only  animals  from  whom  aught  can  be  feared 
being  the  crocodile  and  the  anaconda.  The  former  is 
large  and  ferocious,  but  seldom  goes  out  of  his  lair  to 
attack  human  beings,  having  learned  in  all  probability  an 
unconscious  respect  for  the  two-legged  animal  which 
carries  a  long  and  noisy  metal  tube  The  anaconda  is  a 
crafty  reptile,  and  when  very  hungry  will  attack  man 
as  well  as  beast.  It  grows  to  enormous  size  in  the 
Philippines,  one  captured  by  the  Ann  Arbor  expedition 
a  few  years  ago  being  thirty  feet  long  and  more  than  a 
foot  in  diameter.  Another  one  which  was  killed  in  the 
sixties  is  Btill  seen  in  the  form  of  a  well-tanned  hide 
in  Manila.  A  part  of  the  tail  has  been  lost,  and  pieces 
of  the  skin  have  been  cut  or  torn  away,  but  even  as  it 
remains  it  is  twenty-three  feet  long,  and  forty-eight 
inches  wide  at  the  widest  point,  indicating  a  diameter  of 
about  fifteen  inches. 


74  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

These  monsters  have  a  mode  of  attack  which,  so  far  as 
is  known,  is  not  employed  by  the  snakes  of  North 
America.  They  constrict  like  all  snakes  of  their  family, 
but  in  addition  they  also  strike  a  blow,  using  the  head 
and  neck  as  a  projectile,  with  four  or  five  feet  of  the  body 
as  the  impelling  instrument.  The  blow  is  extremely 
rapid,  and  as  the  part  employed  will  weigh  from  fifty  to 
a  hundred  pounds  the  shock  is  so  great  as  to  knock 
down,  and  even  render  unconscious,  a  man,  deer,  horse, 
or  even  young  buffalo. 

The  attack  is  followed  up  instantly,  and  before  the 
luckless  victim  regains  consciousness  all  life  has  been 
crushed  out  by  the  folds  of  the  great  serpent. 

In  traveling,  the  athlete  can  walk,  but  is  bound  to 
have  his  shoes  cut  by  the  sharp  angles  and  edges  of  the 
broken  volcanic  rock  which  crops  out  every  here  and 
there  in  the  roadway.  The  favorite  mode  of  locomotion 
is  on  the  back  of  a  Philippine  pony.  This  pretty  little 
animal  suggests  the  Shetland  of  Great  Britain.  It  is 
very  small,  patient,  affectionate,  sure-footed,  and  intelli- 
gent. Though  the  climate  is  very  warm  it  is  quite 
shaggy,  and  from  the  rocky  environment  it  is  almost  as 
sure-footed  as  the  mountain  goat.  They  look  too  small 
for  a  person  to  ride,  and  yet,  by  the  wisdom  of  nature 
they  are  so  adapted  to  their  country,  that  they  will  out- 
last an  imported  horse  of  twice  their  size  and  seemingly 
ten  times  their  strength.  A  tall  man  can  only  ride  them 
by  bending  his  knees,  otherwise  his  feet  would  be  on 
the  ground  all  the  time.  The  natives,  who  are  like  most 
orientals,  kind  to  their  brute  creatures,  ride  the  ponies 
on  the  level  and  going  uphill.  In  going  downhill  they 
invariably  alight  and  walk. 

This  is  due  as  much  to  caution  as  to  regard  for  the 
animal.  The  Philippine  pony  in  going  down  a  rocky 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  75 

bill  puts  its  head  down  quite  close  to  the  round  as  if  to 
examine  the  texture  of  the  soil  and  rock.  The  angle 
made  is  sharper  than  the  angle  of  the  hill,  and  nine 
riders  out  of  ten  signalize  the  event  by  shooting  precipi- 
tately over  the  pony's  head.  The  harness  is  quite 
unique.  The  saddle  is  a  modified  Spanish  saddle  with 
less  wood  and  leather  than  those  employed  in  our  South- 
west. Everything  else  is  made  of  Manila  twine,  or 
Manila  native-made  rope — the  stirrup  straps,  belly-band, 
bridle,  and  even  the  extra  girth,  are  made  of  hemp 
twisted  or  braided  into  a  cord  scarcely  a  quarter  of  an 
inch  in  diameter.  Some  of  the  more  prosperous  natives 
have  straps  made  by  braiding  or  weaving  the  twine  or 
by  fastening  together  four,  five,  or  six  cords  so  as  to 
lie  parallel  in  a  flat  surface.  When  well  made  this  har- 
ness is  strong  and  serviceable.  It  is  also  cooler  and 
pleasanter  for  the  animal  than  heavy  straps  of  leather; 
but  most  of  it  is  not  well  made,  and  much  of  that  which 
is  well  made  is  so  worn  as  to  be  frayed,  and  at  places 
half  rubbed  through.  Where  your  harness  is  of  the 
latter  variety  it  breaks  with  extraordinary  regularity, 
and  you  spend  considerable  time  in  getting  off  tying  the 
ends  together  in  hard  knots,  readjusting  the  strap  and 
getting  on  again. 

The  land  under  cultivation  in  this  district  belongs  to 
the  church,  rich  landed  proprietors,  or  to  nobles  and 
politicians  at  Madrid.  It  is  kept  in  good  condition,  the 
fields  being  well  plowed  and  finely  cultivated,  and  each 
field  being  walled  in  as  it  were  by  a  low  embankment  of 
sod  and  clay  from  one  to  two  feet  in  thickness. 

These  walls  serve  as  boundaries,  and  also  as  dams  for 
retaining  the  rainwater  which  falls  and  that  which 
trickles  from  fields  lying  upon  higher  levels.  The  farm- 
ers are  almost  as  careful  as  those  of  China,  where  every 


76  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

drop  of  water  is  utilized  to  the  utmost.  The  fields  are 
very  productive,  giving  noble  crops  of  rice,  tobacco,  and 
other  vegetable  growths,  and  where,  when  set  aside  for 
poultry  raising,  or  grazing,  support  the  animal  charges 
with  great  ease. 

Everything  produced  belongs  to  the  landlord,  and  the 
peasants  who  raise  them  are  allowed  a  daily  stipend  of 
rice,  one  pair  of  trousers  a  year  for  a  man,  and  one  skirt, 
and  one  scarf  per  year  for  the  woman.  Every  day  the 
buffalo  carts  pass  you,  carrying  huge  loads  of  rice,  to- 
bacco, and  grain,  or  fresh  vegetables,  or  herds  of 
buffaloes,  cattle,  and  ponies,  but  all  goes  to  distant  cities, 
or  ports  for  the  benefit  of  absentee  landlords,  and  almost 
nothing  remains  for  the  wretched  people  who  have  pro- 
duced them. 

These  people  are  too  poor  to  use  meat  of  any  sort, 
poultry,  or  even  eggs.  For  animal  food  they  depend 
upon  the  fish  in  the  sea,  and  upon  the  buffalo  milk,  which 
their  white  employers  look  down  upon  with  disgust. 
And  yet,  despite  their  poverty  and  degradation,  they  are 
extremely  polite,  and  as  you  pass,  the  men  raise  their 
hats,  and  the  women  courtesy  with  all  the  grace  of  the 
Spanish  grandee  from  whom  they  have  learned  their 
manners.  The  carts,  not  only  here,  but  all  through  the 
Philippines,  are  very  funny.  They  are  strong,  heavy, 
and  clumsy,  and  their  wheels  are  solid  circles  or  disks 
of  hard  wood,  ranging  from  two  to  six  inches  in  width. 
They  squeak  as  they  move,  and  make  a  discord  so  un- 
earthly that  in  clear,  calm  weather,  they  can  be  heard 
several  miles.  The  carts  are  drawn  by  the  Philippine 
buffaloes  which  seem  a  connecting  link  between  a  cow 
and  an  elephant.  They  have  a  livid  pink  skin,  spattered 
with  huge  bristles,  wide  spreading  and  powerful  horns, 
and  a  body  that  seems  fully  a  yard  in  diameter. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  77 

As  you  progress  further  south  you  encounter  the  coral 
formation.  It  is  met  with  on  low  levels,  seldom  more 
than  twenty  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  Ages  of 
weathering  have  compacted  it  so  that  it  makes  very  good 
building  material.  It  is  used  as  a  foundation  for  the 
houses  of  the  well  to  do,  of  public  buildings  and  of 
churches,  but  the  labor  expended  upon  it  is  too  valuable, 
although  it  amounts  to  but  a  few  cents  a  day,  for  the 
coral  rock  to  be  used  by  the  comon  people. 

Through  this  part  of  Luzon  an  observant  traveler  will 
be  surprised  at  the  decay  of  the  church.  Nearly  every 
building  used  for  church  purposes  is  more  or  less  dilapi- 
dated, and  many  are  half  ruined.  In  the  handsomer 
ones  there  are  still  evidences  of  great  wealth;  but  these 
on  examination  prove  to  be  of  the  last  century,  and  not 
of  the  present  one.  The  reason  of  the  decay  is  not  far  to 
see.  When  the  church  began  its  work  the  land  belonged 
largely  to  the  natives,  who  were  prosperous  and  free 
handed  with  their  gains.  They  gave  liberally  to  the 
church,  and  in  many  instance  built  edifices  which  would 
be  a  credit  to  any  country,  but  the  industrial  political 
system  undermined  all  this  prosperity.  The  lands 
passed  from  the  natives  to  the  church  and  to  private 
owners,  to  officials,  and  finally  to  nobles  in  Madrid,  and 
to  bankers  and  usurers  in  both  that  capital  and  Paris. 

The  former  owners  became  peasants,  and  year  after 
year  their  lot  became  harder  and  harder.  As  they  grew 
poorer  their  contributions  necessarily  ceased,  and  the 
church  itself  disposed  of  many  of  its  estates  to  private 
citizens.  So  it  went  on,  from  bad  to  worse,  until  to-day 
the  lot  of  the  peasant  in  the  Philippines  is  much  worse 
than  that  of  the  coolie  in  the  poorest  district  of  the 
Province  of  Canton  in  China. 

When  a  man  has  only  one  pair  of  trousers  a  year,  and 


78  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

like  to  appear  neat  and  attractive  on  high  days  and  holi- 
days, he  is  very  apt  to  put  that  pair  aside  when  he  is  at 
work.  This  is  what  occurs  throughout  the  Philippines. 
Hundreds  of  thousands  go  about  perfectly  naked,  and  an 
equally  large,  and  perhaps  larger  number,  wear  the  small- 
est possible  breech  cloth,  held  in  position  by  a  rope  tied 
round  the  waist,  serving  both  as  a  garment  and  a  pocket. 
To  a  visitor  from  a  western  civilization  there  is  no  more 
striking  spectacle  than  a  group  or  caravan  of  carriers  in 
the  mountainous  districts  of  Luzon.  The  first  man, 
usually  the  head  man,  wears  a  loin  cloth  and  a  home- 
made straw  hat  about  the  size  and  shape  of  an  archery 
target.  Behind  him  comes  a  long  line  of  naked,  bronze 
human  beings,  each  with  a  bamboo  frame  on  his  back, 
fastened  to  his  body  by  narrow  shoulder  straps,  and  a 
broad  band  of  either  leather  or  Manila  rope  around  the 
forehead.  Nearly  ail  the  weight  is  thrown  upon  the 
forehead,  a  mode  of  carrying  entirely  unknown  to  Eng- 
land or  America.  In  this  district  the  roads  exist  only 
in  name.  They  are  hardly  bridle  paths.  Many  of  them 
are  what  in  western  vernacular  would  be  termed 
"blazes." 

This  northern  district  of  Luzon  deserves  thorough  ex- 
ploitation by  competent  specialists.  It  is  up  here,  not 
far  from  La  Trinidad,  that  they  have  found  a  large  out- 
crop of  gold-bearing  quartz,  which  is  worked  by  the 
natives  in  the  most  primitive  style  possible.  They  break 
off  a  piece  of  the  quartz  comminute  it  upon  a  rock  with  a 
round  piece  of  the  same  material,  and  then  grind  it  to  a 
powder  sweeping  this  into  a  basin  of  water,  and  there 
washing  away  the  particles  of  stone  until  nothing  is  left 
in  the  bottom,  but  a  few  grains  of  gold.  Some  of  the 
more  intelligent  natives  heat  the  quartz  rock  in  a  bonfire 
and  throw  it,  when  red  hot,  into  a  pail  of  water.  The 


fc   a  i 

O       rt     03 

a  -« 

j       03     o3 

§   •§  * 

s  js : 


!zf  >  ^ 

O  <u  s 

N  V  +3 

P  v,  .22 


Q  ^  * 

^  4^   c 

t-T  <u    « 

^  J3  .S 
«   ^2 

fe  II 

«  H§ 

O  -    b/j 

HH  T3      E 

S  II 


1 


§  w, 


S. 

a 
i 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  79 

rock  behaves  as  glass  does  under  the  same  circumstances, 
crackling  and  crumbling  into  a  mass  of  brittle  and  fria- 
ble fragments.  Working  this  way  a  man  and  his  wife 
can  make  a  dollar's  worth  of  gold  a  week  which  they 
sell  to  the  Spanish  speculators,  at  one-half  of  its  real 
value.  But  fifty  cents  a  week  makes  a  very  good  living 
for  a  man  in  that  part  of  the  world.  He  can  have  two 
pair  of  trousers  a  year,  and  his  wife  can  have  two  skirts. 
The  gold  country  is  situated  between  Kapouga  and  La 
Trinidad,  and  the  main  ledge,  what  would  be  termed  the 
mother  lode,  has  been  traced  off  and  on  for  ten  miles. 
There  is  also  placer  gold,  but  the  only  ones  who  have 
ever  worked  it  with  any  profit  have  been  Chinese  miners 
who  had  received  their  training  in  California.  Neither 
the  natives,  nor  the  Spaniards  have  ever  attempted  the 
task  upon  a  large  scale,  or  have  made  a  sufficient  profit 
upon  a  small  one.  Near  Kapouga  there  is  another  for- 
mation of  quartz  carrying  silver-bearing  lead.  It  has 
been  used  for  the  production  of  the  latter  metal,  but  the 
difficulty  in  transportation  has  been  too  great  an  obstacle 
for  the  energy  and  enterprise  of  the  inhabitants.  For 
the  benefit  of  miners  it  may  be  added  that  there  is  an 
unlimited  supply  of  fresh  water,  with  a  fall  sufficient  to 
run  a  thousand  turbines.  There  is  an  inexhaustible 
amount  of  wood,  of  the  toughest  and  strongest  kind, 
suitable  for  timbering  mines  and  for  supplying  fuel. 
The  mining  country  is  on  very  high  land,  ranging  from 
three  to  six  thousand  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  It 
is  free  from  malaria,  and  provides  excellent  shooting  and 
fishing  for  those  who  care  for  sport,  or  who  like  to  im- 
prove the  ordinary  food  supply  of  the  district.  The 
province  is  also  interesting  in  respect  to  its  population. 
This  is  very  much  mixed.  The  most  prominent,  if  not 
the  most  numerous  type,  are  the  mountain  Indians,  or 


80  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

mountain  Malays,  who  are  tall,  dark,  muscular  men 
averaging  about  five  feet  four,  and  some  reaching  a 
high  as  five  feet  eight  inches.  They  are  active,  ener 
getic,  but  are  said  to  be  untruthful  and  dishonest 
Those  on  the  coast  and.  in  the  lowlands  are  mucl 
smaller,  averaging  about  five  feet  in  height,  of  thinne: 
build,  and  smaller  muscular  development.  They  are  no 
very  strong,  but  are  very  lazy.  They  work  half-heart 
edly,  and  get  tired  quickly.  They  are  good  natured 
taking  nothing  seriously.  They  make  poor  workingmen 
but,  on  the  other  hand,  they  are  said  to  be  singularly 
affectionate,  loyal,  truthful,  and  honest.  A  third  typ( 
is  a  brown  race,  known  as  the  Garoti.  These  are  be 
lieved  to  have  been  the  race  that  immediately  succeeded 
the  original  negroid  stock,  and  preceded  the  Malay  stock 
They  resemble  the  Papuans,  and  preserve,  even  to-daj 
many,  if  not  most,  of  their  savage  rites,  ceremonies,  anc 
superstitions.  Both  men  and  women  are  tattooed,  th< 
men  decorating  the  arms  and  hands,  and  the  women  th< 
upper  arm,  shoulders,  and  neck.  They  have  queer  musi 
cal  instruments,  consisting  of  copper  gongs  which  ar< 
struck  with  small  sticks,  and  wooden  drums  with  snak( 
skin  heads  three  feet  long,  but  only  five  or  six  inches  ir 
diameter. 

This  odd  affair  gives  a  double  note  when  struck, 
There  is  first  the  tang  of  the  skin,  sharp  and  short,  and 
then  a  muffled  roar  from  the  wooden  body,  which  serve* 
partly  as  a  sounding  board,  and  partly  as  a  generator  oi 
sound.  The  men  are  rather  well  built,  and  the  young 
women  are  very  attractive  and  exquisitely  shapely. 
From  the  age  of  thirteen  to  about  twenty  their  forme 
will  compare  favorable  with  classic  models.  Then  they 
age  rapidly  and  soon  become  wrinkled  and  unattractive. 
At  stated  seasons  of  the  year  they  hold  feasts,  whose 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  81 

exact  object  and  nature  they  conceal,  or  else  which  the 
Spaniards  do  not  understand.  These  festivals  last  two, 
and  even  three  days,  continuously.  No  one  is  supposed 
to  sleep,  but  is  in  duty  bound  to  keep  up  the  programme 
of  eating,  drinking,  smoking,  dancing,  and  singing. 

The  feast  is  opened  by  killing  and  cooking  a  young 
buffalo,  several  pigs,  and  a  score  of  chickens.  These  are 
served  with  boiled  rice,  and  a  little  salt,  and  are  washed 
down  with  a  weak  fermented  liquor  that  is  supposed  to 
be  a  rice  beer,  flavored  with  barks  and  fruit.  It  has  not 
been  anaylzed,  but  cannot  contain  more  than  two  or 
three  per  cent,  of  alcohol.  It  is  a  little  stronger,  there- 
fore, than  ginger  pop,  but  not  quite  so  strong  as  small 
beer.  The  women  use  it  by  the  quart,  and  the  men  by 
the  gallon,  and  as  none  of  them  seem  inebriated,  the 
beverage  is  probably  quite  harmless.  The  singing  and 
dancing  reminds  one  of  similar  performances  by  the 
Indians  of  the  plains.  The  time  is  good,  but  the  melo- 
dy is  simple  and  somewhat  wearisome.  The  dance  is  be- 
gun by  one  or  two  pairs,  each  pair  consisting  of  a  man 
and  a  woman.  They  move  forward  and  back,  and  in 
separate  circles,  both  to  the  right  and  the  left,  using 
arms  and  legs  at  the  same  time. 

The  steps  are  three  in  character,  one  being  similar 
to  the  waltz  step,  another  being  a  flat  shuffle,  and  a  third 
being  a  hop  such  as  marked  the  old  fashioned  hop  waltz. 
With  the  arms  there  is  greater  variety  and  freedom  of 
movement,  the  woman  surpassing  the  man  in  this  re- 
spect. The  latter  has  his  arms  stretched  outward,  mov- 
ing them  forward  and  back,  up  and  down,  graduating 
each  movement  with  the  step  of  his  feet.  The  woman 
moves  her  arms  from  a  bended  position  over  the  head,  a 
full  demicircle  to  a  bended  position  behind  the  back. 
She  also  sways  her  body  forward  and  back,  and  side- 


82  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

ways,  and  has  a  curious  hitch  or  twist  of  the  hips,  some- 
thing like  that  of  the  houlah  houlah  dancers  of  Hawaii. 
Frequently  the  man  will  snap  his  fingers  like  castanets, 
or  clap  his  hands.  After  the  first  pair  or  two  get 
tired,  they  step  backward  from  the  dancing  space,  and 
are  immediately  congratulated,  thanked,  and  rewarded 
with  immense  bowls  of  the  native  beer.  In  the  mean- 
time their  places  have  been  taken  by  others.  Toward 
the  early  hours  of  the  morning  the  pairs  are  increased 
until  thirty  or  forty  are  in  full  movement,  with  a  hun- 
dred beating  time  with  their  hands  and  feet,  and  hum- 
ming, or  even  chanting  rude  melodies,  whose  tempo 
coincides  with  that  of  the  dance.  There  is  a  fire  burn- 
ing day  and  night,  which  throws  wavering  light  upon 
the  throng;  smoky  torches  burn  here  and  there,  and  in 
some  corner  the  familiar  kerosene  lamp  recalls  the  far- 
off  civilization.  The  man's  costume  is  a  light  blanket, 
and  a  pair  of  trousers,  and  the  woman's  a  smaller  blanket 
and  skirt,  from  the  waist  to  halfway  below  the  knee. 
On  the  second  day  they  looked  haggard  and  exhausted, 
but  they  keep  on  as  if  impelled  by  a  religious  duty, 
until  they  reach  the  appointed  time  for  closing,  and 
then  most  of  them  are  so  worn  out  that  they  sink  down, 
and  are  immediately  sound  asleep  in  the  very  center  of 
the  hall  or  place  of  meeting. 

These  Garotis  are  braver  and  more  feared  than  the 
peasantry  further  north,  or  the  coast  dwellers  and  men 
of  the  lowlands.  They,  therefore,  are  not  so  poor,  and 
have  more  enjoyment  in  life.  The  well-to-do  usually 
possess  one  shirt,  which  they  wear  upon  the  great  religi- 
ous festival,  and  the  women  will  own  a  shawl  and  a  few 
a  coarse  lace  mantilla.  The  last-named  owner  is  looked 
up  to  as  an  almost  unearthly  being  by  her  less  fortunate 
sisters  and  neighbors. 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  83 

The  houses  are  small  huts  made  of  wood  leaves  and 
thatch,  and  contain  but  one  room.  There  is  a  bed  in 
the  corner,  and  some  wooden  contrivance  serving  as  a 
table  or  stand.  The  fireplace  is  in  the  middle,  and  is 
used  for  smoking  meats  as  well  as  for  cooking.  All  of 
these  savages  understand  the  preservative  nature  of 
smoke  and  apply  it  to  fish,  flesh,  and  fowl,  with  good 
practical  skill.  Overhead  the  cross  beams  and  girders 
are  utilized  as  a  storage  in  which  are  kept  rice,  corn, 
dried  animal  food  and  such  vegetables  as  do  not  decay 
readily.  It  is  clear  that  in  this  part  of  Luzon  at  least 
there  has  been  but  little  racial  change  in  many  centuries. 
The  mountain  men,  the  peasants,  the  men  of  the  coast 
and  lowlands,  and  the  Garotis  each  occupies  his  own 
neighborhood,  acknowledging  the  rights  of  the  others  to 
theirs.  While  they  are  not  particularly  friendly,  they 
are  not  at  feud,  but  each  carries  on  his  own  way  of  living 
without  reference  or  thought  as  to  those  of  his  neigh- 
bors, The  Spaniards  declare  that  this  was  the  condition 
of  Luzon  when  they  first  took  possession  of  the  island, 
a  nd  that  the  people  are  about  the  same  in  every  respect 
as  they  were  three  hundred  years  ago,  with  the  excep- 
tion that  two-thirds  have  been  nominally,  if  not  actually, 
christianized.  Even  the  Spaniards  themselves  admit 
that  these  races,  brown,  yellow,  and  yellow  brown,  have 
not  improved  greatly  in  the  three  hundred  years,  and 
that  at  heart  many  of  them  still  cherish  the  savage  prac- 
tices and  superstitions  which  have  always  been  pro- 
hibited by  Spanish  law.  No  attempt  worthy  of  mention 
has  been  made  to  educate  them.  They  keep  up  their  old 
languages,  and  many  understand  scarcely  a  word  of  the 
legal  tongue  of  the  country. 


84  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER   IX. 

CAVITB. 

SOUTHWEST  of  the  province  of  Manila  lies  that  of 
Cavite,  one  of  the  most  important  in  the  island  of  Luzon. 
At  the  northern  end  the  territory  runs  out  in  a  long 
peninsula,  whose  end  turns  and  splits  into  two  small 
penisulas  pointing  toward  the  mainland.  This  is  the 
site  of  the  city  of  Cavite  which,  beside  being  the  capital 
of  the  province,  is  also  the  northern  naval  station  of  the 
Philippine  government.  The  northwest  coast  of  Cavite 
forms  one  of  the  shores  of  Manila  Bay.  On  the  south  it 
is  shut  in  by  a  high  range  of  hills  or  mountains,  and  on 
the  east  it  is  bounded  by  La  Laguna,  or  Lake  Countjr. 
At  its  extreme  northwest  it  touches  the  famous  lake 
known  as  Laguna  de  Bay,  whose  beauty  and  picturesque 
scenery  have  made  it  a  favorite  place  for  visitors  as  well 
as  natives.  The  province  of  Cavite  is  traversed  by  many 
small  streams  running  from  southeast  to  northwest,  and 
breaking  through  what  was  once  a  line  of  low  hills.  The 
bay  of  Cavite  is  shaped  something  like  a  shoe,  of  which 
the  upper  part  lies  between  the  arsenal  at  the  point  and 
the  Manila  mainland :  the  heel  runs  into  the  latter  dis- 
trict and  the  toe  runs  out  into  the  peninsula,  so  that  at 
one  point  the  latter  is  practically  an  isthmus.  The  prov- 
ince is  very  fertile,  and  is  in  a  high  state  of  cultivation. 
It  is  well  populated,  the  natives  being  very  good  types  of 
the  Tagal  race.  The  town  is  fortified,  and  within  its 


MANILA  AND    THE  PHILIPPINES.  85 

walls  are  some  substantial  houses,  a  theatre,  several  toler- 
able hotels,  four  good  cafes,  two  well-built  churches,  and 
the  government  works  at  the  navy  yard.  There  are  no 
sewers,  and  the  poorer  districts  of  the  city  are  very 
filthy.  During  the  hot  season  the  city  dirt  decays,  pro- 
ducing vile  odors  and  more  or  less  malaria.  There  are 
both  fevers  and  choleraic  disorders  during  this  portion 
of  the  year.  In  the  rainy  season,  and  in  winter  the 
place  is  quite  healthful,  although  the  streets  are  often 
too  muddy  for  comfortable  locomotion.  The  surround- 
ing country  bears  the  evidence  of  an  industrious  com- 
munity. These  appearances  are  not  deceptive.  There 
are  many  farms  and  plantations,  and  the  harvests  are 
large  and  valuable.  There  is  an  extensive  coast  traffic, 
the  passengers  going  by  small  light-draft  steamers,  and 
produce  of  all  sorts  is  carried  in  part  by  steamers,  but  in 
chief  by  sailing  vessels. 

The  bay  of  Cavite  is  a  good  place  to  study  the  naval 
architecture  of  that  part  of  the  world.  There  are  always 
several  warships  in  port,  ranging  from  ancient  Spanish 
gunboats  to  the  latest  output  of  the  British  shipyards. 
There  are  many  steamers  plying  between  Manila,  Japan, 
China,  Hong  Kong,  and  Singapore.  These  are  usually 
small,  or  medium-sized  vessels  ranging  from  five  hundred 
tons  to  about  two  thousand.  The  average  is  about  a 
thousand  tons  burden.  Here  is  one  of  the  few  places 
where  the  American  flag  can  still  be  seen.  The  old  clip- 
per ships  have  not  entirely  passed  away,  and  two  or  more 
are  almost  always  at  Cavite  waiting  to  load  with  hemp, 
sugar,  hard  woods,  dye  woods  and  other  products  of  the 
soil.  Now  and  then  a  light-draught  Spanish  gunboat 
built  for  these  waters  comes  into  port.  It  looks  like 
nothing  seen  at  home.  It  is  armed  with  several  small 
cannon,  usually  two  or  three  rapid-fire  guns.  There 


86  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

is  a  main  deck  well  shut  in,  and  an  upper  deck  partly 
covered  with  awning  and  partly  with  a  half  deck  over  the 
officers*  quarters.  Here  the  meals  are  served,  the  ham- 
mocks swung  at  night,  and  visitors  received  in  the  even- 
ing. If  there  be  any  breeze  it  is  bound  to  be  felt  on  this 
deck,  which  makes  it  very  popular  with  the  navy. 

These  gunboats  draw  from  three  to  eight  feet  of  water, 
and  can  ascend  many  of  the  smaller  rivers  to  the  towns 
or  rendezvous  of  refractory  natives.  The  native  craft 
are  quite  numerous,  and  range  from  canoes  and  long 
bancas  to  wide,  round  bowed,  flat-bottomed  freight  boats. 
These  boats  carry  two  or  three  masts  with  lateen  sails 
stiffened  by  bamboo  ribs.  They  sail  very  well  before  the 
wind,  and  are  perfect!}'  safe.  They  make  excessive  lee- 
way when  the  wind  is  abeam,  and  are  slower  than  the 
proverbial  snail  when  the  wind  is  ahead.  In  stormy 
weather  the  Malay  crews  throw  a  drag  from  the  stern, 
which  steadies  the  vesseel  to  an  extraordinary  extent. 
The  anchor  is  generally  of  European  make,  but  some- 
times of  native  build,  consisting  of  the  hard  and  tough 
timber  of  the  forests  loaded  with  lead  or  with  iron  bolts 
and  rings.  Occasionally  these  boats  will  have  small 
cabins,  but  the  majority  have  have  semicircular  mov- 
able hood  roofs  running  from  the  helmsman's  afterdeck 
to  the  forecastle,  where  the  anchor  windlass  and  heavy 
poles  and  sweeps  are  carried. 

While  these  boats  look  clumsy  and  even  uncouth,  they 
are  remarkably  strong  and  seaworthy.  Some  of  them 
have  an  extra  planking  of  a  native  wood  which  has  the 
same  quality  as  the  cellulose  used  on  modern  warships. 
It  yields  when  a  shot  is  fired  into  it,  and  immediately 
closes  again,  keeping  all  the  water  out.  This  is  a  relic 
of  the  pirate  days  when  the  Malays  astonished  European 
war  sloops  by  sailing  away  unconcernedly  after  the.ir 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES  87 

craft  had  been  shot  through  a  dozen  times.  The  fisher- 
men are  very  skillful,  and  make  use  of  every  known 
device  in  their  calling.  They  have  a  drop  net  which  is 
stretched  on  a  frame  of  bamboos  ten  feet  square.  They 
also  use  long  nets  and  huge  scoop  nets  suspended  from  a 
heavy  rope  fastened  to  the  sterns  of  two  smacks.  The 
vessel  sails  before  the  wind  with  just  enough  divergence 
of  the  helm  to  keep  the  rope  taut.  The  net  hangs  from 
this  pouching  downward  and  backward,  and  coming  up 
to  a  second  rope  drawn  parallel  and  nearly  below  the 
first.  This  style  of  fishing  is  employed  when  there  are 
schools  of  fish  running  on  or  near  the  surface  of  the  sea, 
and  in  such  instances  it  will  often  take  a  catch  of  several 
tons. 

Another  pleasant  feature  of  the  bay  is  the  number  of 
ateam  launches  darting  hero  and  there.  There  are  no 
wharves  at  Cavite.  The  only  places  where  a  ship  can 
touch  the  land  is  at  the  navjr  yard  in  Cavite,  and  in  the 
Pasig  river  at  Manila. 

The  people  of  the  province  are  noted  for  their  intelli- 
gence, and  also  for  the  revolutionary  spirit.  It  is  in  this 
district  that  no  less  than  twenty  uprisings  have  occurred 
within  the  present  century.  Many  of  the  natives  have 
had  the  advantages  of  education,  as  have  a  larger  per- 
centage of  the  half-breeds.  They  detest  Spanish  rule, 
and  have  an  unrelenting  hatred  of  the  friars,  to  whom 
they  ascribe  most  of  their  misfortunes.  The  many  water- 
courses and  the  thick  underbrush  and  jungle  make  the 
country  difficult  of  invasion  and  easy  of  defense.  During 
the  rebellion  in  1896-97  the  men  of  Cavite,  under  the 
leadership  of  Aguinaldo  and  other  revolutionists,  held 
Spanish  arms  at  bay  with  only  one-half  as  many  follow- 
ers as  there  were  troops,  and  during  the  trouble  killed 
and  wounded  more  than  nine  thousand  of  their  enemies. 


88  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

Cavite  was  settled  at  about  the  same  time  as  Manila,  and 
it  was  only  through  the  personal  preferences  of  the  first 
governor-general  that  the  capital  was  located  at  the  lat- 
ter city.  It  was  captured  by  the  Chinese  in  the  seven- 
teenth century ;  by  the  British  in  the  eighteenth,  and  by 
the  Americans  in  the  nineteenth.  It  affords  an  excellent 
base  of  operations,  both  naval  and  military.  "Without 
ships  a  small  force  can  hold  the  peninsula  against  an 
army.  And  even  with  ships  Cavite  has  more  advantages 
than  any  other  small  bay  or  harbor  within  a  hundred 
miles  of  Manila.  It  is  about  six  miles  and  a  half  from 
Manila,  and  is  connected  with  that  city  by  steamboats 
and  steam  launches.  There  is  also  a  road  from  Cavite, 
running  southward  along  the  peninsula  to  the  mainland, 
and  thence  northward  through  the  province  to  the  south 
gate  of  Manila  city.  This  road  is  fair  riding,  and  is  re- 
markably picturesque.  It  is  very  serpentine,  and  is  said 
to  be  about  twenty  miles  long.  This  is  used  chiefly  by 
poor  natives  who  cannot  afford  to  pay  the  fares  demanded 
for  the  water  trip. 

In  the  hill  country  of  Cavite  province  there  are  many 
sights  of  great  beaut}".  On  the  east  there  is  a  glorious 
view  of  Bay  lake,  and  on  the  west  the  hills,  fields,  for- 
ests and  beyond  them  again  the  blue  sea.  The  woods  of 
the  hills  are  aromatic,  and  the  hills  themselves  quite  free 
from  fever  and  malaria.  Some  of  these  mountain  sites 
are  utilized  for  summer  residence,  and  one  or  two  enjoy 
considerable  local  repute  as  sanitariums, 


MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES.  89 


CHAPTER  X. 

ILOILO. 

THE  second  city  in  importance  in  the  Philippines  is 
Iloilo,  capital  of  the  province  of  the  same  name  and  of 
the  island  of  Panay.  It  is  about  two  hundred  miles  from 
Manila  as  the  crow  flies,  and  three  hundred  odd  by 
water.  There  is  a  steamer  from  Manila  to  Iloilo,  which 
runs  the  distance  in  thirty-six  hours.  The  accommoda- 
tions are  good  and  the  trip  a  pleasant  one.  Panay  is  not 
so  pleasant  as  Luzon.  It  is  much  wilder  in  aspect,  and 
the  natives  are  not  so  civilized.  There  is  a  range  of  high 
mountains  running  nearly  north  and  south  on  the  west- 
ern side  of  the  island,  which  is  a  rough  triangle  in  out- 
line, and  another  range  in  the  northeast  corner.  This 
part  of  the  island  is  not  entirely  explored,  and  is  covered 
with  magnificent  forests.  There  are  many  small  streams, 
but  fewer  lakes  and  arms  of  the  sea  than  in  Luzon. 
There  are  many  marshes  and  much  malaria  and  fever. 
The  capital  is  situated  near  the  southeastern  point  of 
Panay  on  the  border  of  a  shallow  arm  of  the  sea  running 
between  Panay  and  the  large  marshy  and  mountainous 
island  of  Guimaras.  At  some  time  in  the  past  the  chan- 
nel has  been  wider  and  deeper,  but  the  rainfall  and 
storms  are  ever  washing  down  the  land  and  from  beneath 
the  surface  cosmic  forces  are  undoubtedly  producing  a 
slow  upheaval.  The  city  is  built  upon  the  bed  of  an 
ancient  marsh,  and  is  extremely  unprepossessing.  The 


90  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

harbor  is  a  capital  one,  being  well  protected  against  the 
fierce  winds  and  typhoons  of  those  latitudes.  The  major 
part  of  the  harbor  has  deep  water.  The  city  itself  is 
remarkably  cool  and  healthy,  considering  its  natural  dis- 
advantages. As  the  steamer  approaches  the  island  of 
Guimaras  the  traveler  can  see  a  well-designed  but  uncom- 
pleted lighthouse.  It  was  built  in  the  middle  of  the 
eighties,  and  although  the  money  has  been  collected  three 
or  four  times  over  it  has  never  yet  been  finished.  Funni- 
est of  all,  every  ship — especially  the  foreign  owned — 
which  enters  the  port  has  to  pay  a  large  bill  for  light- 
house dues.  The  province  of  Iloilo  is  very  populous, 
containing  nearly  five  hundred  thousand  citizens.  It  is 
the  center  of  the  sugar  trade  of  the  archipelago,  the 
annual  exports  being  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  thou- 
sand tons  a  year.  It  also  does  a  large  trade  in  hemp, 
sapanwood,  tobacco,  coffee,  and  mother-of-pearl. 

The  sugar  exported  by  Iloilo  is  not  all  raised  in  the 
province,  some  of  it  being  brought  across  from  the  rich 
plantations  of  Negros  island.  When  the  price  of  sugar 
is  high  the  city  and  island  are  very  prosperous.  The 
bounty  system  of  European  governments  upon  home- 
made beet  sugar  has  so  reduced  the  demand  for  cane 
sugar  that  the  trade  in  Iloilo  has  hardly  paid  expenses 
for  seven  or  eight  years.  On  several  occasions  they  have 
exported  large  quantities  to  San  Francisco,  but  the  bulk 
goes  to  Hong  Kong,  China  and  Japan.  Since  sugar  has 
proved  so  unprofitable  much  attention  has  been  paid  to 
tabacco,  and  the  product  is  increasing  annually  in  both 
quantity  and  quality.  It  is  sent  to  Manila,  where  it  is 
mixed  with  the  Luzon  tobacco  in  order  to  make  the  lower 
grade  of  Manila  cigars.  These  are  ridiculously  cheap, 
being  sold  sometimes  as  low  as  two  and  three  for  a  cent. 
Biqe  is  cultivated  with  success,  the  industry  having  beeu 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  91 

introduced  and  developed  by  enterprising  Chinamen. 
Tha  natives  conduct  two  successful  manufactures  under 
Spanish  or  Chinese  direction;  one  of  pina  or  pineapple 
cloth,  and  the  other  jusi  or  silk  cloth.  The  entire 
island  is  in  but  a  moderate  condition,  owing  to  the  enor- 
mous taxes  and  imposts  levied  by  the  government,  the 
profits  and  prosperity  of  the  merchants  and  planters  being 
absorbed  by  the  officials,  priests  and  politicians.  The 
Spaniards  have  no  hesitancy  in  extracting  the  last  possi- 
ble cent,  because  the  business  of  the  place  has  passed 
into  the  hands  of  Chinese  and  mestizos.  Although  the 
island  of  Panay  is  very  near  Luzon,  it  is  almost  entirely 
free  from  earthquakes.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is 
subject  to  frequent  visitations  from  typhoons.  The  larg- 
est business  house  is  an  English  firm,  of  which  the  local 
manager  is  consul  for  Great  Britain  and  Hawaii,  his 
assistant  is  consul  for  the  United  States,  and  the  firm 
itself  is  agent  for  all  sorts  of  companies  and  corporations 
in  every  part  of  the  world.  The  firm  extends  lavish  hos- 
pitality to  all  visitors,  especially  to  Englishmen  and 
Americans.  As  there  is  but  one  cheap  hotel  in  the  place, 
this  courtesy  is  certainly  worthy  of  being  recorded. 
There  are  no  public  carriages  in  the  city,  no  places  of 
amusement,  and  what  few  restaurants  there  are,  are  of  the 
cheapest  and  lowest  description.  The  streets  are  un- 
paved,  and  in  the  wet  season  are  a  foot  deep  in  mud ;  in 
the  dry,  they  are  ankle  deep  in  dust.  If  the  city  is 
uninteresting,  the  country  round  about  is  royally  pictur- 
esque. There  are  forests  where  the  trees  rise  one  tower- 
ing over  another  until  they  terminate  in  the  green  tops  of 
monarchs  of  the  woods  a  hundred  and  fifty  and  a  hundred 
and  eighty  feet  high.  There  are  mountains  in  the  dis- 
tance— some  sharp  and  clearly  cut  like  sugar  loaves,  and 
some  magnificent  masses  of  rock  rising  thousands  of  feet 


92  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

into  the  air.  Everything  is  green,  and  has  a  sheen  as  if 
it  had  been  coated  with  velvet.  The  city  faces  the  chan- 
nel on  the  one  side,  and  a  muddy  creek  on  the  other.  It 
is  slack  and  small  in  the  dry  season,  but  in  the  wet  sea- 
son it  has  a  good  current  and  often  overflows  its  banks 
on  both  sides.  There  is  a  small  public  square  which 
nature  keeps  beautiful  with  flowers  and  weeds,  and  the 
streets  are  wide  and  regular.  There  are  many  good 
houses;  that  is  to  say,  comfortable  ones.  The  two  finest 
buildings  belong,  one  to  an  American  firm,  in  which  they 
do  business  on  the  ground  floor  and  live  on  the  second, 
and  the  other  is  a  large  Swiss  commercial  house. 

There  is  a  church  on  the  square,  which  might  be  mis- 
taken for  a  sugar  refinery  or  a  jail.  It  was  apparently 
built  by  natives  with  no  knowledge  of  architecture,  and 
these  in  turn  were  doubtless  directed  by  some  priest  from 
Manila,  who  imagined  that  he  must  take  the  same  pre- 
cautions against  earthquakes  in  his  new  home  as  in  the 
old  one.  Not  far  from  the  church  is  a  small  courthouse 
looking  very  cheap  and  dirty;  a  convent,  somewhat 
dilapidated,  and  a  few  small  houses  built  of  stone  below 
and  wood  above.  The  right-hand  side  of  the  square  has 
the  best  row  of  houses  in  the  Philippines  outside  of 
Manila.  They  are  built  very  solidly,  being  of  brick  and 
stone  in  the  lower  floors,  brick  and  wood  in  the  upper 
ones,  and  all  having  corrugated  iron  roofs  fastened  by 
wrought  iron  rods  to  the  masonry  below.  The  other 
houses  are  of  all  sorts  and  kinds.  Some  are  handsome 
Indian  bungalows,  some  are  what  is  known  as  typhoon 
houses  (built  of  solid  stone  walls  one  story  high  with 
brick  and  iron  roofs) ;  others  are  the  cheapest  kind  of 
Malay  bungalows  and  insignificant  habitations  occupied 
by  Chinese  and  mestizos,  while  hundreds  of  others  are 
filthy  hovels  inhabited  by  the  poor  natives.  At  the  far 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  93 

end  of  the  main  street  in  the  government  house,  built  of 
stone  and  wood,  and  once  very  handsome,  but  now  so 
neglected  as  to  be  in  an  almost  ruinous  condition.  Over 
one  third  of  the  town  site  is  land  reclaimed  from  the 
swamps.  The  territory  on  the  other  side  of  the  creek 
facing  the  city  is  a  low  marsh,  which  becomes  a  swamp  or 
a  watery  waste  at  very  high  tides,  or  at  ordinary  high 
tides  during  the  rainy  season.  The  place  is  very  dull 
indeed.  One  English  business  house  has  a  bowling  alley 
and  one  American  house  a  billiard  table.  The  Swiss  firm 
has  a  tolerable  piano,  and  a  mad  Spaniard  is  pleased  to 
conduct  what  he  calls  a  cafe.  He  would  starve  to  death 
but  for  the  courtesy  of  the  foreign  merchants  and  of  the 
merchant  marine  who  visits  the  place.  Once  a  year  or 
once  in  two  years  a  dramatic  company  comes  from 
Manila  to  Iloilo  to  replenish  its  treasury.  As  there  is 
neither  theatre  nor  hall,  they  give  their  entertainment  in 
a  shed.  Nevertheless,  this  is  so  glorious  a  distraction  to 
the  citizens  that  they  crowd  every  performance,  and 
beside  paying  good  prices  for  their  seats  get  up  benefits, 
extend  every  courtesy  which  can  please  or  be  of  advan- 
tage to  the  Thespians.  Among  the  sights  of  the  town 
the  most  striking  is  the  spectacle  of  a  well-to-do  half- 
breed  woman  and  her  daughters  going  from  her  home  to 
church.  Her  house  would  be  dear  at  a  hundred  dollars. 
The  furniture  within  is  not  worth  twenty-five,  but  each 
of  the  women  will  gleam  and  sparkle  in  brilliant  silks 
and  have  at  least  a  thousand  dollars'  worth  of  jewelry 
and  gems  apiece.  Another  sight  is  the  making  of  sina- 
may  or  fine  hemp  cloth  by  the  natives.  They  work  in 
the  open  air  under  a  shed,  or  in  the  shade  of  a  tree,  and 
in  rainy  weather  in  their  own  homes.  They  are  slow, 
methodical,  their  weaving  implements  being  of  the  most 
primitive  sort.  Somehow  or  other,  though,  they  turn 


94  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

out  very  nice  fabrics,  and  make  enough  money  even  at 
the  low  rate  paid  for  wages  in  that  part  of  the  world, 
they  manage  to  live  in  more  than  comfort.  From  Iloilo 
small  steamers  communicate  with  other  important  points 
in  that  part  of  the  Archipelago.  They  are  subsidized  by 
the  government,  which  uses  them  to  transport  its  soldiers 
whenever  the  natives  are  refractory  and  need  a  little 
blood-letting.  The  lines  run  to  the  city  of  Antique,  in 
the  province  of  Antique;  to  the  city  of  Conception  in  the 
province  of  that  name,  and  to  ports  on  Negros  Island. 

Not  far  from  Iloilo  are  the  cities  of  Jaro  and  Molo. 
They  are  situated  upon  much  higher  ground,  being  in 
the  hill  country  rather  than  the  marsh,  and  are  charming 
residential  settlements.  Jaro  is  the  cathedral  city  of  the 
district,  and  has  in  it  quite  a  neat,  though  small  and  well- 
proportioned  cathedral.  In  Molo  is  a  very  handsome 
church  whose  altars  are  famously  rich  in  gold,  silver  and 
jewels.  Both  of  these  cities  have  wide  thoroughfares,  a 
wilderness  of  gardens,  well-built  schools,  and  many  at- 
tractive villas. 

There  are  very  few  Spaniards  in  either  city,  the  upper 
classes  consisting  of  wealthy  Chinese,  natives  and 
mestizos.  Here  also  are  the  summer  retreats  of  many  of 
the  Iloilo  merchants.  There  is  fine  shooting  in  the  neigh- 
borhood, and  the  markets  are  well  stocked  with  vege- 
tables, fruits,  poultry,  meats,  and  game.  Living  is  a 
trifle  dearer  than  in  Manila,  while  rents  are  cheaper. 
The  bishop  has  a  small  palace  at  Jaro,  and  the  govern- 
ment officials  occupy  well-constructed  edifices  erected 
especially  for  them.  In  the  central  districts  are  many 
natives  in  a  still  savage  state,  and  these  give  trouble  to 
the  government  whenever  the  tax  farmers  put  in  an  ap- 
pearance. They  receive  nothing  from  the  authorities, 
and  they  cannot  understand  why  they  should  be  called 


^r   - 

* 


CO 


§ 


3  8 


u    -| 

2  f 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  96 

upon  to  give  up  what  little  property  they  possess.  Many 
of  them  are  bitterly  opposed  to  the  church  on  account  of 
the  abuse  of  the  civil  and  religious  rights  which  the  friars 
possess.  As  late  as  May,  1898,  there  was  an  uprising  in 
one  of  the  districts,  and  the  troops  promptly  sent  to  the 
scene  of  trouble  slaughtered  some  eight  or  nine  hundred 
nativei. 


96  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

CEBU. 

CEBU  is  the  last  and  smallest  of  the  three  treaty  ports. 
It  is  the  capital  of  the  island  of  the  same  name,  and  is  a 
close  rival  to  Iloilo  in  commercial  importance.  It  lies 
southeast  of  Iloilo  on  the  other  side  of  the  Island  of 
Negros.  A  line  of  steamers  make  the  run  from  Iloilo  to 
Cebu  in  about  twenty  hours,  while  a  larger  line  runs  from 
Manila  to  Cebu  direct.  The  island  is  long  and  narrow, 
being  in  dimension  about  one  hundred  miles  in  length 
and  about  fifty  at  its  greatest  width.  It  has  a  population 
of  about  six  hundred  thousand,  and  carries  on  a  com- 
merce in  sugar,  hemp,  sapanwood,  and  other  products. 
Its  output  of  sugar  is  about  twenty  thousand  tons  a  year. 
Years  ago  Cebu  was  the  administrative  center  or  capital 
not  only  of  the  island  itself,  but  of  all  of  the  Visaya 
group.  But  the  governmental  seat  was  removed  to 
Manila  in  1849,  pursuant  to  the  system  of  centralization 
which  Spain  has  followed  in  her  government  of  the  archi- 
pelago. The  city  is  situated  upon  an  arm  of  the  sea  like 
Iloilo,  made  by  an  island  lying  to  the  southeast  of  Cebu. 
The  harbor  is  excellent,  and  the  anchorage  safe.  The 
city  is  well  built,  with  wide  thoroughfares,  and  possesses 
many  houses  above  the  ordinary.  At  one  time,  when  it 
was  the  seat  of  administration,  it  is  said  to  have  been  a 
very  lively  place.  To-day  this  is  all  changed,  and  its 
only  characteristic  is  commercial  activity,  and  none  too 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  97 

much  of  that.  The  old  government  buildings  are  falling 
into  decay,  the  convent  shows  the  ravages  of  time,  and 
many  of  the  streets  are  mossy  and  even  grassy. 

It  is  the  metropolis  of  the  district,  and  from  it  are 
shipped  not  only  the  sugar  and  hemp  grown  there,  but 
also  the  hemp  and  other  produce  of  the  islands  of  Leyte, 
Mindanao,  Camiguin,  and  Bohol.  On  the  island  are 
large  deposits  of  coal,  sulphur,  and  many  other  minerals; 
but  the  government  has  never  utilized  these  resources 
with  the  one  exception  of  the  coal.  Neither  has  it  per- 
mitted any  one  else  to  take  advantage  of  an  opportunity 
which  might  pour  wealth  into  the  territory.  Beside  the 
amount  of  sugar  exported,  Cebu  sends  away  about  fifteen 
thousand  tons  of  hemp  every  year.  The  trade  of  the 
place  has  passed  almost  entirely  into  the  hands  of  the 
Chinese  and  half-breeds,  the  extortions  of  the  officials 
having  driven  out  nearly  all  foreigners. 

The  foreign  community  in  Cebu  consists  of  agencies  of 
two  English,  one  German,  and  three  Spanish  houses.  It 
is  so  small  that  the  managing  clerk  of  one  of  the  English 
houses  is  consul  for  Great  Britain,  the  United  States, 
Italy  and  Hawaii.  The  two  main  houses  represent  all 
the  insurance  companies  and  banks  as  well.  The  odd- 
est thing  about  Cebu  is  the  coal;  the  coal  beds  appear 
to  have  been  acted  upon  by  a  volcano  in  some  past  age, 
which  forced  fumes  of  sulphur  through  all  the  strata  de- 
positing solid  particles  in  irregular  masses.  Some  of  the 
coal  is  quite  free  from  sulphur,  but  other  portions  are 
yellow  from  the  quantity  forced  into  them.  This  coal  is 
very  handsome  to  look  at,  with  mottlings  of  black  and 
yellow.  It  is,  however,  very  dangerous.  Left  exposed 
to  the  air  for  some  time  it  takes  fire  spontaneously. 
When  ignited,  the  amount  of  sulphur  is  so  large  that  the 
fumes  and  smoke  are  filled  with  acid,  rendering  it  dan- 


{>§  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES* 

gerous  if  not  deadly  to  all  animal  life  in  the  immediate1 
neighborhood.  A  German  chemist  tried  at  one  time  to 
obtain  a  concession  for  making  sulphur  from  these  beds. 
His  estimates  showed  that  he  could  produce  it  more 
cheaply  than  the  brimstone  mines  in  Sicily.  These  esti- 
mates were  the  ruin  of  his  project.  They  so  inflamed  the 
avarice  of  the  politicians  that  the  unhappy  chemist  found 
that  the  concession  would  cost  him  all  of  the  profits  of 
the  establishment  for  the  first  ten  years.  The  surround- 
ings of  Cebu  are  very  quaint.  In  front  is  the  historic 
island  of  Magtan,  where  Magellan,  the  great  navigator, 
was  killed,  and  back  of  it  are  ranges  of  high  hills,  some 
with  rolling  outlines  and  others  with  comparatively  sharp 
peaks  and  crags.  There  are  many  good  roads,  and  a  few 
marshes  as  well.  The  soil  is  porous,  allowing  thorough 
natural  drainage,  and  the  atmosphere  is  remarkably  dry 
and  pure  for  the  tropics.  There  are  many  fine  forests 
upon  the  island  and  a  wonderful  display  of  cacti.  The 
latter  are  utilized  by  Spaniards  and  natives  for  hedges 
and  fences,  and  when  well  grown  make  a  most  invulner- 
able wall.  In  the  city  is  a  cathedral,  a  rather  fine-look- 
ing church,  a  Paulist  and  a  Jesuit  chapel,  and  the  Church 
of  the  Holy  Child  of  Cebu.  Of  this  personage  the  fol- 
lowing is  the  story. 

On  July  28,  1565,  an  image  of  the  Holy  Child,  was 
found  on  the  shore  by  a  soldier  who  was  sick  and  ailing, 
and  who  had  gone  walking  along  the  beach  in  the  hope 
that  a  little  fresh  air  and  exercise  would  do  him  good. 
He  had  no  more  touched  the  image  than  he  felt  better, 
and  by  the  time  he  returned  to  the  camp  his  strength 
had  been  restored,  and  the  next  morning  he  was  in  a 
beter  condition  than  he  had  ever  been  before.  The  news 
of  the  miracle  spread  through  the  camp,  and  the  friars 
immediately  held  special  services  in  commemoration  of 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  99 

the  event.     The  image  was  given  to  them  and  a  church 
built  to  commemorate  the  fact. 

In  the  sacred  inclosure,  not  far  from  the  altar,  the 
image  was  placed  in  the  special  niche  of  honor.  In  1627 
the  church  was  burned  down,  but  when  the  soldiers  and 
priests  went  through  the  ashes  in  order  to  save  relics  and 
such  melted  metal  as  they  could  find,  lo,  in  the  middle 
of  the  debris  entirely  uninjured  was  the  image.  It  was 
then  placed  in  another  church  which  was  ruined  by  both 
earthquake  and  typhoon  without  any  damage  to  this 
wonderful  statuette.  Another  church  was  built  for  the 
Holy  Child  alone,  and  there  it  has  remained  ever  since. 
Fires  have  started  in  the  building  and  have  gone  out  of 
their  own  accord;  typhoons  have  torn  down  the  houses 
on  either  side,  but  have  spared  the  sacred  edifice,  and 
even  the  earthquake  has  never  disturbed  the  vigils  of  the 
little  figure.  To  prevent  theft  and  the  transfer  of  its 
virtues  to  other  localities,  the  saint  is  kept  in  a  strong 
room  under  many  a  bolt  and  bar,  lock  and  key.  It  is 
made  of  wood,  a  little  over  a  foot  high,  and  is  either 
ebony  or  else  is  so  dark  with  time  as  to  pass  for  that 
wood.  The  features  are  Mongolian,  and  to  a  skeptical 
eye  the  figure  looks  like  a  clumsy  carving  out  of  some 
Philippine  wood  by  an  ignorant  soldier  or  lazy  native. 
It  is  highly  venerated  and  is  completely  covered  with 
little  pieces  of  jewelry  which  have  been  presented  by 
grateful  patrons  who  have  been  cured  through  the  saint's 
mediation.  It  is  now  worshiped  in  the  Philippines  with 
great  solemnity,  and  on  all  public  occasions  it  enjoys  all 
the  honors  accorded  to  a  field  marshal  of  the  first  rank. 
Its  feast  day  is  the  20th  of  January,  when  the  church  is 
crowded  with  worshipers  from  Cebu  and  from  the  outly- 
ing islands,  even  as  far  as  Luzon  itself.  In  the  same 
room  are  two  immense  tin  boxes  (made  of  that  metal  to 


100  MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

keep  out  insects)  which  are  filled  with  the  arms,  legs,  and 
heads  of  saints,  with  their  robes  all  ready  for  adjustment 
and  use  on  feast  days.  On  such  dajrs  these  are  setup  on 
concealed  framework,  placed  in  vehicles,  and  drawn  or 
driven  around  the  city. 

In  Cebu  is  a  small  colony  of  Catholic  Chinese.  They 
have  a  patron  saint,  St.  Nicholas,  who  is  not  the  legen- 
dary hero  of  our  Christmas,  and  to  him  a  church  was 
dedicated  which  is  still  flourishing  to-day.  Up  to  the 
eighteenth  century  the  many  Chinese  in  Cebu  remained 
wedded  to  their  heathen  idols.  They  resisted  all  efforts 
at  christianization,  and  proved  superior  to  the  tortures  of 
the  inquisition.  A  good  priest  who  was  sorely  exercised 
over  their  spiritual  darkness,  prayed  so  vehemently  to 
St.  Nicholas  that  the  latter  took  pity  upon  him  and  said 
that  his  prayers  should  be  answered.  The  most  influen- 
tial man  among  the  Chinese  merchants  in  Cebu  at  the 
time  was  a  Cantonese  named  Wong — though  some  legends 
say  that  he  was  an  Amoy  merchant  named  Ong.  He 
worshiped  Buddha  and  Confucius  and  his  ancestors, 
but  in  other  respects  was  a  good  citizen  and  a  fine  man. 
One  night,  after  he  had  received  a  large  payment  for 
goods,  Wong,  or  Ong,  heard  a  noise  in  his  counting- 
room,  and  looking  up  saw  that  he  was  beset  by  five  armed 
robbers.  They  had  smeared  blood  upon  their  foreheads, 
meaning  thereby  that  they  neither  asked  nor  gave  quar- 
ter, and  each  had  in  his  sinewy  right  hand  a  wicked- 
looking  creese.  Wong  turned  to  seize  a  sword  which  he 
kept  for  such  guests,  but  to  his  horror  found  that  it  had 
been  taken  out  of  the  scabbard,  and  that  he  was  defense- 
less. As  the  robbers  advanced  toward  him  he  heard 
strange  sweet  music,  and  through  the  wall  came  St. 
Nicholas  with  his  hands  outstretched.  "lean  save  thee, 
Wong/'  said  the  saint,  "if  thou  will  believe  in  the  true 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  101 

God,  and  not  in  thy  vain  idols."  "Wong  being  a  sensi- 
ble busines  man  accepted  the  proposition  immediately. 
The  saint  waved  his  hand  and  the  robbers  fell  into  a 
swoon  during  which  Wong,  with  characteristic  Chinese 
thoughtfulness,  seized  the  knife  of  one  and  cut  the 
throats  of  all.  The  next  day  he  summoned  his  family, 
neighbors,  and  friends,  and  told  them  of  the  providential 
escape,  and  from  that  time  on  he  and  his  were  worthy 
sons  of  the  church. 

A  Spanish  critic  says  that  as  a  Chinaman  cannot  con- 
tract a  valid  marriage  in  the  Philippines,  nor  perform 
many  other  important  acts  unless  he  is  a  Catholic  in  good 
standing,  business  enterprise  may  have  had  as  much  to 
do  with  the  conversion  as  good  St.  Nicholas  himself. 


102  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

SULU CITY,  ISLAND  AND  SULTANATE. 

UPON  Spanish  rule  in  the  far  East  has  always  fallen 
the  shadow  of  Islam.  The  same  fierce  and  fanatical  force 
in  that  part  of  the  world  as  in  every  land  where  the  cres- 
cent has  ever  held  sway.  In  the  lottery  of  nations  both 
Christianity  and  Mohammedanism  unknowingly  com- 
peted for  the  Philippines.  The  cathedral  and  the  con- 
vent won  three-fourths,  and  the  mosque  and  the  minaret 
the  remainder.  From  a  very  early  period  there  had  been 
a  movement  of  population  from  Borneo,  Java  and  Suma- 
tra, northward  and  eastward  into  the  Philippines.  Each 
wave  which  came  into  the  archipelago  met  with  resist- 
ance from  those  already  settled  there.  Weak  or  small 
invading  parties  were  defeated,  and  defeat  in  those  years 
meant  death  to  the  vanquished,  while  the  stronger  and 
larger  parties  defeated  the  inhabitants,  and  slew,  captured 
or  disbursed  them. 

The  traveler  in  going  through  the  archipelago,  notices 
that  the  people  in  the  southern  islands  are  larger, 
stronger,  and  less  docile  and  servile  than  those  of  the 
north.  The  most  independent  of  all  the  tribes  or  races 
are  those  who  inhabit  the  large  island  of  Mindanao  and 
the  smaller  ones  of  Basilan  Sulu,  or  Jolo,  Tapul,  Tawi 
Tawi,  and  the  numerous  smaller  pieces  of  land  which 
compose  the  Sulu  Sultanate  or  Archipelago. 

About  the  time  that  Magellan,  then  in  the  employ  of 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES  103 

Spain  discovered  the  Carolines  and  the  Philippines,  the 
people  of  Borneo  were  suffering  or  enjoying  internecine 
war  of  the  bloodiest  sort,  a  practical  consequence  was  an 
extensive  exodus  of  weaker  tribes  northward  to  Balabac 
and  Palauan,  and  eastward  to  the  Sulu  islands  and  Min- 
danao. The  troubles  in  Borneo  culminated  in  a  tremen- 
dous war  between  two  Borneo  sultans,  who  were  brothers, 
and  who  fought  with  the  frenzy  that  only  brothers  can. 
The  unsuccessful  sovereign  whose  name  was  Paguian 
Tindig,  fled  with  his  followers  to  Sulu  and  Basilan. 
Here  the  host  settled  and  began  a  Mohammedan  civiliza- 
tion, which  by  degrees  became  a  strong  power  in  that 
part  of  the  world.  A  cousin  of  the  sultan  settled  on 
Basilan,  and  soon  became  its  sole  ruler. 

He  was  loyal  to  the  sultan  at  first,  but  after  a  time  he 
married  the  Princess  Goan,  daughter  of  the  Mohammedan 
King  of  Mindanao.  Spurred  on  by  ambition  he  plotted 
against  his  cousin  the  sultan,  and  attacked  him  in  Sulu. 
Though  assisted  by  his  father-in-law's  soldiers  and 
sailors  he  was  unsuccessful,  and  after  many  fights  on 
land  and  at  sea  he  retired  to  his  possessions  in  Basilan. 
The  sultan  went  to  Manila  and  pledged  his  vassalage  to 
the  Spanish,  if  in  return  they  would  help  him  subjugate 
his  rebellious  cousin.  This  the  Spanish  gladly  agreed  to 
do,  and  began  to  equip  a  squadron  to  carry  out  the  agree- 
ment. It  was  not  ready  in  a  few  days  as  had  been 
promised,  in  fact,  it  was  several  months  before  the  fleet 
got  under  way  at  Manila  and  sailed  southward.  In  the 
meantime,  Tindig,  tired  of  waiting,  attacked  the  rebels 
and  routed  them  completely.  It  was  an  unhappy  victory 
because  the  brave  monarch  himself  fell,  covered  with 
wounds,  as  the  day  was  won.  The  Spaniards  arrived  in 
due  season  at  Sulu  or  Jolo,  as  they  called  it,  and  not 
finding  the  sultan  turned  and  went  back  to  Manila. 


104  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

They  were  careful  to  preserve  the  treaty,  and  upon  this 
lies  the  first  claim  of  sovereignty  over  the  Sulu  Sultanate. 

In  the  meantime,  Adas'aolan,  who  appears  to  have  been 
a  man  of  remarkable  ability,  developed  his  own  beautiful 
territory;  Basilan  made  alliances  with  the  monarchs  of 
Mindanao  and  with  the  chief  of  northern  Borneo,  and 
compelled  all  his  subjects  and  tributaries  to  adopt  the 
Koran  at  the  point  of  the  sword.  He  built  the  first  mosque 
in  the  city  of  Jolo,  and  received  from  far  off  Turkey 
honors  and  titles  from  the  Sheikh  Al  Uslam,  the  head  of 
the  Mohammedan  church,  and  from  the  Sublime  Porte  in 
recognition  of  his  services  to  the  faith.  Thus  his  claim 
to  sovereignty,  joined  with  his  descent  and  his  posses- 
sion of  the  territory,  undoubtedly  gave  him  a  better 
claim  to  those  lands  than  the  treaty  of  Manila  between 
Tindig  and  the  Spaniards. 

In  1595  the  Spaniards  sent  an  expedition  to  take  pos- 
session of  their  property,  and  incidentally  to  spread 
Christianity  in  heathen  communities.  The  expedition 
was  a  complete  failure.  Nearly  all  the  officers  were 
killed,  half  the  men  incapacitated  by  disease  and  wounds, 
and  the  warship  so  battered  that  it  only  could  get  as  far 
as  Cebu  on  its  return.  One  effect  of  this  war  was  to  dis- 
abuse the  Sulu  mind  of  the  idea  that  the  Spaniards  were 
all  powerful  at  sea.  From  this  time  on  piracy  prevailed 
in  the  waters  of  the  Archipelago,  and  was  never  sup- 
pressed until  English  men-of-war  propelled  by  steam,  put 
an  end  to  the  evil  in  the  present  century.  Of  the  pirates 
the  Sulus  were  the  most  daring  and  skillful.  They  fre- 
quently sailed  past  the  walls  of  the  ciiy  of  Manila,  and 
captured  trading  vessels  outside  the  Peninsula  of  Cavite. 
At  one  time  the  Sulu  pirates  had  Bohol,  Cebu,  Negros, 
Leyte,  and  even  a  part  of  Panay  island  under  tribute. 
Where  communities  refused  to  pay  tribute  they  were  at- 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  105 

tacked  by  well-armed  pirate  chiefs,  their  men  slain,  their 
houses  burned,  their  property  looted,  and  their  wives  and 
daughters  taken  as  slaves  away  to  the  South.  This  piti- 
able condition  of  affairs  continued  for  more  than  two 
hundred  and  fifty  years. 

The  Madrid  government  did  the  best  it  could  under 
the  circumstances.  It  set  aside  large  amounts  of  money 
for  fighting  craft,  forts,  weapons,  and  ammunition,  and 
directed  the  Philippine  officials  to  exterminate  the  pirat- 
ical communities.  But  the  money  was  diverted  into 
other  channels  and  went  to  enrich  the  officer  holders  and 
politicians.  Hundreds  of  thousands  of  inoffensive 
natives,  and  scores  of  Spaniards  were  slaughtered  almost 
with  impunity,  while  the  governors  wrote  home  accounts 
of  imaginary  victories,  and  artful  descriptions  of  peace- 
ful lands  and  untroubled  waters.  At  the  end  of  their 
term  they  came  back  rich  for  life. 

There  are  persons  alive  to-day  in  Manila  and  Cebu, 
Iloilo,  and  Antique  who  have  seen  the  interior  of  the 
pirate  prisons  in  the  Sulu  islands. 

A  critic  calls  attention  to  the  fact  that  during  this  long 
periods  when  the  Spanish  government  was  denouncing 
slavery  in  the  East  Indies  and  trying  to  suppress  the 
evil,  it  was  the  leading  nation  in  the  African  slave  trade 
in  the  West  Indies,  and  was  doing  its  best  to  develop 
and  profit  by  the  traffic.  During  this  long  period  there 
was  constant  war  between*  Spain  and  Sulu.  The  Span- 
iards made  a  settlement  at  Zamboanga,  on  the  extreme 
southeast  point  of  Mindanao.  Here  they  built  a  walled 
city,  constructed  strong  forts,  and  made  it  a  naval  sta- 
tion and  arsenal  second  only  to  Cavite.  It  is  opposite  to 
Basilan,  and  afforded  a  fine  base  of  operations.  But  so 
careless  and  neglectful  of  the  simplest  precautions  were 
the  authorities,  that  the  place  soon  came  to  be  known  as 


106  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

the  Sepulcher  of  Spain.  There  were  no  sewers,  and  the 
natural  drainage  was  prevented  by  the  heavy  walls  and 
fortifications  of  the  place.  The  heat  and  moisture  made 
decay  swift  and  universal,  and  developed  malarial  diseases 
whose  deadliness  astonished  even  the  Spaniards.  Of  one 
garrison  of  a  thousand  men  eight  hundred  and  fifty  died 
in  a  single  year,  while  in  the  annual  estimates  made  in 
Manila  a  somber  item  was  the  provision  for  disease  and 
death  at  the  southern  naval  station.  This  long  war  had 
many  interesting  and  even  heroic  features.  To  the  Span- 
iards it  was  a  solemn  religious  conflict  the  continuation, 
as  it  were,  of  the  old  wars  against  the  Moors.  Soldiers 
went  into  it  after  mass,  prayer,  and  hymns;  priests  and 
friars  armed  themselves  and  fought  side  by  side  with  the 
soldiers;  private  citizens  carried  away  by  religious 
enthusiasm  gave  up  their  business  in  Manila  and  other 
cities,  bade  farewell  to  their  friends  and  relatives  and 
consecrated  themselves  to  God,  that  is  to  say,  joined  the 
Spanish  army.  It  is  pitiful  to  look  back  and  see  that 
frightful  and  unnecessary  waste  of  human  life.  For  one 
Spaniard  killed  by  the  pirates  twenty  perished  from  camp 
diseases,  and  of  the  twenty,  nineteen  were  occassioned  by 
the  neglect,  dishonesty,  and  corruption  of  the  officials. 

All  this  time  the  various  monarchs  of  Mindanao  pre- 
served a  skillful  neutrality,  siding,  whenever  they  did 
take  action,  with  Sulu  and  against  Spain.  On  several 
occasions  the  Spaniards  endeavored  to  obtain  control  of 
the  Sulu  lands  by  diplomacy  instead  of  war.  In  1750 
they  made  friends  with  the  sultan  Mahamad,  who  had 
been  deposed  by  his  brother.  The  monarch  was  first 
obliged  to  embrace  Christianity  and  then  to  swear  alle- 
giance to  Spain  before  the  Spaniards  would  agree  to 
assist  him.  Just  as  the  governor-general  was  beginning 
to  congratulate  himself  upon  bis  diplomatic  success  be 


MANILA  AND  THE  PltlUPPlttES. 

intercepted  a  letter,  written  by  the  royal  convert,  -which 
showed  that  he  was  equally  diplomatic  and  intended  to 
utilize  the  Spanish  power  and  to  give  nothing  in  return. 
The  sultan  and  all  his  retinue  were  arrested  and  cast  into 
prison.  The  governor-general  then  determined  to  exter- 
minate all  the  Mohammedans  in  the  archipelago,  destroy 
their  crops,  burn  their  houses,  and  desolate  their  tilled 
land.  As  some  of  the  members  of  the  cabinet  thought 
the  proposal  too  inhuman,  the  governor-general  wrote  a 
proclamation  jutifying  his  course.  A  large  expedition 
with  nineteen  hundred  soldiers  was  sent  from  Manila 
which  attacked  Jolo.  Here  the  Spaniards  claimed  a 
great  victory,  but  as  they  left  immediately  afterward  with- 
out having  accomplished  it,  their  claim  maj'be  doubted. 
They  next  attacked  the  island  of  Tawi  Tawi,  where  every 
man  who  landed  from  the  fleet  was  slain.  The  head  of 
the  expedition  was  so  discouraged  that  he  left  the  Sulu 
islands  and  sailed  back  to  Zamboanga. 

The  Sulus  now  returned  the  compliment,  and  sending 
out  a  large  fleet  of  war  craft  ravaged  every  coast  which 
was  in  Spanish  possession.  To  increase  the  troubles  the 
sultan  of  Mindanao  made  an  alliance  with  his  Sulu  col- 
league, and  sent  out  a  vast  flotilla  manned  with  experi- 
enced warriors  and  mariners.  This  war  kept  up  for  four 
years,  and  the  Spaniards  were  put  to  great  straits. 

In  1755  the  Spaniards  released  the  imprisoned  sultan, 
but  would  not  allow  him  to  go  outside  of  Manila.  In 
1763  the  British,  who  were  then  at  war  with  the  Span- 
iards, took  up  the  sultan's  side,  and  conveyed  him  in  a 
man  of  war  to  Sulu,  where  they  replaced  him  on  the 
throne.  The  moment  he  could  gather  a  sufficient  force 
he  attacked  the  Spaniards  with  great  fury  at  many  points 
in  Mindanao  and  Negros.  In  1770  both  sides  grew 
tired  of  perpetual  conflict,  and  from  that  period  until 


108  .  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

1851  there  was  an  armed  peace  between  Sulu  and  Spain. 
Pirates  occasionally  ravaged  Spanish  cities,  and  Spanish 
gunboats  destroyed  Sulu  craft,  but  nothing  amounting  to 
war  occurred.  In  1851  there  were  more  piratical  outrages 
than  usual,  and  the  governor-general  undertook  to  punish 
the  sultan.  He  made  careful  preparations,  and  with  a 
large  and  well  armed  expedition  attacked  and  captured 
the  capital,  Jolo.  The  sultan  fled  and  established  a  new 
capital  at  May  bun,  on  the  southern  side  of  the  island,  in  a 
position  well  adapted  for  offense  and  defense.  The  gov- 
ernor-general was  satisfied  with  his  first  success  and 
sailed  back  to  Manila,  foolishly  leaving  a  small  garrison 
to  overawe  the  islanders.  The  latter  were  of  stern  stuff, 
began  guerrilla  warfare  upon  the  garrison  the  moment 
the  ships  were  in  the  offing,  and  in  a  short  time  killed 
off  every  Spaniard. 

By  degrees  the  sultan  grew  bolder,  and  committed 
ravages  throughout  the  archipelago  from  Basilan  and 
Mindanao.  In  1876,  another  expedition  was  sent, 
headed  by  Yice-Admiral  Malcampo.  It  destroyed  several 
forts,  and  kill  many  natives,  but  it  lost  more  men  than 
it  destroyed.  Nevertheless  it  brought  about  a  temporary 
peace.  The  sultan  admitted  the  sovereignty  of  Spain 
over  the  Sulu  domain.  To  make  it  more  binding, 
Madrid  induced  Great  Britain  and  Germany  to  sign  a 
protocol  recognizing  the  treaty,  and  more  specifically  the 
claim  of  Spain  to  the  Tawi  Tawi,  Tapul  and  Panguitarang 
group  of  islands.  In  1880  a  British  company  colo- 
nized a  large  tract  of  land  in  Borneo,  recognizing  the 
suzerainty  of  the  sultan  of  Sulu.  Spain  made  a  vigorous 
protest,  but  the  British  government  decided  in  favor  of 
the  sultan.  After  some  negotiations  Spain  gave  up  all 
claim  to  lands  in  Borneo  belonging  to  the  Sulu  Sultan- 
ate. In  1887  insurrection  broke  out  in  the  islands, 


MANILA  ANt>  THE  PHILIPPINES.  109 

and  in  Mindanao  itself.  The  Spanish  government  sent 
its  fleet  in  post  haste  to  the  scene  of  disorder,  and  also 
forwarded  reinforcements  for  the  various  garrisons. 
There  was  much  fighting,  and  considerable  slaughter  of 
the  natives  through  the  modern  rifles  and  rifled  cannon 
of  the  Spanish  forces.  The  Spaniards  returned  to 
Manila,  and  in  March  of  that  year  held  a  Grand  Te 
Deum.  Another  insurrection  broke  out,  and  this  was  in 
turn  put  down.  In  1888  there  was  comparative  peace 
throughout  the  Sulu  Archipelago.  Since  that  time  the 
Spaniards  have  been  in  legal  possession  of  the  country. 
They  have  garrisons  at  Tawi  Tawi,  Siassi,  Bangao,  at 
Jolo,  at  Maybun,  Basilan,  Zamboanga,  and  Cotta  Bato, 
Ta  Toan,  and  Cagayan. 

Outside  of  the  posts  they  have  no  authority  nor  power 
whatever.  The  sultan  rules  the  same  as  ever,  and  the 
native,  and  not  the  Spanish  laws  are  observed.  These 
laws  are  very  odd,  seeming  to  be  a  survival  of  the  ancient 
Malay  kingdoms.  The  language  of  these  Sulus  is  a 
complete  mystery  to  scholars.  Instead  of  being  a  Malay 
speech,  pure,  or  impure,  it  appears  to  be  a  degenerate 
Sanscrit  mixed  with  Arabic.  When  or  how  they  came 
under  the  control  of  the  early  Hindus  is  impossible  to 
discover.  That  it  must  have  been  a  long  time  ago  is 
evident  from  the  fact  that  they  employ  many  idioms 
which  were  going  out  of  use  in  the  time  of  Buddha. 
There  is  no  mention  in  Indian  history  of  these  far-off 
lands,  neither,  so  far  as  is  known,  did  any  considerable 
Brahmin  community  ever  adopt  Islam.  No  matter  how 
viewed,  the  subject  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  puzzles 
which  has  yet  been  found  in  the  far  East. 

The  Sulus  are  a  dark-colored,  muscular  race,  loving 
warfare,  piracy,  and  dangerous  sports.  The.v  make  in- 
trepid ^soldiers,  and  are  more  feared  by  t  he  Spaniards 


116  MANILA  AND  THfe  PHILIPPINES. 

than  any  other  Eastern  type.  One  of  their  peculiarities 
makes  them  a  constant  dread  to  their  conquerors.  This 
consists  of  a  man  joining  a  religious  society,  and  bind- 
ing himself  by  an  oath  to  reach  paradise  immediately 
by  killing  as  many  Christians  as  he  can  before  he  him- 
self is  killed.  The  society  has  a  name,  but  it  is  un- 
known to  the  Spaniards.  They  refer  to  the  members  as 
the  Juramentados,  or  those  who  are  oath-bound.  The 
society,  or  societies,  are  directed  by  priests  called  Pan- 
ditas,  whose  meaning  can  be  recognized  by  its  resem- 
blance to  pundita.  These  drill  the  members,  and  put 
them  through  a  regular  course  of  training.  They  are 
made  to  exercise,  fight  with  blunted  weapons  run,  jump, 
clirnb,  swim,  and  dive,  and  when  tired  they  are  told  of 
the  beauties  of  Mohammed's  paradise,  of  the  hour  is,  the 
fruits,  and  the  joys.  When  a  member  has  reached  a 
stage  which  borders  upon  frenzy  he  is  then  sent  upon 
his  mission.  He  usually  goes  naked  or  with  a  breech 
cloth  in  whose  folds  he  carries  one  or  two  short  creeses, 
sharp  as  a  needle,  and  keen  as  a  razor.  The  flutings  on 
the  blade  are  often  poisoned  by  immersion  in  decaying 
animal  blood.  He  enters  the  camp,  ship, town,  or  house, 
to  which  he  is  directed,  and  the  moment  he  approaches 
the  first  Christian  his  deadly  work  begins.  The  knife  is 
drawn,  the  breech  cloth  cast  away,  and  with  a  spring 
like  a  tiger,  he  is  upon  his  victim.  In  his  delirium  he 
seems  to  have  the  strength  of  ten  men.  He  is  never 
overpowered,  and  he  never  stops  his  murderous  career 
until  he  is  killed,  or  incapacitated  by  a  serious  wound. 

On  Corpus  Christi  day,  in  1886,  at  Cotto  Bato,  four 
Juramentados  sprang  from  a  shed  into  a  crowd  of  Chris- 
ians  who  were  watching  the  procession,  and  before 
they  were  killed  by  the  soldiers,  assassinated  or  wounded 
over  thirty  persons.  At  Jolo,  in  1876,  one  of  these 


bo 


8s 

fl  o 


•4  8 

&  & 

fe 

o  § 

.j  i2 

W  _^ 


O 


w 


o 

I 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  11  1 

fanatics  armed  with  a  creese  and  a  javelin,  attacked  a 
company  of  soldiers  as  they  marched  from  the  beach  to 
the  garrison,  killing  two,  fatally  wounding  three,  and 
seriously  wounding  four  of  the  force. 

At  the  same  place  a  few  weeks  afterward,  a  similar 
sudden  attack  was  made  by  three  Juramentados,  who 
killed  five  and  wounded  sixteen  before  they  could  be 
bayoneted  by  the  troops. 

It  is  a  very  nice  question  how  to  govern  people  of  this 
class.  Across  the  strait  at  San  Daken  in  Borneo,  and 
at  Brunei,  there  are  Mohammedans  of  the  same  race  as 
the  Sulus,  but  thus  far,  they  have  never  given  any 
trouble  to  the  British.  The  authorities  leave  them  alone 
in  their  religious  views,  and  the  missionaries  are  advised 
to  use  all  possible  tact  in  the  evangelical  dealings. 
Whether  the  Islamites  of  Sulu  would  behave  equally  well 
if  treated  with  similar  consideration  is  a  debatable  ques- 
tion. One  thing  is  certain,  and  that  is  that  all  forcible 
attempts  to  infringe  upon  their  religious  rites  will  be 
resisted  unto  death.  The  Spaniards  have  learned  wis- 
dom by  experience,  and  of  late  years  have  adopted  the 
practice  of  extermination  whenever  called  upon  to  fur- 
nish either  religious  or  political  outbreaks.  From  a 
purely  political  point  of  view,  there  are  only  two  ways 
of  governing  these  people.  One  is  the  system  adopted 
by  England,  in  the  Bombay  presidency,  and  by  Hongs 
in  Java  of  leaving  the  natives  in  full  liberty  to  practice 
all  customs  and  religious  observances  which  do  not  con- 
flict with  life  or  human  safety,  and  the  other  is  the  Span- 
ish system  of  exterminating  all  who  do  not  agree  with 
you. 

The  Sulu  Archipelago  in  Spanish  political  geography 
begins  on  the  southwest  side  of  Basilan  island,  and  runs 
eouthwestwardly  to  the  northeastern  coast  of  Borneo.  It 


112  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

is  divided  into  the  following  groups :  Sulu,  Tapul,  Tawi 
Tawi,  and  Panguiturang.  The  largest  island  is  Sulu, 
the  next  is  Tawi  Tawi,  the  third  is  Panguitarang,  the 
fourth  is  Siassi.  Then  come  many  small  islands  such  as 
Simonor,  Bilatan,  Mantabuan,  Manubol,  Lapac,  Lugus, 
Pata  Simisa,  Cap,  Lapran,  Basang,  Simaluc,  Sigboy, 
Bubuan,  and  many  still  smaller.  The  last  Spanish  report 
gives  a  hundred  and  fifty  islands,  of  which  ninety-five 
are  inhabited  and  several  hundred  islets  or  rocks.  The 
population  is  estimated  at  a  hundred  and  twenty  thou- 
sand, but  may  be  twice  as  much.  As  a  matt  r  of  Eng- 
lish law  the  sultan  exercises  sovereignty  of  a  qualified 
sort  over  several  Borneo  sultans  and  according  to  Span- 
ish law  he  exercises  some  feudal  authority  over  the  chiefs 
of  Palauan,  Balabac,  the  Sultanate  of  Buhaten  in  Min- 
danao, and  over  several  small  tribes  on  that  island  and  on 
the  island  of  Basilan. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

SOME    HISTORICAL    NOTES. 

OWING,  doubtless,  to  the  unimportant  part  they  have 
played  in  the  progress  of  modern  civilization  the  Philip- 
pines have  been  neglected  by  historians  and  scientists 
alike.  The  literature  on  the  subject  is  comparatively 
small.  Even  the  leading  works  are  manifestly  incom- 
plete. The  Spanish  accounts  are  carelessly  written,  and 
the  figures  a  mass  of  inaccuracy.  De  Rienzi's  work  is 
one  of  the  best,  and  after  him  may  be  mentioned  Profes- 
sor C.  Semper 's  book,  "De  la  Gironiere,"  and  Henry 
Forman's. 

Much  valuable  information  upon  special  topics  has 
been  collated  by  American  and  British  consuls,  and  pub- 
lished in  the  blue  books  of  those  countries.  To  them, 
the  reader  has  referred  for  statistics  and  detailed  facts. 
The  conclusions  drawn  by  investigators  in  regard  to  the 
early  history  of  the  islands  are  about  as  follows.  The 
original  inhabitants  were  dark  men  of  a  negroid  type 
already  differentiated  into  two  varieties,  one  fierce  and 
destructive  like  the  Andaman  Islanders,  and  another 
darker  still,  which  is  found  to-day  in  the  Negritos  of 
Mindanao.  Either  this  primitive  race  lived  there  a  long 
time,  or  it  was  preceded  by  another  race  belonging  to 
the  Stone  age.  At  different  points  of  the  islands  stone 
axes,  spear-heads,  and  arrow-heads  have  been  picked  up 
in  considerable  numbers.  None  of  the  existing  tribes 


114  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

recognize  them,  or  even  have  any  name  for  them.  One 
tribe  in  Mindanao  calls  these  ancient  stone  implements 
"the  teeth  of  the  lightning." 

As  stone  axes  are  called  "thunder  bolts"  in  Java, 
Sumatra  and  Malacca,  it  is  probable  that  the  Mindanao 
people  received  the  name  from  those  Malay  lands,  or  else 
came  from  those  lands  themselves.  At  any  rate,  the 
Philippines  were  populated  in  the  Stone  age.  The 
original  race  was  probably  quite  populous.  Middens 
and  shell  heaps  of  great  age  have  been  found  in  various 
parts  of  the  territory,  indicating  the  large  number  of 
human  beings  living  in  the  immediate  neighborhood. 
These  were  conquered  when  the  islands  were  invaded  by 
a  higher  race,  also  black,  coming  from  Borneo.  This 
race  belonged  to  the  same  class  as  the  Papuans,  and  has 
many  living  representatives  at  the  present  time  in  all  of 
the  larger  islands. 

There  was  probably  the  same  process  of  war  and  ex- 
termination at  the  time  as  had  marked  all  such  invasions. 
The  weaker  inhabitants  were  slaughtered  and  eaten, 
because  all  of  these  races  were  cannibals,  and  the  sur- 
vivors driven  into  the  mountains  in  the  interior.  The 
larger  number  of  Negrito  villages  are  found  not  on  the 
lowlands,  but  in  the  hilly  districts.  The  Papuans  did 
not  hold  their  newly  conquered  domains  for  many  years 
before  they,  in  turn,  were  attacked  by  another  and  still 
higher  race,  the  Malay. 

These  Malays  seemed  to  have  borne  the  same  relation 
to  the  far  East  that  the  Norsemen  did  to  the  hosts  of 
Europe.  Just  as  the  latter,  were  not  a  homogeneous 
people,  but  were  made  up  of  Danes,  Norwegians,  Swedes, 
Finns,  Jutes,  Angles,  Saxons,  Frisians  and  Flemings,  so 
the  Malay  Sea  Kings  came  from  what  is  now  Singapore, 
Johore,  Penang,  Pahang,  Acheen,  eastern  Sumatra,  Java, 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  115 

Borneo,  and  the  lesser  states  and  islands  of  Malaysia. 
The  Malays  were  and  are  daring  navigators,  brave  war- 
riors, and  intelligent  artificers,  and  even  merchants. 

Their  boats  were  so  well  made  as  to  undertake  long 
voyages  successfully,  and  their  weapons,  more  especially 
the  formidable  creese,  were  about  the  best,  and  most 
destructive,  known  in  that  part  of  the  world.  The 
creese,  by  the  way,  is  not  a  dagger,  as  is  usually  sup- 
posed, but  a  cutting  blade  with  a  waved  edge,  and  ribs 
which  strengthen  without  weighting  the  weapon.  The 
smallest  creese  is  a  minature  dagger,  and  the  largest  is  a 
powerful  sword.  They  also  fastened  the  blades  to  poles 
converting  them  into  javelins  and  spears,  and  several 
tribes  attached  them  to  short  handles  so  as  to  convert 
them  into  battle-axes.  The  Malays  were  victorious  over 
the  Papuans,  and  drove  them  into  the  interior  as  the 
latter  had  done  with  the  Negritos.  This  must  have 
occurred  many  centuries  ago.  When  the  Mohammedan 
wave  reached  this  part  of  the  world  it  found  the 
Philippines  a  well-settled  Malay  community.  Further 
back  still  the  ancient  records  of  Canton  refer  to  them  as 
brown  men  like  those  in  the  strait.  This  would  seem  to 
indicate  that  the  Malay  conquest  of  the  Philippines 
occurred  in  the  early  part  of  the  Christian  era.  From 
that  time  on  the  islands  do  not  seem  to  have  been  invaded 
until  the  arrival  of  the  Spaniards  in  1563.  A  commerce 
sprang  up  between  the  Philippines  and  the  Malay  coun- 
tries, then  with  China,  and  finally  with  Japan. 

It  is  difficult  to  tell  what  this  commerce  was  in  detail, 
but  there  are  illusions  in  old  works  to  smoked  meats, 
smoked  fish,  sugar  cane,  hemp,  fine  wood,  beche  de  la 
mer,  and  gold.  The  Chinese  exported  iron,  brass,  china, 
silk,  and  medicines.  Mohamedanism,  during  its  aggres- 
sive state,  was  carried  into  the  Philippines  from  Java 


116  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

Borneo  and  Malaca.  It  made  rapid  progress,  and  even 
to-day  the  inhabitants  of  the  Sulu  Archipelago  to  the 
south,  a  large  part  of  the  population  of  Mindanao,  and 
several  hundred  thousand  souls  in  the  rest  of  the  islands, 
retain  that  faith.  Before  the  Spanish  conquest,  more 
than  two-thirds  were  Mohammedans,  and  the  other  third 
were  heathen  and  fetish  worshipers.  The  islands  were 
discovered  by  that  wonderful  Portuguese  navigator, 
Magellan,  who  took  possession  of  them  in  the  name  of 
Spain. 

Not  until  1563,  however,  was  any  real  attempt  made  to 
reduce  the  lands  to  possession.  In  that  year  the  famous 
General  Miguel  Lopez  de  Legazpi  started  to  subjugate 
the  archipelago.  He  was  eminently  qualified  for  the 
office,  and  succeeded  in  both  war  and  diplomacy  in  a 
manner  that  will  ever  elicit  admiration.  He  took  posses- 
sion of  the  Ladrones  or  Thieves  islands,  and  next  con- 
quered Bohol  and  Cebu.  In  15G9  Panay  was  conquered, 
and  in  1571,  Luzon,  the  land  of  the  pestle,  as  the  name 
means  in  Malajr,  went  under  the  Spanish  yoke.  The 
Spaniards  had  a  hard  time  at  first.  They  were  scarcely 
more  than  in  possession  of  their  new  domain  when  they 
found  that  they  had  invaded  the  rights  of  both  the 
Emperor  of  China  and  the  monarch  of  Japan.  The 
Japanese  gave  but  little  trouble,  but  the  Chinese  made 
war  with  a  vigor  strongly  in  contrast  with  their  perform- 
ance in  1894.  Between  1573  and  1575,  no  less  than  ten 
attacks  were  made  upon  Manila  by  fleets  from  Canton 
and  Amoy,  and  although  the  Spaniards  were  victorious, 
yet  the  IOSR  on  both  sides  were  enormous.  The  greatest 
victory  of  all  was  in  1574,  when  the  Chinese  general,  Li 
Mah  Ong,  attacked  the  Spaniards  with  both  navy  and 
army.  The  battle  lasted  several  days,  the  Chinese  fleet 
was  destroyed,  one-half  of  the  soldiers  killed,  and  the  rest 


MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES.  117 

chased  into  the  mountains  to  both  the  north  and  south 
of  Manila.  With  characteristic  Chinese  philosophy  the 
fugitives  accepted  the  inevitable  and  settled  in  the  fertile 
valleys  far  away  in  the  interior.  They  made  friends  with 
the  native  tribes,  took  wives  from  among  the  savages, 
and  started  communities  which  are  still  flourishing  at 
the  present  moment. 

Their  descendants  are  scarcely  distinguishable  from 
other  Malays,  but  they,  nevertheless,  take  deep  pride  in 
their  descent,  and  look  down  upon  their  neighbors  as 
beings  of  an  inferior  mold. 

Those  attacks  of  the  Chinese  aroused  the  vindictive 
spirit  of  the  Spanish  settlers,  who,  from  that  time  on, 
treated  the  Mongolian  with  a  cruelty  and  inhumanity 
that  have  left  indelible  stains  upon  the  Castillian  records. 
In  1603,  for  example,  when  the  Chinese  had  settled  near 
Manila  and  built  up  a  handsome  and  prosperous  suburb, 
the  Spaniards  attacked  them  and  massacred  man,  woman 
and  child,  amounting  to  twenty-three  thousand  souls. 

Twelve  thousand  escaped  the  slaughter  and  managed 
to  get  back  to  China.  In  1639  there  was  another  mur- 
derous wave  in  the  Philippines,  and  the  Spaniards 
attacked  the  Chinese  population  and  murdered  about 
thirty-five  thousand  in  cold  blood.  In  1665  there  was 
another  but  smaller  crusade  against  the  luckless  Mongol- 
ian. In  1709  the  cruel  spirit  was  modified  by  some  con- 
sideration for  humanity.  Only  a  few  hundred  Chinamen 
were  killed,  but  the  rest  of  the  Chinese  population  was 
deported,  and  it  need  hardly  be  added  all  their  property 
was  confiscated  and  divided  between  the  church  and 
state.  Between  1628  and  1751  the  Spaniards  made  nine 
attempts  to  conquer  the  Sulu  islands,  but  in  every 
instance  were  repulsed  with  heavy  losses.  In  1762  the 
tables  were  turned,  and  this  time  the  Spaniards  were 


118  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

assailed.  The  invaders  were  the  English  commanded  by 
General  Draper.  The  Spaniards,  reinforced  by  the 
natives,  made  a  brave  but  unskillful  resistance,  and  were 
slaughtered  like  sheep  in  the  shambles.  Manila  was 
taken  and  pillaged. 

England  would  probably  have  taken  the  Philippines, 
but  the  Spanish  government  at  home  becoming  fright- 
ened, sued  for  peace,  and  in  the  treaty  which  followed 
Manila  was  restituted  to  Madrid.  In  1820  the  Pilip- 
pines  had  a  crisis  which  almost  destroyed  all  civilization 
in  that  part  of  the  world.  For  the  first  time  in  its 
history  the  territory  was  invaded  by  Asiatic  cholera.  It 
began  at  Sanpaloc  near  Manila,  spread  to  that  city,  and 
thence  went  into  every  part  of  Luzon.  The  mortality 
was  frightful,  over  one-half  of  the  population  dying,  it 
is  said,  from  the  disease.  In  the  height  of  the  epidemic, 
the  ignorant  Spaniards  and  natives  suddenly  adopted  the 
belief  that  the  disease  was  a  part  of  a  wholesale  plot  to 
poison  on  the  part  of  foreigners. 

The  mob  rose  in  every  community  and  massacred  first 
the  Chinese  then  the  French,  then  the  English  and 
Americans,  and  finally  the  Spaniards.  They  burned  very 
house  which  was  not  defended  by  the  soldiery,  robbed 
every  citizen  and  looted  every  building.  In  1823  was 
the  famous  revolt  led  by  Novales  and  Ruiz.  It  was 
short  but  very  fierce  and  bloodthirsty,  and  is  said  to  have 
cost  the  lives  of  five  thousand  people  within  a  week. 
Since  that  time  the  career  of  the  Philippines  has  been 
comparatively  calm  and  quiet.  There  have  been  many 
uprisings,  riots  and  revolts,  but  each  has  been  put  down 
with  an  iron  hand.  The  policy  of  the  government  has 
grown  stronger  and  severer  with  the  years,  and  now 
adopts  measures  for  the  prevention  of  riot  which  are  just 
as  merciless  as  those  used  in  war. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  119 

Wherever  there  has  been  the  smallest  uprising  a  gun- 
boat or  a  company  of  soldiers  has  appeared  promptly 
upon  the  scene,  and  everyone  involved  or  suspected  has 
been  tried  by  court-martial  and  promptly  shot.  The 
Sulu  archipelago  was  finally  conquered,  but  has  never 
yet  been  pacified.  It  is  under  Spanish  control  where 
there  are  bayonets  and  rifles.  Elsewhere  it  is  still  ruled 
by  the  brave  and  warlike  Mohammedan  chiefs. 


120  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

THE     GO VEBNMENT. 

THIS  chapter  is  intended  for  the  people  who  like  solid 
facts,  such  as  names,  places,  and  statistics,  and  may, 
therefore,  be  skipped  by  all  readers  who  do  not  care  to 
burden  their  memories  with  uninteresting  details.  The 
government  of  the  Philippines  is  of  a  dual  character, 
being  military  and  civil  on  the  part  of  the  state,  and 
ecclesiastical  on  the  part  of  the  church.  Nominally  the 
state  governs,  actually  the  church  is  the  master.  No 
better  illustration  of  the  tendency  of  ecclesiastical  insti- 
tution to  self-aggrandizement  can  be  found  than  this 
eastern  archipelago.  The  church  dignitaries  control 
the  politicians  in  Madrid,  they  control  the  officials  in  the 
Philippines,  they  own  vast  tracts  of  valuable  territory, 
and  they  have  had  the  laws  so  framed  as  to  make  them- 
selves members  de  jure  of  nearly  every  branch  and  bureau 
of  the  colonial  government.  The  nominal  head  of  the 
government  is  the  governor-general  and  commander-in- 
chief.  The  actual  head  is  the  Archbishop  of  Manila. 

Under  the  governor-general  there  is  a  vice-governor- 
general,  a  colonial  secretary,  two  assistant  secretaries, 
and  six  secretary  clerks.  There  is  a  chief  officer  of  public 
order,  with  a  first  and  second  deputy.  There  is  a  chief 
interpreter  who  is  supposed  to  be  familiar  with  at  least 
four  of  the  native  languages,  a  chief  interpreter  of  French 
and  English,  and  a  chief  interpreter  of  the  Sulu  Ian- 


MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES.  121 

guage.  The  governor-general  receives  a  salary  of  forty 
thousand  dollars  a  year  and  perquisites.  There  is  an 
executive  council,  of  which  the  chairman  is  the  governor- 
general,  and  the  members  the  archbishop,  the  naval  com- 
mander, the  vice-governor,  the  president  of  the  Supreme 
Court,  the  superintendent  of  finance,  the  director  of  civil 
administration,  and  the  colonial  treasurer.  There  is  an 
administrative  council,  which  consists  of  the  governor- 
general  as  chairman,  the  commander  of  the  stationvice- 
chairman  the  archbishop,  the  bishops  suffragan,  the  presi- 
dent of  the  Manila  court,  the  superintendent  of  finance, 
the  director  of  civil  administration ;  the  registrar  of  the 
Manila  court,  the  magistrates  of  the  Common  Court,  and 
two  members  appointed  by  the  government. 

There  is  a  finance  committee  of  seven  members,  an 
advisory  committee  of  seven  members,  a  legal  department 
of  two  members;  a  Supreme  Court,  consisting  of  a  presi- 
dent and  four  members,  and  a  registrar.  There  is  a  Board 
of  Censors,  consisting  of  the  colonial  treasurer  as  chair- 
man, and  four  members,  and  a  censor  of  the  public  press. 
There  are  seventy-seven  provinces  which  give  employ- 
ment to  seventy-seven  provincial  governors,  and  a  con- 
vict settlement  under  an  inspector-general.  The  gov- 
ernor of  a  first  class  province  receives  four  thousand  five 
hundred  dollars  a  year  and  perquisites;  of  a  second-class 
province,  four  thousand  a  year  and  perquisites;  and  of  a 
third-class,  three  thousand  five  hundred  and  perquisites. 
The  island  is  also  divided  into  military  districts  or  pre- 
cincts. The  first  division  is  into  three  parts,  each  com- 
manded by  a  brigadier-general,  to  whom  is  allowed  a 
staff.  These  are  subdivided  into  districts,  of  which  the 
head  is  a  colonel,  a  lieutenant-colonel,  a  major  and  a  cap- 
tain, according  to  their  importance.  The  brigadier-gen- 
eral of  Mindanao  receives  seventeen  thousand  eight 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

hundred  and  twenty -five  dollars  salary ;  the  colonel  of 
Jolo,  seven  thousand  two  hundred  and  forty  dollars;  the 
lieutenant-colonel  of  the  West  Carolines,  four  thousand 
nine  hundred;  the  major  of  Zamboanga,  three  thou- 
sand eight  hundred  and  fifty-six  dollars;  the  captain 
of  Concepcion,  one  thousand  nine  hundred  and  eighty 
dollars. 

There  are  four  naval  stations,  of  which  the  heads 
receive  from  three  thousand  eight  hundred  dollars  per 
annum  to  six  thousand  nine  hundred  dollars.  Under 
these  heads  are  all  sorts  of  bureaus  and  offices.  Some 
are  familiar  to  Americans,  such  as  the  custom  house,  tax 
office,  the  treasury,  the  public  works,  and  the  army 
building.  Others  are  mysterious,  such  as  the  bureau  of 
woods  and  forests,  of  mountains,  of  rivers,  of  fishing,  of 
harbors,  of  tax  farming,  and  of  tax  produce ;  in  fact,  there 
appears  to  be  a  bureau  or  an  office  for  every  conceivable 
thing  a  government  can  do,  and  a  great  many  for  things 
that  government  ought  not  to  do,  that  a  government  can- 
not do,  but  pretends  to  do. 

This  gives  a  great  number  of  offices  to  the  politicians, 
and  none  is  ever  vacant.  Many  powerful  politicians  hold 
three  or  four  offices,  of  which  the  joint  income  and  per- 
quisites make  a  very  large  salary.  Others  hold  offices 
with  a  small  salary,  but  enormous  perquisites.  No  one 
has  ever  been  heard  of  that  held  a  small  office  with  a 
small  salary  that  was  satisfied  with  his  lot,  or  that  did 
not  attempt  to  levy  upon  all  people  desirous  of  official 
favors. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  make  head  or  tail  out  of  Spanish 
finances.  The  Spaniards  themselves  cannot  do  it,  and  it 
is  therefore  futile  for  outsiders  to  try  the  experiment. 
A  late  budget  gives  the  total  of  about  five  hundred  thou- 
sand dollars  for  salaries  of  heads  of  government  per  year, 


I 


"  *^|L 
>  ^i 


- 

be  o 


<3J      CO 


5 


I 
I 
I 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  123 

and  then  deducts  a  hundred  and  seventy -five  thousand 
as  belonging  to  army  and  navy  estimates.  In  another 
column  it  gives  three  hundred  thousand  dollars  for  army 
and  navy  expenses,  and  charges  the  remainder  to  the 
general  colonial  account.  The  church  organization  is 
headed  by  the  archbishop,  who  has  a  staff  consisting  of 
a  secretary,  three  assistant  secretaries,  a  vicar-general, 
promoter  fiscal,  and  a  notary.  The  archepiscopal  chap- 
ter consists  of  the  dean,  sub-dean,  precentor,  schoolmas- 
ter, treasurer,  canon-doctoral,  canon-magistral,  canon- 
penitentiary,  nine  prebendaries,  a  master  of  ceremonies, 
a  succentor,  and  a  sacristan.  There  are  bishops  in 
charge  of  the  Episcopal  districts  of  Cebu,  Nueva  Caceres, 
Jaro,  and  Nueva  Segovia.  To  each  bishopric  is  assigned 
a  vicar-general,  a  secretary  and  clerks,  a  college  with  a 
rector  or  director  with  ecclesiastical  professors  ranging 
from  four  to  ten  in  number,  and  in  some  of  the  districts 
special  institutions  in  charge  of  church  officials.  There 
are  eight  religious  orders:  the  Augustine,  Dominican, 
Recollet,  Franciscan,  Capuchin,  the  Jesuit  St.  Vincent  de 
Paul,  and  the  Daughters  of  Charity.  Each  has  its  pro- 
vincial or  superior,  and  each  conducts  convents  or  mon- 
asteries, of  which  there  are  nearly  thirty  in  all  the 
islands. 

The  Supreme  Court  has  a  general  president,  a  civil 
president,  four  civil  magistrates,  a  criminal  president, 
and  four  criminal  magistrates;  a  fiscal  agent,  four  advo- 
cates, a  chief  secretary,  a  college  of  notaries,  with  doyen 
and  two  censors,  and  a  college  of  advocates,  with  a  doyen 
and  two  deputies.  There  is  also  the  finance  department, 
with  a  superintendent,  assistant  superintendent,  chief  in- 
spector and  assistant  inspector.  There  is  a  council  of 
finance  consisting  of  ten  members  of  whom  one  is  the 
administrator  of  lotteries,  fhere  is  a  tariff  committee 


124  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

with  nineteen  members,  a  Board  of  Education  consisting 
of  the  governor-general,  the  archbishop,  the  reverend 
president  of  St.  John's  College,  and  the  provincial  of  the 
Recollet  Friars.  There  is  a  university  conducted  by 
friars  and  a  Municipal  Atheneum  under  the  same  super- 
vision. Under  the  public  works  department  there  are 
bureaus  of  inspection,  engineering,  architecture,  forests, 
mines,  lands,  agriculture,  farms,  manufactures, commerce, 
weather-observatory  and  harbor,  and  for  the  Province  of 
Manila  a  Prison  Board  of  Health,  Police  Board,  and  a 
department  of  pawnshops  and  savings  banks,  of  which 
our  good  friend,  the  archbishop,  is  the  president. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  church  holds  a  large  and 
often  a  controlling  part,  in  nearly  every  government  func- 
tion. It  participates  in  the  making  of  the  law  and  the 
execution  of  the  law,  in  the  finances  of  the  state,  and  in 
education.  It  has  chaplains  in  the  regiments  and  on 
the  warships,  and  it  has  almost  complete  control  of  its 
own  finances  and  of  the  finances  which  it  secures  through 
the  agency  of  the  state. 

The  cost  of  running  this  machine  is  about  ten  millions 
of  dollars  a  year.  The  revenue  of  the  government,  which 
is  always  to  leave  a  surplus,  invariably  produces  a  defi- 
ciency varying  from  one  to  more  than  two  millions  a 
year.  Thus  the  colony  is  always  in  debt,  and  is  worse 
off  at  the  present  time  than  it  has  ever  been  before. 

The  budget  tells  a  pitiful  story  of  the  wajr  in  which  the 
finances  are  managed.  Ever3rone  has  to  pay  a  poll  tax, 
and  a  special  tax  upon  the  poll  tax.  Every  Chinaman 
pays  a  special  tax  and  a  second  tax  upon  the  first.  The 
opium  concession  brings  in  a  half-million  dollars  a  year ; 
storekeepers'  and  peddlers'  licenses  over  a  million  a  year; 
lotteries  a  net  profit  of  a  half-million  a  year.  This  is 
bad  enough,  but  there  are  other  entries  showing  absolute 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  125 

imbecility.  Thus,  the  Bureau  of  Inspection  of  Woods  and 
Forests  is  conducted  by  a  chief  inspector,  with  a  salary 
of  six  thousand  five  hundred  dollars,  and  a  staff  of  one 
hundred  and  sixteen  assistants  and  subordinates.  The 
total  cost  is  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  thousand  nine 
hundred  and  sixty  dollars,  while  the  anticipated  duties 
on  felled  timber  which  pays  this  account  is  about  eighty 
thousand  dollars.  As  a  matter  of  fact  the  receipts  of  the 
department  are  usually  about  sixty -five  thousand  dollars, 
and  the  expenses  about  one  hundred  and  eighty  thousand 
dollars,  so  that  there  is  an  annual  deficiency  of  about  one 
hundred  thousand  dollars  a  year.  The  subordinates  of 
the  department  receive  poor  pay,  many  not  getting  more 
than  five  hundred  dollars  a  year.  They  make  up  for  it 
by  corrupt  deals  with  everyone  in  the  business.  Thus 
for  a  reasonable  consideration  they  will  mark  first  quality 
eighteen-inch  timber  damaged  fifteen  inch,  a  jam  of  five 
hundred  logs  becomes  three  hundred  and  seventeen  logs, 
an  entire  consignment  of  new  timber  will  be  checked  off 
as  being  the  preceding  year's  output  already  paid  for. 
Each  and  every  item  will  be  falsified,  so  that  the  official 
returns  are  always  far  from  the  truth.  Still  more  cruel 
and  corrupt  is  the  system  of  taxing  in  produce  and  not 
in  money. 

The  official  assesses  the  tax  in  money,  adding  to  it  in- 
terest and  fees  for  giving  a  receipt  and  also  for  sealing 
the  receipt.  He  then  takes  from  the  poor  native  at  an 
official  valuation,  enought  rice,  maize,  or  other  produce, 
to  equal  the  amount  called  for  in  the  bill.  Sometimes 
he  uses  false  measures,  fifty  per  cent,  larger  than  what 
they  ought  to  be.  He  then  ships  the  produce  to  the 
market  on  a  government  steamer  on  his  own  individual 
account,  getting  sometimes  three,  four  and  five  times 
the  amount  he  pays  over  to  the  government.  One  official 


126  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES, 

in  Mindanao,  who  had  a  salary  of  forty-five  dollars  a 
month,  retired  at  the  end  of  four  years  with  a  fortune  of 
sixty  thousand  dollars  which  he  had  made  in  this  way. 
Several  of  the  provincial  governors  have  realized  during 
their  tenure  of  office  a  quarter  of  a  million,  and  with  the 
exception  of  Governor-General  Blanco,  who  enjoyed  the 
unique  distinction  of  being  called  the  only  honest  gover- 
nor-general the  Philippines  ever  knew,  not  one  governor- 
\  general  has  retired  from  office  without  being  an  enor- 
\  mously  rich  man.  The  saddest  feature  of  officialdom  is 
*  the  hopelessness  of  reform.  In  Manila  society  a  favorite 
subject  of  conversation  is  the  amount  of  wealth  accum- 
ulated by  this  or  that  official.  If  he  has  made  little  he 
is  laughed  at,  if  much  he  is  lauded  and  admired;  but 
there  is  never  a  word  of  deprecation  or  indignation. 
Another  illustration  is  found  in  the  evasion  of  the  law 
which  prescribes  that  every  male  adult  shall  give  the 
state  fifteen  days'  labor  per  annum  or  redeem  it  by  a  pay- 
ment of  money.  As  a  matter  of  fact  only  the  needy  who 
cannot  spare  the  money  do  the  work  demanded  by  law, 
nevertheless  the  returns  show  that  scarcely  one  penny  is 
received  for  the  forced  labor,  and  that  everybody  has  put 
in  his  fifteen  days.  Labor  is  supposed  to  be  expended 
upon  roads,  sewers,  canals,  bridges,  and  clearing  the 
wilderness.  With  the  exception  of  the  few  roads,  how- 
ever, which  are  kept  in  good  condition  by  the  farmers 
and  business  men,  there  are  no  thoroughfares  worth  men- 
tioning. The  canals  are  in  many  instances  so  blocked  as 
to  be  unuseable,  none  of  the  public  lands  have  been 
cleared,  and  what  few  bridges  have  been  put  or  kept  in 
repair  can  be  counted  upon  the  fingers  of  the  two  hands, 
and  in  all  of  these  cases  it  has  been  done  by  private  en- 
terprise and  not  by  public  authority.  But  an  immense 
amount  of  forced  labor  has  been  diverted  to  private  pur- 


O 


s 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  127 

poses.     Officials  have  had  their  establishments  repaired 
and  embellished  in  this  manner,  some  even  have  had  their 
plantations  worked  the  year  through  by  these  paupers  of 
the  state.     The   late   experience  of  Admiral  Dewey   at 
Manila  shows  that  the  same  corruption  had  permeated 
the    most   sacred   duties   of   citizenship,    and   that   the 
arsenals,  navies,  and  forts  of  the  Philippines  had  been  * 
utilized  by  the  governing  classes  as  an  efficient  niechan-  | 
ism  for  amassing  an  inquitous  fortune. 


128  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTEE   XV." 

THE    PHILIPPINE    NEWSPAPER    WORLD. 

To  an  American  accustomed  to  the  newspaper  system 
of  his  home,  with  its  world-wide  news  service,  its  noble 
literary  and  scientific  features,  its  grasp  of  politics,  local, 
national,  and  international,  the  newspapers  of  the  Philip- 
pines present  a  curious  spectacle.  They  are  not  very 
numerous,  there  being  seven  in  Manila,  two  in  Iloilo, 
and  one  in  Cebu.  At  Manila  two  of  the  journals  are 
published  in  the  morning :  El  Diario  de  Manila,  and  La 
Oceania  Espanola,  and  four  in  the  evening,  El  Comercio 
La  Voz  Espaflola  (formerly  called  La  Voz  de  Espana),  El 
Espaflol  and  El  Noticero.  There  is  a  bi-weekly  called 
La  Opinion,  whose  appearances  are  as  mysterious  as 
those  of  a  comet.  There  was  another  paper,  La  Corre- 
spondencia  de  Manila,  which  was  based  upon  the  Lucus  a 
non__lucendo  principle.  It  published  a  few  notes,  an  in- 
terminable novel,  and  finally  died  from  paralysis  of  its 
circulation.  The  best  of  the  papers  is  El  Diario. 

At  Iloilo  are  two  journals,  El  Porvenir  Bisayas 
and  El  Echo  de  Panay.  The  little  journal  of  Cebu  is 
entitled  El  Boletin  de  Cebu.  These  publications  are  all 
of  the  same  type,  and  the  type  is  a  curious  one.  Nomi- 
nally they  print  and  purvey  news,  actual  news  is  the 
very  last  thing  to  which  they  pay  any  attention.  Nearly 
if  not  quite  all  enjoy  subventions  from  the  government, 
and  it  is  needless  to  remark  that  they  are  vigorous  sup- 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  129 

porters  of  the  administration.  The  more  prosperous 
have  subventions  from  the  church.  These  subventions 
alone  support  the  papers  and  pay  a  neat  profit.  The 
subscriptions  and  advertisements  serve  to  increase  the 
revenue.  The  paper  is  made  in  Spain,  and  is  a  good 
and  durable  tissue.  It  wears  better  than  the  cheap  wood 
pulp  paper  upon  which  most  American  journals  are 
printed,  but  it  is  poorly  made  and  poorly  finished. 
The  surface  is  rough  and  the  thickness  of  each  sheet  not 
uniform.  The  result  is  that  the  printing  is  wretched. 
At  some  points  the  ink  spreads  and  looks  blurred,  at 
other  points  it  just  touches  the  paper,  and  makes  but  a 
faint  impression,  while  every  now  and  then  either  a  type 
is  broken,  or  the  ink  does  not  touch  at  all,  so  that  the 
reader  is  compelled  to  supply  the  necessary  letter  or 
letters.  Each  journal  conducts  a  serial  story  usually 
printed  across  the  lower  half  of  the  page,  and  one  or 
more  short  stories,  all  of  which  are  carefully  cissored 
from  Spanish  or  South  American  publications.  When 
they  want  to  make  a  big  hit  they  translate  a  new  French 
novel.  The  exertion  of  this  operation  is  so  great  that  it 
is  hard  to  say  who  are  the  more  astonished,  the  editors 
of  the  paper  or  its  readers.  There  are  several  columns 
of  official  and  hierarchical  news  which  are  as  dreary  as 
can  be  imagined,  a  lot  of  short  notes  and  paragraphs,  a 
number  of  jokes  chiefly  time-honored,  and  a  few  bits  of 
what  by  courtesy  may  be  called  news. 

Everj'  now  and  then  there  are  fierce  editorials  in  which 
some  attack  from  a  foreign  paper  is  resented,  and  the 
abuse  attacked  is  held  up  as  a  marvel  of  human  wisdom 
and  statesmanship.  These  articles  were  quite  numerous. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  present  war  between  Spain 
and  the  United  States,  and  also  at  the  time  of  the  prose- 
cution of  Dr.  Rizal,  during  the  Philippine  insurrection 


130  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

of  1896-97.  Those  editorials  translated  into  English 
would  make  about  as  funny  a  book  as  Mark  Twain's 
"Innocents  Abroad. "  They  display  an  ignorance  ren- 
dered all  the  more  offensive  by  incomplete  knowledge 
and  arrogance,  and  intolerance  inexplicable  to  an  Ameri- 
can mind.  Thus,  for  example,  Dr.  Rizal  was  a  man  of 
blameless  life,  a  sincere  patriot  whose  only  fault  was  a 
desire  to  better  the  social  and  political  conditions  of  the 
Philippines.  He  was  wise  and  politic,  and  never  alluded 
to  the  hideous  scandals  which  constitute  the  chief  staple 
of  conversation  in  that  part  of  the  world.  The  only 
mention  he  ever  made  of  these  things  was  when  in  argu- 
ing for  various  reforms  he  declared  that  thoughtful  legis- 
lation would  put  an  end  to  many  evils,  which,  under  the 
present  regime  seemed  incurable.  This  modest  state- 
ment was  seized  upon  as  an  evidence  of  high  treason, 
and  was  one  of  the  specifications  in  tho  charges  brought 
against  him  for  which  he  was  executed  in  December  1896. 
The  journals  in  commenting  upon  his  appeal  for  better 
government  took  the  ground,  not  only  that  he  was  a 
traitor,  but  that  he  was  bribed  by  heretical  churches,  or 
British  statesmen ;  that  the  government  of  the  Philip- 
pines was  a  model  which  was  bound  to  be  adopted  in 
due  course  of  time  by  every  nation  possessing  colonies; 
that  prosperity  and  thrift  prevailed  in  the  islands  to  an 
unequaled  extent,  and  that  the  natives  were  treated 
with  greater  consideration  than  they  deserved.  About 
that  time,  it  may  have  been  the  same  day,  there  was  a 
paragraph  in  several  of  the  journals  which  was  an  elo- 
quent commentary  upon  the  editorials.  It  read  about  as 
follows:  A  number  of  natives  in  the  Province  of  Panay, 
upon  the  pretext  that  a  priest  had  punished  several 
female  domestics  with  greater  severity  than  was  proper, 
entered  into  a  seditious  conspiracy  with  the  avowed 


t/f 

fl 
.2 

•§ 

^ 
& 


K     * 

<    $ 
*2     a 

rt     « 

bJO 
>-> 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  131 

object  of  killing  the  occupant  of  the  holy  office.  News 
was  promptly  dispatched  to  the  commandant  of  the  near- 
est garrison,  who  sent  a  company  of  soldiers  in  response 
to  the  request.  The  natives  gathering  with  intent  to 
assault  the  soldiers,  the  latter  thinking  prevention  better 
than  cure,  fired  upon  them,  killing  and  wounding  nearly 
all  the  members  of  the  mob.  The  rest  fled  to  the  interior, 
but  will  probably  be  captured  and  dealt  with  summarily." 

But  it  is  in  comparing  Spain  with  other  countries  that 
the  Philippine  editor  displays  his  highest  genius.  It 
was  Spain  which  discovered  the  New  World,  and,  there- 
fore, everything  done  in  its  countries  is  to  be  charged  to 
the  credit  of  the  discoverer.  It  was  Charles  V.  who  once 
ruled  over  nearly  all  of  Europe  to  illustrate  what  Spanish 
soldiers  can  do  when  they  so  desire,  and  what  at  any 
time  Spain  may  do  again  when  the  humor  takes  her.  It 
was  the  Spanish  navy  which  conquered  the  French,  and 
not  their  vainglorious  British  allies  under  Nelson.  It 
was  the  Spanish  army  that  drove  Napoleon  across  the 
Pyrenees,  although  a  British  braggart  named  Welling- 
ton tried  to  steal  the  credit  for  himself.  Spain  lost  her 
colonies,  although  her  armies  had  crushed  the  insurgents 
in  each  state  and  province,  because  she  could  not  bring 
herself  to  refuse  the  sacred  voice  of  Borne,  which  implored 
her  to  desist  from  further  bloodshed. 

There  is  something  pitiful  in  such  exhibitions  of 
humor,  vanity,  and  moral  weakness.  The  desire  to  pose 
and  strut  with  a  feather  in  the  bonnet,  although  the 
clothing  is  in  rags;  to  drag  a  huge  broadsword,  which 
the  aged  owner  can  no  longer  wield,  to  bear  a  book 
which  weakened  eyes  can  no  longer  road,  and  to  sing 
heroic  war  songs  in  a  cracked  and  senile  falsetto,  is 
about  the  saddest  thing  in  life. 

As  for  news  proper  the  Philippine  editor  regards  it  not 


132  MANILA   AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

only  as  a  bore,  but  as  an  impertinence.  It  may  be  ques- 
tioned if  any  newspaper  in  the  Philippines  has  as  yet 
chronicled  any  of  the  discoveries  of  Dewar,  Rayleigh, 
Ramsay,  Lister,  Edison,  Tesla,  Maxim,  Roentgen,  Koch, 
Thomas  Westinghouse,  or  other  great  inventors  or  dis- 
coverers whose  works  have  revolutionized  modern  life. 
It  may  be  questioned  if  they  have  published  the  political 
changes  from  time  to  time,  in  France,  Germany,  Great 
Britain,  or  the  United  States.  It  may  be  denied  in  ad- 
vance, without  the  least  knowledge  on  the  subject,  that 
they  they  have  read,  or  heard  of  any  new  writer  in  either 
German,  Russian,  or  English.  As  for  such  events  as 
Nansen's  and  Peary's  magnificent  voyages,  Cecil  Rhodes, 
civilizing  a  continent,  the  invention  of  the  electric  rail- 
way; the  manufacture  of  aluminum,  nickel  steel,  and 
Harvey  steel,  probably  not  a"  syllable  has  appeared  in  the 
journals  mentioned. 

Their  atmosphere  is  a  servile  imitation,  and  an  inferior 
one  at  that,  of  the  atmosphere  of  their  home  country. 
Its  courtesy  and  fine  breeding,  make  it  all  the  more  re- 
pulsive to  readers  brought  up  in  other  lands.  Yet  these 
very  qualities  produce  very  humorous  situations.  Prior 
to  the  revolution  in  Spain  which  brought  about  the 
Spanish  republic,  favorite  topic  for  the  Manila  editor 
was  the  monstrosity  of  British  democracy  and  American 
republicanism.  When  the  Castelar  movement  succeeded, 
the  Philippine  press  is  said  to  have  suspended  issue  for 
two  days,  and  then  it  came  out  for  the  glorification  of 
the  rights  of  man  and  an  eulogy  of  government  of  the 
people,  by  the  people,  and  for  the  people.  For  at  least 
a  month  their  republicanism  would  have  done  credit  to 
one  of  the  old  Romans.  When  the  monarchy  was  re- 
stored there  was  another  intellectual  fit,  during  which  all 
the  files  and  back  numbers  were  either  concealed  or  de- 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  133 

stroyed  and  a  new  series  of  editorials,  denouncing  the 
former  opinions  were  evolved  in  the  various  sanctums. 
It  is  impossible  to  get  in  Manila  a  copy  of  any  paper 
published  during  the  fortnight  after  the  news  was  re- 
ceived of  the  establishment  of  a  republic  in  Spain. 

The  circulation  of  the  papers  is  small,  the  average 
Spaniard  cannot  read  and  write,  the  ratio  of  illiteracy 
being  greater  in  the  Philippines  than  in  Spain. 

In  Spain  the  ratio  is  about  seventy  per  cent.,  in  the 
Philippines  it  is  about  ninety-nine  per  cent.  No  more 
significant  commentary  upon  the  colonial  administration 
could  be  adduced. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

THE   NATIVES. 

WHILE  the  Malays  of  the  Philippines  belong  to  the  same 
race  as  those   of   Java,  Sumatra,    and  the   Malay  penin- 
sula, they  have  in  the  course  of  three   centuries   been 
changed   partly  by  their   surroundings   and   partly  by 
Spanish  rule.     The  tendency  of  the  climate  is  against 
exertion.    It  is  never  cold,  so  that  the  weak  as  well  as  the 
strong  can  sleep  out  of  doors  the  year  through.     There 
are  no  ferocious  carnivora,  so  there  is  no  necessity  for 
organized  resistance  to  a  common  enemy.     The  soil  is 
unspeakably  fertile,  and  under   natural  conditions  would 
supply  a  population  twice  as  large  with   all  the  food  it 
required.     These  influences  tend,   no  matter  what  the 
form  of  government  might  be,  toward  creating  a  love  for 
ease  and  idleness.     The  Spanish  rule  on  the  other  hand 
has  only  one  aim,  and  that  the  acquisition  of  the  largest 
possible  revenue.     The  result  is  an  artificial  necessity  to 
work.     The  average  native  must  work  or  starve.     If  he 
resists  he  is  treated  as  a  malefactor — if  he  runs  away  as 
an  outlaw.     When  laws  become  too  severe  men  become 
hypocrites  and  liars.     These  truths  are  evidenced  by  the 
character  of  the    Philippine   native,    and  explain    many 
seeming  paradoxes.    A  man  makes  a  faithful  and  efficient 
employee,  but  at  any  time  he  is  liable  to  stop  working 
and  to  loaf  for  a  year  or  two,  especially  if  he  can  secure  a 
supply  of  food  during  that  period.     And  a  very  good 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  135 

employee  does  this  little  Philippine  Malay  make.  He  is 
hired  on  nearly  every  steamship  in  the  far  East  in  the 
role  of  quartermaster,  and  other  minor  positions,  and 
always  gives  satisfaction.  On  many  occasions  these 
Manilamen  (as  they  are  termed)  have  displayed  high 
fortitude,  self-control,  and  even  heroism.  There  were 
some  on  the  ill-fated  steamer  Bokhara  when  she  went 
down  off  the  Pescadores,  and  they,  with  the  officers, 
were  the  last  to  leave  their  posts.  There  were  some  on 
the  steamship  Namoa  when  she  was  captured  by  the 
pirates  in  1890,  and  they  behaved  with  the  same  courage 
as  the  English  officers.  The  Chinese,  who  are  keen 
judges  of  human  character,  say  of  the  European  that  he 
is  a  white  devil,  and  of  the  Malay  that  he  is  a  brown  one, 
which,  under  the  circumstances,  may  be  regarded  as  a 
high  compliment.  The  Spaniards,  who  judge  all  other 
people  by  analogy,  have  never  been  able  to  understand 
their  brown  subjects.  One  Spanish  writer  who  lived 
many  years  in  Luzon,  not  far  from  Manila,  said  that  the 
native  was  incomprehensible,  that  the  mechanism  of  his 
thought,  that  the  motives  of  his  actions  were  an  heir- 
loom from  chaos,  or  else  the  inspiration  of  the  Evil  One. 
A  philologist  calls  attention  to  the  fact  that  in  all  of  the 
Malay  languages  of  the  Philippines  there  are  no  words 
for  saying  "thank  you,"  and  that  the  word  which  means 
honest  in  several  dialects  also  means  simple,  youthful  or 
puerile  in  others.  In  regard  to  truth  they  do  not  hesi- 
tate to  lie,  and  even  when  found  out  show  no  shame  or 
mortification.  In  this  respect  they  are  very  much  like 
their  next  door  neighbors,  the  Chinese  lower  classes. 
The  author  had  a  friend  at  Amoy,  China,  who  had  a  very 
faithful  and  efficient  servant.  One  day  the  latter  came 
to  his  master  weeping  and  asked  permission  to  leave  him 
for  two  days,  as  his  mother  was  dead.  The  permission 


136  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

was  given  without  hesitation.  The  next  year,  to  the 
master's  surprise,  there  was  the  same  request,  with  simi- 
lar weeping.  He  said  nothing,  but  gave  the  servant  the 
desired  leave  of  absence.  This  went  on  for  four  years, 
until  the  master  grew  tired.  On  the  last  occasion  he 
looked  at  the  servant  and  said  sharply:  "What  do  you 
mean?  Your  mother  died  last  year  and  the  year  before 
that.  She's  died  regularly  for  five  years  past."  The 
servant  nodded  his  head  in  acquiescence,  and  replied : 
"Yes,  master,  the  same  old  dead."  Their  moral  code 
has  many  odd  features.  They  rarely  steal,  and  even 
when  they  do  steal  it  is  to  gratifj'  some  pressing  want, 
yet  even  here  they  do  not  seem  to  differentiate  between 
one  kind  of  want  and  another.  A  man  who  takes  a  loaf 
of  bread  because  he  is  starving,  a  man  who  takes  a  jewel 
and  pawns  it  wherewith  to  buy  opium  when  he  is  suffer- 
ing for  a  smoke,  and  a  man  who  steals  money  wherewith 
to  buy  a  good  suit  in  which  to  attend  a  religious  festival, 
are  all  put  in  the  same  category.  In  each  case,  to  the 
native  mind,  the  wrongdoer  was  the  victim  of  necessity. 
The  Tagal  is  as  mercurial  and  talkative  as  the  proverb- 
ial Frenchman,  while  a  Yisaya  is  a  stoic  who  would  have 
been  approved  by  Zeno  himself.  Though  nominally 
Christians,  they  preserve  their  ancient  superstitions 
almost  unmodified.  They  believe  in  devils,  in  magic,  in 
charms,  and  in  luck.  A  terrible  commentary  upon 
Spanish  rule  is  found  in  the  simple  word  "Castila. "  Its 
primary  meaning  upon  the  face  is  an  inhabitant  of 
Castile.  Its  other  meanings  are  Spaniard,  European, 
white  man,  enemy  and  devil.  The  word  is  a  small 
history  condensed  to  seven  letters.  The  native  has  one 
well  developed  virtue — he  is  fond  of  both  wife  and 
children.  In  their  defense  he  is  as  brave  as  a  lion,  and 
as  cunning  as  a  serpent.  The  warm  attachment  we  call 


•„*- 


m  *, 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES,  137 

friendship  is  almost  unknown  to  him.  The  friend  of 
to-day  is  forgotten  to-morrow,  and  the  friend  of  to-mor- 
row is  dropped  in  a  single  hour  for  a  newcomer.  He 
possesses  but  little  humor,  but  enjoys  simple  practical 
jokes  and  the  tricks  and  antics  which  pertain  to  child- 
hood and  monkeyhood.  He  thinks  it  wrong  to  pass 
between  you  and  the  sun.  The  casting  of  one's  shadow 
upon  another  person  is  apt  to  produce  mysterious  and 
terrible  results.  More  unpardonable  still  is  to  step  over 
a  person,  sick  or  well,  wounded  or  whole,asleep  or  awake. 
It  is  worst  of  all  when  the  person  is  asleep.  The  reason 
of  this  odd  belief  is  that  when  a  person  is  lying  down 
the  soul  may  escape  from  the  body,  and  that  when  a  per- 
son is  asleep  or  in  a  faint  that  the  soul  has  left  the  body, 
and  is  traveling  in  another  world.  To  step  over  a  wak- 
ing person  may  frighten  the  soul  out  of  a  body,  to  step 
over  a  sleeping  person  may  prevent  the  soul  returning  to 
its  carnal  home.  The  Malay's  code  of  morals  is  both 
strict  and  lax.  The  husband  is  profoundly  jealous  of  his 
wife  and  solicitous  as  to  her  honor,  but  he  manifests  no 
interest  whatever  in  her  morals  before  marriage,  or  in 
the  morals  of  his  daughters.  This  appears  to  be  com- 
mon to  many  races  in  the  East.  A  similar  state  of  affairs 
exists  in  Japan,  and  in  both  Java  and  Sumatra.  In 
their  social  relation  there  appears  to  survive  an  ancient 
family  or  patriarchal  system.  The  oldest  member  of  a 
house  is  obeyed  by  sons  and  grandsons,  even  though 
they  be  far  stronger  and  more  stalwart,  and  it  is  not 
uncommon  for  elders  to  give  a  sound  flogging  to  young 
men  of  their  clan  as  well  as  their  family.  A  man  is 
bound  to  help  a  brother,  cousin,  and  even  distant  cousin 
upon  the  score  of  kinship.  Thus  every  wealthy  or  well- 
to-do  native  family  has  any  number  of  hangers-on  who 
are  treated,  not  as  objects  of  charity,  but  as  persons  hav- 


138  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

ing  a  right  to  food,  clothing,  lodging  and  amusement. 
In  native  communities  troubles  and  dissensions  are  sub- 
mitted to  the  elders,  who  adjudicate  upon  them,  and 
usually  display  much  common  sense  and  equity  in  their 
judgments.  In  other  matters  there  is  no  uniformity  of 
characteristics.  The  natives  are  hospitable — some  from 
generosity,  some  from  custom,  some  from  fear,  and  some 
from  avarice. 

The  Spanish  residents  declare  the  northern  tribes, 
especially  the  Tagals,  to  be  much  better  in  these  matters 
than  the  southern  ones,  such  as  the  Visayas  and  Sulus. 
In  religions  matters  the  northern  tribes  display  little  or 
no  deep  feeling  and  none  of  the  intense  conviction  which 
marks  ignorant  Protestants  and  Catholics.  The  southern 
tribes  are  different  in  this  regard.  The  Sulus  and  the 
people  of  Mindanao,  who  are  Mohammedans,  display 
almost  as  much  ferocity  and  fanaticism  as  their  co-reli- 
gionists, the  Arabs  of  Asia  and  the  Hovendovas  of  Africa. 

The  women  are  passionately  fond  of  jewelry  and  dis- 
play, and  will  go  to  any  length  to  secure  the  means  for 
gratifying  their  wishes  in  this  regard.  Every  attractive 
piece  of  female  ornament  receives  the  greatest  care  and  is 
transmitted  by  mothers  to  their  children  generation  after 
generation. 

While  the  natives  are  cruel  it  may  be  doubted  if  they 
are  one  whit  worse  than  their  conquerors.  In  warfare 
they  do  not  sin  on  the  side  of  mercy,  neither  does  any 
other  savage  or  half  savage  race.  Neither  do  all  the  civ- 
ilized races.  It  was  not  two  years  since  the  Spaniards 
themselves  deliberately  put  over  one  hundred  luckless 
revolutionists  in  the  black  hole  at  Manila  where  they 
were  smothered  by  foul  air  before  morning,  and  in  May 
of  this  year  the  Spanish  officers  in  Manila  declared  that 
they  would  put  in  the  same  hideous  dungeon  every 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  139 

American  whom  they  captured.  The  Malays  are  kind  to 
animals.  It  may  not  bo  a  true  compassion,  it  may  be 
indifference,  but  no  Malay  ever  invented  bull  fighting, 
cock  fighting,  and  the  abominable  sport  of  stallion  fight- 
ing— all  of  which  are  cultivated  by  the  Spaniards  in  the 
Philippines  upon  a  large  scale.  Neither  does  the  Malay 
care  for  sport.  If  he  kills  fish,  flesh  or  fowl,  it  is  because 
he  is  hungry  and  intends  to  eat  what  he  captures.  The 
civilized  idea  of  sport,  of  killing  animals  for  the  sake  of 
enjoying  fine  marksmanship,  could  not  be  understood  by 
the  Mala3>-  intelligence.  What  cruelty  previously  existed 
in  the  Malay  character  cannot  have  been  very  large,  else 
the  training  and  experience  he  has  had  for  three  cen- 
turies would  have  made  him  a  fiend  incarnate. 

The  native  is  remarkable  brave.  He  will  calmly  scale 
a  cliff  where  a  single  misstep  would  cause  his  being 
dashed  to  pieces,  he  will  plunge  into  the  sea  from  the 
side  of  his  craft,  and  with  a  keen-edged  creese  attack  a 
neighboring  shark.  He  has  been  known  by  English 
sportsmen  to  attack  the  dreaded  cayman  in  the  same 
manner,  and  to  go  into  a  boa's  den  armed  only  with  a 
torch  and  knife.  To  the  native  mind  audacity  and  reck- 
lessness are  the  highest  virtues.  Spanish  control  of  the 
Philippines  has  been  based  for  three  centuries  upon  the 
feeling  in  the  native  mind  that  the  Spaniard  was  irresist- 
ible and  invincible.  The  defeat  of  Montejo  and  Augusti 
in  Manila  Bajr  has  shattered  Spanish  dominion  forever. 

If  every  United  States  soldier  were  taken  away  from 
the  Philippines,  and  a  Spanish  army  of  one  hundred 
thousand  landed  upon  its  shores,  it  would  never  again 
reduce  the  natives  to  subjection. 


140  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER   XVII. 

SOME    NATIVE    INDUSTRIES. 

THE  little  brown  men  are  industrious  in  spite  of  the 
utter  lack  of  encouragement  from  the  government,  and 
the  burdensome  taxation  which  clogs  every  wheel  of 
social  and  industrial  life.  Many  of  their  industries  are 
very  ancient,  especially  those  involving  spinning  and 
weaving,  and  the  utilization  and  manufacture  of  sea 
shells  into  useful  or  ornamental  articles.  So  strong  is 
Chinese  influence  throughout  this  land,  that  it  is  very 
difficult  to  determine  how  far  these  industries  are  in- 
digenous, and  how  far  they  have  been  taught  by  the 
patient  Monoglian  to  his  less  civilized  brother  and 
neighbor.  There  is  one  good  thing  about  John  China- 
man. Wherever  he  settles  he  carries  his  industry  with 
him.  He  believes  in  the  gospel  of  labor,  and  is  a  mis- 
sionarj"  in  its  behalf.  In  all  those  countries  in  which  he 
has  settled,  and  there  are  inferior  races,  he  has  tried  to 
teach  them  some  calling  by  which  both  scholar  and 
teacher  could  reap  a  profit.  In  Formosa  for  an  illustra- 
tion, John  Chinaman  taught  the  Hakka  and  the  Malay 
Autochthones  how  to  extract  camphor,  and  camphor  oil, 
from  the  camphor  wood,  and  how  to  make  grass  cloth. 

At  Singapore  he  has  built  up  many  industries  in  which 
some  of  his  best  workmen  are  Malays  from  that  part 
of  the  Indo-Chinese  peninsula.  In  the  Philippines  we 
know  that  he  taught  the  Malay  to  gather  and  prepare  the 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES-  141 

edible  birds'  nests,  the  shark's  fin  and  tail,  ihGbechede  la 
mer.  So,  therefore,  when  it  is  claimed  on  his  behalf  that 
he  introduced  into  Luzon  and  the  other  islands  many 
of  the  leading  native  industries,  the  probabilities  strong- 
ly favor  the  claim.  The  most  important  of  these  indus- 
tries from  a  commercial  point  of  view  is  the  manufacture 
of  those  beautiful  tissues,  pina  or  pineapple  cloth  made 
from  the  fibre  of  that  plant,  jusi  which  is  a  variety  of 
silk  weaving  and  grass  cloth,  which  is  similar  but  inferior 
to  that  of  Swatow.  All  three  cloths  are  known  and  high- 
ly appreciated  by  American  women.  Pineapple  cloth 
has  the  brilliancy  and  strength  of  silk,  and  also  the 
translucencj"  and  rigidity  which  make  it  extremely  val- 
uable for  woman's  apparel.  The  making  of  the  cloth  is 
not  a  very  complicated  process.  The  leaves  are  selected 
at  certain  periods  determined  by  the  trade,  and  are 
rotted  both  under  water  and  in  the  sun.  This  is  done 
partly  to  separate  the  long  threads  from  the  cellulose  and 
lignose  fibre,  and  also  to  free  the  threads  from  gum,  sap, 
or  foreign  matter.  These  threads  or  hairs  are  very  fine, 
and  in  color  vary  from  white  to  yellowish  white,  and 
grayish  white.  They  are  sponged  by  the  native  women, 
and  then  woven  upon  a  simple  hand  loom  which  bears  a 
strong  resemblance  to  the  loom  used  by  the  Chinese  in  the 
Swatow  and  Chow  Chow  Foo  districts.  As  the  industry 
is  taxed  and  each  loom  is  taxed,  the  natives  have  neither 
the  disposition  nor  the  capital  to  buy  the  more  expensive 
and  more  efficient  weaving  machinery  of  the  civilized 
nations.  Neither  have  they  learned  the  principles  which 
have  made  Jacquard  famous  nor  those  which  have  been 
evolved  by  native  weavers  in  India  and  China.  Even 
under  their  present  disadvantages  they  do  a  large  busi- 
ness and  supply  great  quatities  of  pina  to  both  the 
Philippine  and  foreign  markets.  There  is  still  a  demand 


142  MANILA  AND  trifc  PHILIPPINES. 

among  the  natives  for  the  curious  patterns  of  which  the 
Sarong  pattern  of  Java  is  a  good  type.  These  curious 
patterns  apparently  belong  to  the  Malay  race.  They 
may  be  described  as  geometrical  styles  in  which  older 
conventionalisms  have  been  still  futher  conventionalized 
until  they  have  lost  their  symbolic  character,  and  have 
become  merely  graceful,  or  odd  shapes  and  outlines.  In 
confirmation  of  this  view  it  may  be  noticed  that  some  of 
them  employ  a  lattice  work,  and  the  symbolic  crosses 
know  as  Svastika  which  are  found  in  Bengal;  others  em- 
ploy a  figure  similar  to  the  palm  leaf,  and  the  roughly 
sketched  lion  of  Persia.  A  third  is  an  imitation  of,  or  a 
suggestion  from,  the  bamboo  and  willow  patterns  of 
Japan.  Another  reproduces  the  giant  centipede  of  the 
tropics,  representing  the  body  by  a  long  rectangle  with 
beveled  ends,  and  the  legs  by  hundreds  of  short  parallel 
lines,  on  either  side  of  the  longer  axis  of  the  figure. 

Being  reduced  in  size  the  line  of  legs  looks  like  a  mere 
fringe,  and  this  in  turn  is  applied  to  figures  which  have 
no  similarity  to  the  centipede.  Thus,  a  circular  figure 
said  to  be  a  cocoanut  has  a  fringe  or  whiskers,  as  irrev- 
erent critics  term  it,  running  completely  around  it.  An- 
other figure  looks  like  a  modified  bishop's  miter.  This 
is  decorated  with  several  rows  of  fringe.  The  patterns 
are  printed  from  blocks,  and  worked  in  by  hand.  The 
Philippine  designers  cannot  be  mentioned  in  the  same 
breath  with  the  Javanese.  The  latter  go  so  far  as  to 
weave  historical  stories  into  their  cloths,  while  the  former 
content  themselves  with  a  limited  number  of  geometrical 
designs. 

When  it  comes  to  the  shell  industries  the  traveler 
enters  a  new  and  beautiful  industrial  world.  Here  the 
patient  little  brown  man  of  the  far  East  can  take  pride  in 
his  achievement.  Nature  has  given  him  a  marvelosu 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES  143 

storehouse  from  which  to  draw  his  materials.  There 
are  oyster  shells  of  many  species,  nearly  all  of  which  are 
utilized.  Some  are  perfectly  flat,  and  can  be  wrought 
into  sheets  or  planes,  others  are  deep  and  large,  big 
enough  in  many  cases  to  make  a  giant  punchbowl.  The 
sea  conchs  are  numerous,  and  widely  varied  in  outline 
and  color.  There  are  scores  of  other  species  marked  by 
a  rich  and  lustrous  nacre. 

And  then  comes  an  unending  multitude  of  little  shellg 
some  no  larger  than  children's  glass  beads.  In  the  shell 
industries  live  shell  is  used  to  the  exclusion  of  dead  shell 
excepting  where  a  species  is  very  scarce,  in  which  case  the 
dead  shell  is  used  although  it  does  not  bring  the  price  of 
the  live.  To  those  who  do  not  know  the  distinction 
between  the  two,  the  explanation  is  that  live  shell  means 
the  shell  of  the  living  animal,  and  dead  shell  the  shell  of 
the  dead  animal.  The  live  animals  is  caught  and  ac- 
cording to  the  nature  of  the  shell  it  is  killed  by  being 
thrown  into  boiling  water  or  by  the  attacks  of  land 
animals  such  as  ants,  fowl,  rats  or  else  it  is  cut  out  by  a 
workman  with  a  knife  or  else  it  is  buried  and  allowed  to 
decay.  When  the  animal  has  been  removed  the  shell  is 
cut  at  an  oblique  angle  to  its  axis.  Some  of  the  artisani 
employ  a  saw  and  others  use  a  clumsy  grindstone,  cutting 
it  at  one  angle  produces  a  shape  whose  general  outline  ia 
that  of  a  lop-sided  dumb  bell.  This  is  trimmed  down 
until  it  becomes  a  spoon.  According  to  the  size  of  the 
shell  or  the  part  cut,  the  finished  product  may  b«  A  tea- 
spoon dessert  spoon,  soup  spoon  ladle,  a  salt  measurer,  or 
an  ice-cream  server.  The  bowl  is  of  a  bright  golden  color 
with  a  high  luster,  and  the  outside  is  pearl  color,  gray, 
pink  or  gold  or  else  a  pretty  combination  or  mottle  of  all 
these  tints.  Despite  the  large  amount  of  labor  required 
these  spoons  are  very  cheap.  A  set  of  soup  spoons  can 


144  MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

be  bought  from  a  native  maker  for  twelve  cents  a  dozen, 
and  the  teaspoons  for  one  half  that  amount.  While  in- 
ferior in  strength  to  metal  the  shell  is  much  stronger 
than  china  or  porcelain,  and  is  more  durable  and  attrac- 
tive than  wood.  It  does  not  absorb  grease  when  used  at 
the  table,  and  is  not  iDJured  by  soap  in  washing. 

Sea  conchs  of  the  same  genus,  but  of  different  species, 
are  treated  in  the  same  manner,  and  yield  handsome 
bowls,  tureens,  vegetable  dishes,  cups,  saucers,  plates, 
pin  boxes,  jewel-cases,  card  receivers,  ash  cups, 
tobacco  jars,  and  other  curved  receptacles.  According 
to  the  shell  employed,  the  interior  is  rooe,  pink,  gold, 
amber,  or  pearl,  in  color.  At  times  these  beautiful  orna- 
ments are  mounted  with  cheap  silver  frames,  or  in 
pewter,  which  is  sent  over  from  Swatow.  An  ingenious 
trade  carried  on  upon  quite  an  extensive  basis  is  founded 
on  the  utilization  of  the  secreting  power  of  the  Philippine 
fresh  water  mussel.  This  mussel  excels  even  the  oyster 
in  the  quantity  though  not  the  quality  of  the  liquor 
which,  by  evaporation  or  separation,  produces  mother  of 
pearl.  The  Chinese  are  masters  of  the  art,  while  the 
Malays  have  proven  docile  pupils.  The  commonest  thing 
is  the  production  of  pearl  which  is  secured  by  putting 
grains  of  sand  or  circular  fragments  of  shell,  or  of  mother 
of  pearl  into  the  mussel  where  it  is  covered  with  the 
pearly  coating  in  a  week,  and  where  at  the  end  of  several 
months  it  has  become  a  seeming  pearl  although  of  poor 
quality.  Another  trick  is  the  enlargement  of  the  small 
pearls,  and  the  improvement  of  discolored  and  unshapely 
ones.  This  takes  a  longer  period,  but  is  accomplished 
without  much  exertion.  Little  figures  in  kaolin  well 
burned,  but  not  glazed,  or  disks  of  kaolin  on  which  has 
been  engraved  a  face  or  a  character,  are  put  into  the  shell 
of  the  luckless  mussel,  and  kept  there  until  they  are  also 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  145 

covered  with  a  fine  pearly  coat.  Most  ingenious  of  all 
is  the  artifice  of  fastening  to  the  lower  shell  of  the  mussel 
a  little  figure  of  a  god,  a  Svastika,  or  other  symbolic 
character,  and  there  letting  it  remain  for  many  months. 
The  growth  of  the  shell  raises  the  surface,  and  finally, 
when  it  has  reached  the  level  of  the  object  fastened,  this 
is  removed  leaving  in  the  shell  a  perfect  cast  of  all  its 
lines  and  surfaces.  The  mussel  is  then  destroyed,  and 
the  shell  sold  to  the  superstitious,  especially  to  Buddh- 
ists, and  to  Mohammedans,  the  former  reverencing  the 
excellent  reproduction  of  the  figure  of  the  great  Indian 
prince,  and  the  latter  believing  in  the  occult  virtues  of 
the  Svastika. 

An  industry  which  gives  employment  to  many  thousands 
is  based  upon  oyster  shells,  of  which  two  kinds  are  the 
most  important.  One  is  the  flat  Manila  oyster,  which, 
as  an  American  lady  said,  starts  in  life  resembling  a  dime, 
and  winds  up  looking  like  a  pieplate,  and  the  giant 
Philippine  oyster,  which  is  like  the  big  bivalve  of  our  own 
Pacific  coast.  The  shell  of  each  kind  contains  more 
nacre  than  any  belonging  to  the  American  continent.  It 
has  a  high  luster,  and  remarkable  cohesive  strength.  It 
laminates  slightly  and  cleaves  with  facility.  It  contains 
very  little  grit,  so  that  it  can  be  readily  cut  with  a  saw, 
and  ground  with  an  ordinary  grindstone.  These  shells 
are  first  caught  by  professional  gatherers,  who  sell  the 
meat  to  natives  and  Chinese,  but  not  to  Europeans;  the 
latter  find  the  flavor  unpleasant,  and  also  have  a  belief 
that  the  animals  are  more  or  less  poisonous.  The  natives 
however,  prepare  them  in  many  ways  and  pronounce  them 
a  good  food.  The  Manila  shells  are  then  split,  and 
cut  into  small  squares,  and  other  regular  shapes,  and  are 
used  as  substitutes  for  glass  in  window  frames.  When 
well  cut  and  ground  they  shut  out  about  one-half  of  the 


146  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES, 

light,  and  give  the  other  half  a  mild  irridescence  which 
is  extremely  beautiful.  Beside  shutting  out  half  the  light 
they  have  the  quality  of  mica  in  shutting  out  all  heat. 
They  are  poor  nonconductors,  and  thus  a  window,  whose 
panes  are  made  of  ground  oyster  shells,  keeps  a  room  in 
a  half  gloom  like  twilight,  and  even  alongside  of  the  win- 
dow itself  in  the  hottest  day  in  summer,  the  heat  is  no 
greater  there  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  place.  When 
the  finest  quality  of  shell  is  employed  the  irridescence  is 
more  marked,  and  the  display  more  admirable.  Occa- 
sionally a  pane,  or  an  entire  window,  is  encountered 
through  which  the  sunlight  comes  as  if  through  massive 
opals. 

Two  whiter  varieties  of  the  Manila  shells  are  cut  into 
what  the  Orientals  regard  as  graceful  or  artistic  shapes. 
Among  the  forms  are  the  palette,  the  water  lily  leaf,  the 
palm  leaf,  the  egg,  the  horseshoe  curve,  the  spear  head, 
the  shield,  both  round  and  triangular,  the  lozenge,  the 
lotus  leaf,  and  lotus  petal,  the  outline  of  a  dome  and  the 
outline  of  a  typical  Chinese  house.  The  surface  on  both 
sides  is  treated  with  the  greatest  care  so  as  to  have  each 
a  natural  cleavage  bed  or  layer  of  growth  or  else  it  is  cut 
so  as  to  bring  out  the  largest  amount  of  irridescence. 
Upon  one  side  are  then  engraved  in  low  or  high  relief  the 
figures  of  animals,  fishes,  birds  or  men, castles,  mountains 
scenery  both  landscape  and  waterscape,  until  the  plate 
becomes  a  very  handsome  sketch  or  picture  in  relief. 

Looked  at  at  right  angles  the  picture  is  hardly  visible, 
but  when  examined  by  a  reflected  light,  or  when  looked 
at  obliquely,  the  design  comes  out  clearly  and  with  a 
play  of  delicate  rainbow  tints  that  is  simplj'  delightful. 
Much  secrecy  io  observed  by  dealers  in  these  goods. 
But  according  to  rumor  the  finishing  of  the  shell  is  done 
by  the  Malays,  who  also  make  the  rougher  and  cheaper 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  147 

drawings  or  the  beginnings  of  the  good  drawings.  The 
better  drawings  and  the  finishing  stages  of  the  poor 
drawings  are  made  by  Chinese  artificers  in  Manila,  while 
the  handsomest  and  most  elaborate  are  made  by  a  guild 
of  sculptors  or  engravers  in  Canton,  China. 

None  of  the  fragments  which  can  be  possibly  utilized 
are  wasted.  Many  pieces  are  cut  into  images,  dolls  and 
figurettes.  Smaller  fragments  are  cut  into  beads  or  into 
the  cheapest  kind  of  jewelry  for  the  working  classes  of 
the  far  East.  A  neat  necklace  of  these  shell  beads  can 
be  purchased  for  a  few  cents.  Very  large  oyster  sheila 
are  made  into  objects  of  commerce  by  a  rough  treatment 
which  cleans  the  outside,  leaving  it  rough  in  texture  and 
grayish  in  color,  looking  like  a  fine  gray  sandstone,  and 
of  polishing  the  rough  places  in  the  interior  until  they 
are  almost  as  smooth  and  lustrous  as  the  rest  of  the  shell. 
These  are  exported  as  South  Sea  curios  to  Europe  and 
Asia.  Europeans  in  all  the  lands  from  Japan  to  India 
use  them  as  punch  bowls,  umbrella  stands,  and  ornaments 
for  either  side  of  the  fireplace.  Another  pretty  way  of 
employing  them  is  to  fill  them  with  water  and  making 
them  into  an  aquarium  by  having  a  few  marine  plants 
and  some  fishes.  The  demand  from  foreign  lands  for 
these  shells  extend  to  all  which  are  more  than  an  inch  in 
length.  Only  the  poorer  qualities  are  sent  away  in  bulk. 
These  are  sold  by  the  bushel  and  barrel,  and  are  fre- 
quently attainable  in  the  open  market  at  such  ridiculous 
prices  as  forty  and  fifty  cents  a  barrel.  A  third  great 
class  included  the  exquisite  shells  known  as  cowries.  Of 
these  there  are  over  eighty  species  in  the  waters  about  the 
islands.  The  tortoise-shell  cowrie,  which  is  the  favorite 
ornament  of  the  New  England  mantelpiece,  is  here  found 
in  its  finest  development.  Here  also  are  the  golden 
cowries,  the  rose  cowries,  the  pearl  cowries,  the  gray 


148  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

cowries,  and  the  other  beautiful  styles  so  loved  by  all 
students  of  conchology. 

The  shells  of  several  bivalves  are  employed  to  make  cat's- 
eyes  for  the  blue  and  white  kinds.  These  are  sold  at 
retail  to  credulous  globe  trotters  as  genuine  gems.  They 
look  very  much  like  the  originals,  and  when  freshly  cut 
and  polished  are  more  beautiful.  The  selling  price  of 
these  pretty  frauds  with  the  unwary  is  two  dollars  apiece, 
put  the  native  dealers  quickly  drop  in  their  demands 
until  they  reach  twelve  cents.  Here  they  quarrel  if  a 
further  reduction  is  insisted  upon,  so  that  the  value  or 
cost  may  be  estimated  at  about  four  cents.  These  bogus 
cat's-eyes  are  found  as  far  to  the  northeast  as  Yokohama, 
and  as  far  south  as  Australia,  and  as  far  west  as  Alexan- 
dria, Egypt.  In  this  way  the  benevolent  humbug  of  the 
Philippines  comes  in  touch  with  a  very  large  part  of  the 
civilized  world.  The  oddest  industry  in  regard  to  shells 
is  the  making  of  shell  figures.  The  basis  is  a  rough 
model  of  the  finished  article,  made  of  clay,  of  baked  clay, 
plaster  paris,  or  even  wood.  The  entire  exterior  is  made 
of  shells  or  fragments  of  shells  of  all  colors  and  kinds 
which  are  applied  to  the  model  with  strong  gluo  or  an 
adhesive  paste  or  cement.  It  is  marvelous  what  results 
can  be  obtained  with  these  simple  materials.  Cloth  is 
represented  by  tiny  snail  shells  cleaned  and  polished  and 
arranged  in  rows  all  touching  one  another.  Division 
lines  are  made  with  narrow  columnar  shells  no  thicker 
than  matches.  A  row  of  embroidery  is  made  by  lapping 
fragments  of  very  small  clam  shells,  with  well  defined 
lines  upon  their  surface.  The  features  of  the  human  face 
and  of  animal's  faces,  are  reproduced  by  shells  cut  at 
various  angles  to  obtain  some  similarity.  The  patience 
required  in  making  these  little  figures  is  very  great,  and 
the  ingenuity  is  altogether  remarkable,  A  favorite  group 


• 


"*\       ^ 

£  w 

5   o 


o 


MANILA  AND    THE  PHILIPPINES.  149 

IB  a  man  sitting  upon  a  large  fish  with  an  open  mouth, 
while  another  one  is  a  rather  well  executed  figure  of  the 
native  buffalo.  A  number  of  shells  are  found,  which,  after 
proper  cleaning  and  polishing,  are  sent  to  other  lands 
where  they  are  converted  into  a  shell  cameos.  At  one 
time  these  works  of  art  were  very  popular  in  both  Europe 
and  America.  The  shells  were  very  easy  to  cut,  and  the 
effect  was  almost  as  handsome  as  that  obtained  from  the 
stone  cameos,  which  are  extremely  difficult  and  laborious. 
The  shell  cameo  does  not  wear  well,  however,  and  after 
a  few  years  its  sharp  lines  become  smooth,  and  its  angles 
change  to  rounded  surfaces.  It  lost  its  popularity,  and 
is  esteemed  to-day  by  collectors  of  antiques.  There  is  a 
whisper  that  the  Philippine  shells  which  go  to  Italy, 
France  and  Austria,  reappear  within  the  following  year 
or  two  in  the  form  of  portraits  of  distinguished  deceased 
ancestors,  with  dates  and  memoranda  indicating  that 
they  were  made  far  back  in  the  eighteenth  or  even  the 
seventeenth  centuries.  But  this  is  a  cruel  suggestion, 
and  even  if  it  be  true  must  not  be  charged  to  the  little 
brown  men  of  Luzon. 

The  manufacture  of  hemp  and  of  hemp  and  rope  is 
partly  native  and  partly  Spanish.  The  natives  had 
learned  the  virtues  of  hemp  long  before  Magellan  had 
gone  through  the  strait  which  bears  his  name.  They 
made  an  excellent  rope,  employing  nearly  all  of  the  prin- 
ciples which  are  used  to-day  in  that  manufacture. 
Beside  twisting  the  threads  the  cords  and  strands  they 
also  braided  them,  and  with  the  braids  in  turn  made 
strands  by  both  twisting  and  a  second  braiding.  The 
braided  ropes  were  often  quite  flat,  and  were  practically 
straps  rather  than  ropes.  They  were  and  are  utilized  as 
harness  for  their  ponies  and  buffaloes  and  also  for  rigging 
upon  their  primitive  craft.  In  the  household  economy 


350  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

these  hempen  straps  were  used  for  suspending  articles 
from  beams  and  rafters  out  of  the  reach  of  rats  and  mice, 
for  the  toe  bands  of  sandals,  for  making  rude  rugs  and 
carpet  bags  and  sacking,  and  for  nearly  every  purpose  to 
which  the  leather  thong  or  strap  is  employed  by  savage 
races. 

Although  the  native  ropes  are  inferior  to  those  made 
by  Europeans  or  under  European  directions  they-  are 
strong,  durable,  and  extremely  cheap,  costing  only  a 
third  to  a  fifth  of  the  latter.  At  one  time  these  native 
styles  of  cordage  entered  into  the  commerce  of  the  coun- 
try, but  this  has  been  changed  by  the  crushing  force  of 
internal  taxation  and  of  export  duties.  These  two  mill- 
stones have  injured  every  industry  in  the  Philippines, 
and  have  put  an  end  to  several. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES  151 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

THE     ANIMAL     WORLD. 

To  an  American  traveler,  at  least,  the  animal  world  of 
the  Philippines  is  full  of  surprises,  some  pleasant  and 
others,  the  majority,  unpleasant.  Your  first  acquaint- 
anceship is  made  on  shipboard  when  sailing  along  the 
coast  in  the  night  time  and  any  light  is  burning  you  are 
bound  to  be  visited  by  strong,  flying  cockroaches,  which 
will  cross  several  miles  of  water  in  their  desire  to  reach  a 
flame.  They  are  omniverous  pests,  and  play  havoc  with 
boots,  leather  trunks,  book-covers,  and  are  said  to  take  a 
fiendish  delight  in  nibbling  the  finger  nails  and  toe  nails 
of  a  sleeper.  It  hardly  pays  to  make  a  fight  against 
these  extraordinary  insects.  You  may  kill  a  hundred 
thousand  in  the  house  so  that  the  place  looks  free  of  the 
insects,  but  the  next  morning  their  places  will  be  filled 
by  two  hundred  thousand  new  ones.  After  a  few  days 
the  traveler  gets  used  to  it,  and  after  a  few  weeks  does 
not  notice  the  little  creatures. 

On  landing  at  Manila,  probably  the  first  animal  that 
one  sees  is  the  buffalo.  Manila  is  rich  zoologically  in 
members  of  this  pachydermatous  family.  The  largest. 
and  most  imposing  is  a  livid  creature  which  may  be 
called  white  or  pink  at  pleasure,  and  which  suggests  the 
sacred  white  elephants  that  are  occasionally  shown  in 
menageries.  They  are  enormous  brutes  with  long  horns, 
that  are  often  seven  feet  from  tip  to  tip,  and  are  used  for 


152  MANILA   AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

the  heavy  hauling  and  carting  of  the  country.  They  are 
very  docile,  and  are  frequently  tended  by  native  chil- 
dren. It  is  said,  however,  that  they  have  a  malignant 
enmity  toward  all  Caucasians,  under  the  impression  that 
these  are  Spaniards  in  disguise.  There  is  a  smaller 
buffalo  similar  to  the  Chinese  species  which  has  a  black 
skin  almost  entirely  devoid  of  hair.  It  is  a  marsh  animal 
and  finds  its  chief  delight  in  burying  itself  up  to  the  neck 
in  mud  or  in  wallowing  in  a  dirty  pool.  It  is  fiercer  and 
more  dangerous  than  its  larger  white  colleague.  There 
is  a  small  buffalo  which  is  rarer  still  called  the  Tamarao, 
which  is  handsomer  in  ahape  and  more  graceful  in  move- 
ment than  any  other  member  of  the  family,  and  last  of 
this  bovine  family  is  the  wild  buffalo  which  is  the  best 
game  of  the  country.  He  is  about  as  large  as  an  alderney 
bull,  of  a  black  color,  and  a  blackish  skin,  scantily  fur- 
nished with  bristles  rather  than  hair.  His  horns  are 
large  and  extremely  sharp.  He  is  said  to  be  untamable, 
and  is  braver  and  more  reckless  than  either  lion  or  tiger. 
If  he  scents  a  man  he  bellows  and  charges.  It  makes 
no  difference  whether  it  be  one  man  or  a  hundred,  it  is 
all  the  same  to  his  belligerent  mind. 

His  habits  are  curious;  living  by  day  in  swampy  for- 
ests or  in  open  marshes,  at  night  he  comes  forth  from 
his  lair  and  invades  the  nearest  field.  As  might  be  sup- 
posed, the  natives  who  are  not  allowed  to  use  or  even  own 
firearms,  treat  him  with  the  greatest  respect.  If  they 
see  one  of  the  dreaded  creatures  approaching  ever3r  one 
of  the  party  goes  up  a  tree.  Even  then  the  vindictive 
brute  will  sometimes  remain  at  the  foot  of  a  tree,  pawing, 
snorting  and  bellowing  for  hours,  and  it  is  said  for  two 
or  three  days  waiting  for  the  man  to  come  down.  When- 
ever a  native  is  treed  he  first  prays  to  the  buffalo,  be- 
seeching him  to  go  away.  If  this  does  not  succeed  he 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  153 

then  scolds  for  an  hour  or  more.  This  failing  he  screams 
and  yells,  throws  sticks  and  branches  afc  the  quadruped, 
and  finally  throws  down  his  trousers,  the  only  article  of 
raiment  which  he  wears.  The  buffalo  stamps  on  this  and 
tears  it  until  his  rage  is  satisfied  and  then  goes  away  upon 
his  business. 

The  flesh  of  this  wild  ruminant  is  very  good  eating, 
and  is  regarded  as  a  great  delicacy  by  sportsmen.  The 
skin  makes  the  hardest  and  strongest  leather  known.  It 
13  made  into  whips,  traces,  harness,  shoestrings,  and 
other  articles  where  durability  is  required.  The  horns 
are  much  stronger  than  ordinary  horn,  and  can  be  soft- 
ened and  bent  into  various  shapes.  Some  of  the  native 
artificers  convert  it  into  cane,  hair  combs,  hair  orna- 
ments, Chinese  snuff  boxes,  and  cigarette  cases. 

The  Philippine  buffalo  bears  a  striking  resemblance  to 
the  Philippine  islander.  In  his  wild  state  he  is  fierce, 
intractable  and  cruel.  Once  broken  in  and  domesticated 
he  becomes  docile,  patient  and  long-suffering.  When 
tamed  he  is  intelligent,  affectionate  and  grateful,  and  yet 
when  imposed  upon  too  far  the  old  savage  nature  is  apt  to 
break  out  and  the  terrible  wild  beast  reassert  itself. 

Horses  are  very  numerous.  The  native  horse  or  pony 
has  already  been  referred  to  in  another  chapter,  but  in 
addition  to  him  are  the  descendants  of  those  brought  to 
the  Philippines  from  Asia  and  Europe.  The  European 
horse  does  not  thrive  in  the  country  in  the  first  genera- 
tion. In  the  second  it  holds  its  own ;  in  the  third  it  is 
acclimated,  but  it  loses  most  of  its  good  qualities.  Look- 
ing at  the  numerous  equipages  a  careful  observer  can 
detect  the  English  cob,  the  Andalusian  barb,  the  Chinese 
pony,  and  the  surdy  little  Timor  pony.  Everybody  of 
any  social  position  owns  a  horse,  and  many  of  the  wealthy 
keep  a  very  respectable  stable.  Keeping  a  horse  does 


164  MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

not  involve  a  large  expense.  Wages  and  feed  are  ex- 
tremely cheap  in  that  part  of  the  world.  A  good  horse 
boy  can  be  hired  for  about  four  dollars  a  month  in  our 
money,  and  the  keep  of  the  horse  does  not  exceed  that 
amount. 

The  deer  family  are  very  well  represented  in  the 
islands.  There  is  a  large  and  handsome  stag  which  is 
hunted  by  all  classes  on  account  of  the  many  demands 
for  different  parts  of  his  constitution.  The  sportsman 
wants  him  for  the  sake  of  the  chase,  and  the  pot  hunter 
for  the  handsome  returns  of  a  successful  shot.  The  meat 
is  tender  and  delicious,  bringing  three  and  four  times  as 
much  as  beef  in  the  open  market.  The  skin  makes  a 
handsome  and  popular  leather,  the  liver  is  highly  es- 
teemed by  the  natives,  and  most  valuable  of  all  the  young 
horns  are  regarded  by  the  Chinese  inhabitants  of  the 
islands  as  the  panacea  for  nearly  every  ill.  For  a  single 
young  horn  a  Chinaman  will  give  from  three  to  seven 
dollars.  Where  there  are  well  developed  young  horns 
the  lucky  captor  may  get  as  high  as  twenty  dollars  for 
the  horns  alone,  which  is  equal  to  the  wages  for  six 
months'  labor.  There  is  another  deer  which  is  scarcely 
as  large  as  a  goat,  and  below  this  a  still  smaller  one,  ex- 
quisitely graceful  and  very  prettily  spotted.  Most  beau- 
tiful of  all  is  the  chevrotain  or  mouse-deer,  which  is  about 
as  large  as  a  black  and  tan  terrier  and  is  the  daintiest 
most  ethereal  little  thing  in  the  world.  It  is  a  swift 
runner,  and  when  it  dashes  across  an  open  it  looks  more 
like  smoke  drifting  by  than  a  timid  and  excited  little 
animal. 

There  is  a  wild  pig  in  the  islands  which  can  be  recom- 
mended to  all  lovers  of  good  living.  He  lives  in  the 
forest,  where  he  subsists  upon  fruits,  tender  roots,  and 
large  tropical  snails.  He  is  very  cleon  in  his  habits, 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  155 

and  is  muscular  and  well-built.  His  flesh  is  the  best  meat 
in  Luzon;  Spanish  naturalists  believe  that  he  is  the 
descendant  of  Chinese  pigs  imported  many  centuries 
ago,  which  ran  wild  and  by  the  force  of  necessity 
changed  his  habits  and  habitat.  If  so  it  is  a  remark- 
able metamorphosis,  as  he  shows  few  if  any  of  the  lead- 
ing characteristics  of  his  reputed  ancestors. 

Our  best  four-footed  friend,  the  dog,  is  very  much  in 
evidence  in  the  Philippines,  but  does  not  receive  the  care 
and  attention  which  he  has  in  colder  countries.  This  is 
probably  due  to  the  climate  which  enables  him  to  live 
altogether  in  the  open.  Beside  the  breeds  familiar  to 
Americans,  there  are  at  least  three  which  are  almost  un- 
known to  the  western  world.  One  is  the  Chow  dog  which 
has  been  brought  to  the  Philippines  from  China.  He  is 
a  well  built,  powerful  animal,  with  so  long  a  coat  of  hair 
around  the  neck  and  shoulders  as  to  give  some  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  young  lion,  and  others  that  of  an  animal 
with  a  sore  throat  tied  up  in  a  hairy  blanket.  The  sec- 
ond is  a  very  small  dog,  the  Manila  terrier,  which  looks 
like  an  unhealthy  cross  between  the  black  and  tan  and  a 
French  Turnspit  dog.  It  is  a  homely  creature,  but  is 
said  to  be  very  loyal  and  intelligent.  In  striking  con- 
trast is  a  huge  dog  -which  has  aroused  much  interest 
among  naturalists.  It  is  larger  than  the  biggest  mastiff, 
and  fiercer  than  a  bulldog.  It  has  a  handsome  coat  of 
uniform  tint,  yellow,  yellow-brown,  or  brown.  That  it 
is  not  indigenous  is  almost  certain.  All  known  wild 
dogs  are  of  medium  size — about  the  same  build  and 
weight  as  the  wolf,  their  first  cousin.  The  big  dogs  seem 
to  be  the  product  of  careful  breeding  by  owners  who  de- 
sired protection  from  wild  beasts.  The  mastiff  of  Eng- 
land, the  Thibet  dog,  the  Siberian  bloodhound,  were 
originally  fighting-machines  for  their  possessors.  But  in 


156  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

the  Philippines  there  are  no  carnivora  to  render  such 
canine  types  of  service.  The  only  explanation  which  can 
be  offered  is  that  they  are  descendants  of  Chinese  blood- 
hounds, which  were  brought  over  by  traders  and  mer- 
chants in  the  early  centuries  as  a  safeguard  against 
native  pilferers. 

The  Philippines  have  two  kinds  of  civet-cats,  which 
are  not  cats  in  any  respect.  One  called  moussan  by  the 
natives,  has  gray  fur  srtipped  and  dotted  with  black.  It 
has  the  head  of  a  intton,  the  body  of  a  big  gray  squirrel, 
and  a  long  tail  with  a  curly  end  like  a  monkey.  The 
other  is  of  the  same  color  as  a  Havana  cigar,  and  looks 
like  a  small  edition  of  the  first.  A  Malay  asked  what 
these  creatures  eat,  replied :  "Everything,  sefior,  except- 
ing the  trunks  of  trees,  but  we  like  them  because  they  eat 
snake's  eggs  and  small  snakes."  Their  teeth  are  both 
carnviorous  and  insectivorous,  showing  that  they  must 
fill  an  important  place  in  nature.  Insect  and  reptilian, 
especially  ophidian  life,  is  overwhelming  in  the  Philip- 
pines, and  these  little  creatures  serve  as  a  check  upon 
their  becoming  too  destructive. 

An  animal  whose  fur  at  least  is  well  known  to  Ameri- 
cans, is  the  pretty  guiga  or  cobego,  a  flyin  -lemur.  It 
has  a  fine,  soft  and  silky  coat,  whose  color  varies  with 
each  individual.  There  are  black,  and  black  with  white 
spots,  gray,  and  gray  with  white  spots,  dark-gray  and 
light  gray,  yellow,  yellow  and  gray,  yellow  and  black, 
yellow  with  white  spots.  It  may  be  doubted  if  any 
other  wild  animal  shows  such  a  variety  of  furs.  He  is 
often  tamed,  but  does  not  thrive  in  captivity. 

The  Philippines  are  well  supplied  with  rats.  They 
have  both  the  European  and  Norwegian,  and  no  less  than 
three  kinds  peculiar  to  themselves.  One  seems  a  con- 
necting link  bewteen  the  rat  and  beaver,  having  long 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  167 

hair  and  broad  chisel-teeth.  It  is  about  the  size  of  a 
prairie-dog.  A  second  is  smaller,  but  still  much  larger 
than  those  "which  trouble  American  housekeepers.  It  is 
gray,  long-haired  and  very  daring.  Its  teeth  are  more 
canine  than  rodent  in  character.  It  is  carnivorous  and 
suggests  the  weasel  and  ferret. 

There  are  enough  bats  in  Luzon  alone  to  supply  the 
world.  They  have  about  the  same  as  we  have,  and  many 
others  from  which  we  have  been  providentially  spared. 
There  is  the  paniquet,  or  little  vampire,  whose  remarkable 
diet  consists  of  ripe  fruit  and  fresh  blood.  There  is  the 
pug-nosed  fruit-bat,  a  worthy  vegetarian.  Other  queer 
varieties  are  the  sheath-tail,  the  naked,  the  big-mouth, 
the  long-nosed,  and  the  monkey  bat.  At  nightfall  they 
are  so  numerous  about  a  house  as  to  resemble  a  great 
flight  of  birds.  Their  multitude  indicates  a  correspond- 
ingly large  amount  of  the  fruits,  insects  and  animals  on 
which  they  subsist. 

It  is  strange  how  niggardly  nature  has  been  to  the 
Philippines  in  regard  to  the  mammalia.  The  soil  is 
marvelously  rich  and  the  vegetation  rich  enough  to  sup- 
port an  innumerable  host  of  carnivorous  and  granivorous 
creatures.  Yet  there  are  none  of  the  carnivora,  not  even 
the  wildcat.  The  bear,  wolf,  fox,  jackal,  goat,  sheep 
and  cow  had  no  representative  there  at  the  time  of  the 
conquest.  Even  the  marsupials  which  are  so  abundant 
in  lands  to  the  south  and  southeast,  do  not  seem  to  have 
reached  their  shores.  That  the  place  is  well  adapted  for 
all  such  animals  is  shown  by  the  vigor  of  the  native  types 
and  the  rapid  increase  of  the  horse,  cow,  pig,  sheep,  dog, 
cat  and  monkey  brought  from  China  or  the  Malay  coun- 
tries. 

The  natives  are  not  very  skillful  hunters  as  are  those  of 
the  mainland,  so  that  there  cannot  have  been  any  such 


158  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

process  of  extermination  as  has  marked  the  passing-away 
of  the  buffalo,  panther,  puma  and  wolf  east  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi in  our  own  land.  What  little  has  been  done  by 
geologists  in  the  Philippines  fails  to  show  that  condi- 
tions were  different  at  any  point  this  side  of  the  Glacial 
epoch.  It  may  be  one  of  nature's  vagaries,  just  as  there 
are  no  snakes  in  Ireland,  and  up  to  a  late  date  no 
mosquitos  in  England.  The  distribution  of  animal  life 
is  so  dependent  upon  historic,  prehistoric  and  geologic 
causes  and  influences  that  in  spite  of  all  our  scientific 
progress  we  can  at  the  best  but  surmise  in  the  premises. 
All  facts  have  a  meaning  beyond  that  which  they  indicate, 
and  the  status  of  the  animal  world  may  contain  within  it 
the  story  of  cataclysm  or  epidemic  more  terrible  than 
can  be  imagined  by  the  traveler. 


VEGETATION    IN    LUZON   SHOWING   BAMBOOS. 

A  very  interesting  piece  of  tropical  scenery,  as  it  is  not  often  that  pictures  are 
obtained  of  growing  bamboos. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  159 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

THE  FEATHERED  POPULATION. 

THE  bird  life  of  the  Philippines  is  bewildering  in 
variety  and  beauty.  Here  and  there  familiar  faces  are 
seen,  all  of  which  have  doubtless  been  taken  by  travelers 
or  imported  by  Americans  living  in  that  part  of  the 
•world.  Canaries  are  the  favorites  of  the  people  and  sev- 
eral families  in  Manila  have  mocking  birds,  which,  if  they 
were  not  born  in  Dixie,  were  certainly  descended  from 
ancestral  southerns.  The  most  interesting  bird  is  the 
wild  cock,  who  is  the  ancestor  of  our  domestic  fowl. 
The  first  glimpse  of  this  royal  creature  shows  that  domes- 
tication may  have  improved  the  value  of  the  species  for 
commercial  purposes,  but  has  not  increased  its  beauty. 
These  wildfowl  are  wonderfully  beautiful.  The  plumage 
of  the  male  is  bronze  and  gleams  like  burnished  metal, 
varied  here  and  there  with  dashes  of  gold,  orange,  red, 
white,  or  gray.  Of  the  female  the  color  is  black,  some- 
times slightly  mottled  and  sometimes  flashed  or  speckled 
with  gray,  yellow  or  white.  They  have  fine  forms,  fly 
well,  and  the  cock  is  a  better  fighter  if  it  be  possible  than 
the  Spanish  gamecock,  who,  according  to  the  Philippine 
islanders,  is  a  direct  descendant  of  the  native  bird.  In 
the  woods  there  is  a  sand  fowl  which  looks  like  a  poorly- 
bred,  small-sized  yellow  and  fluffy  Plymouth  rock.  There 
is  a  very  beautiful  pheasant  whose  plumage  is  halfway 
between  that  of  the  pheasant  and  the  peacock.  There 


160  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

are  other  varieties  each  with  its  own  native  name, varying 
in  size  and  color.  Altogether  there  must  be  a  dozen 
types  of  fowl  which  are  novel  to  a  traveler  from  the 
United  States.  The  pigeon  family  makes  an  equally 
handsome  display.  The  batu  batu  has  a  brilliant,  long 
ruff  around  the  neck,  and  both  ruff  and  all  the  feathers 
look  exactly  like  an  emerald  of  the  first  water.  When  a 
bird  rests  in  a  tree  it  is  easily  distinguished  by  the 
greater  intensity  and  brilliancy  of  its  color,  and  no 
matter  how  rich  the  green  of  the  foliage.  There  is  the 
Pigeon  of  the  Crucifixion,  named  by  some  devout  priest 
in  bygone  years,  whose  back  and  wings  are  an  exquisite 
slate-blue,  and  whose  neck,  breast  and  belly  are  of  snow- 
white.  In  the  very  middle  of  the  breast  is  a  great  splash 
of  scarlet,  so  deep  in  color  as  to  look  exactly  like  a  drop 
of  blood.  The  first  time  a  stranger  sees  one  he  is  bound 
to  sympathize  with  the  poor  dove  in  the  belief  that  it  has 
been  dangerously  wounded.  There  are  several  large 
birds  of  the  eagle  family,  of  which  the  finest  and  hand- 
somest is  the  sea  eagle  or  Lao  Win.  He  appears  to  be  a 
bird  of  liberal  tastes,  and  when  fish  are  scarce  does  not 
object  to  a  diet  of  chicken,  pheasant,  small  deer  or  a 
snake.  His  strength  is  tremendous,  he  having  been 
known  to  carry  off  a  fish  three  feet  long,  weighing  eigh- 
teen or  twenty  pounds.  He  is  a  favorite  subject  of  song 
and  story  with  the  Malays,  who  have  built  around  him 
many  myths,  some  based  seemingly  upon  fact  and  others 
pure  creations  of  the  fancy.  One  story  says  that  during 
the  mating  season  he  selects  his  prey  according  to  the 
wishes  of  his  wife  and  never  eats  anything  which  he 
catches  until  he  has  taken  it  home  to  the  eyrie  and 
allowed  her  to  eat  what  she  desires  before  he  touches  a 
morsel.  One  thing  is  certain,  he  is  a  model  of  conjugal 
virtue.  He  helps  his  mate  build  the  nest  and  during 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  161 

hatching  and  the  feeding  of  the  young  ones,  until  they 
can  fly,  he  is  indefatigable  in  relieving  the  mother  in 
every  way  possible.  When  she  leaves  the  nest  to  wash 
herself  and  drink  a  little,  he  will  either  take  her  place 
and  perform  her  functions  or  else  he  will  perch  on  the 
nest  with  his  wings  half  open  as  if  ready  to  attack  any 
invader  of  his  home.  Another  story  declares  that  when- 
ever he  sees  a  poisonous  water  snake  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  one  of  his  fishing  grounds,  he  attacks  and 
destroys  it  if  it  be  a  small  serpent,  but  if  it  be  large  he 
soars  away  and  soon  returns  with  a  lot  of  comrades  who 
with  him  destroy  the  foe. 

According  to  another  legend  he  is  vengeful  and  vin- 
dictive. Once  a  powerful  chief  living  near  Jala  Jala, 
determined  to  put  an  eagle's  nest  in  his  royal  hut. 
Against  the  protests  of  the  wise  men  of  the  tribe  he  suc- 
ceeded in  killing  the  mother  and  wounding  the  father, 
who  was  a  young  bird,  in  the  wing.  He  described  his 
exploit  with  great  glee,  expressing  sorrow  that  he  had 
not  killed  or  caught  the  male  on  account  of  its  strange 
plumage,  which  beside  being  black  and  white  had  upon 
the  wings  and  tail  great  splashes  of  flame  color. 

One  of  the  old  men  of  the  village  told  him  that  he  had 
committed  a  great  error,  and  that  the  bird  would  return 
some  time  for  vengeance.  A  year  passed,  during  which 
time  no  sea  eagle  was  seen  near  the  village.  This  was 
very  strange,  because  they  had  been  plentiful  before  and 
also  because  the  small  bird,  which  is  the  eagle's  jackal  or 
familiar,  was  there  the  same  as  ever.  About  nesting  time 
a  hunter  informed  the  chief  that  several  eagles  had  built 
nests  high  up  on  an  inaccessible  crag  many  miles  away 
from  the  place.  The  site  was  very  inhospitable,  and  had 
never  been  used  by  the  eagles  before.  Several  weeks 
passed,  and  one  day  there  was  a  terrible  scream  from 


162  MANILA   AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

behind  the  chief's  hut.  The  savages  rushed  to  the  spot 
and  found  the  chief's  wife  lying  senseless  with  some 
terrible  gashes  on  her  face  and  throat,  but  of  her  little 
three  months'  old  babe  they  found  not  a  trace.  When 
the  woman  came  to  she  said  that  something  had  cut 
her  from  behind,  and  that  she  screamed  and  became 
unconscious. 

The  following  year  when  the  poor  woman  had  another 
child  the  same  thing  occurred,  and  this  time  she  was 
killed  and  the  babe  taken  away,  but  the  murderer  was 
seen.  It  was  a  huge  eagle,  larger  than  any  that  had  ever 
been  known  in  the  country,  with  brilliant  black  and  white 
plumage,  and  on  the  wings  and  tail  feathers  splashes  of 
red.  The  chief,  wild  with  rage  and  grief,  organized  a 
great  party  of  hunters,  and  taking  the  man  who  had  seen 
the  nests  the  year  before  as  a  guide,  went  up  into  the 
mountains  where  they  were.  They  came  to  the  cliff  and 
there  upon  the  ground  far  beneath  the  nests,  which  were 
perched  high  up  above  them,  were  the  bones  of  two  little 
children,  some  white  and  blanched,  and  some  but  a  few 
days  dead.  The  chief,  frenzied  at  the  sight,  climbed  up 
the  cliff  where  no  other  warrior  in  the  party  could  follow. 
Halfway  up,  two  great  birds,  one  of  which  had  red 
splashes  on  its  wings  and  tail,  suddenly  appeared  upon 
the  scene  and  attacked  the  reckless  climber.  The  men 
shouted  from  below,  and  the  chief  turned  in  time  to  see 
his  foe.  He  gave  a  wild  warcry,  threw  himself  madly  at 
the  bird,  and  with  it  clasped  fiercely  struggling,  fell 
headlong  to  the  rocks  below. 

Parrots  are  very  nice  birds  when  you  have  one  or  two 
of  them.  When  you  have  ten  your  neighbors  usually 
complain  of  you  to  the  Board  of  Health.  But  in  the 
Philippines  there  are  apparently  several  billions  of  that 
interesting  family  of  creatures.  There  are  parrots  and 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES  163 

paroquets,  and,  worst  of  all,  huge  white  cockatoos  with 
topknots  resembling  lettuce.  The  parrots  are  green, 
yellow,  scarlet,  black  and  blue,  in  fact,  of  apparently 
every  color  of  the  rainbow.  They  are  rapacious  thieves, 
and  are  the  dread  of  every  poor  farmer  and  fruit  grower. 
As  for  their  noise  it  is  always  bad  and  discordant.  Dur- 
ing the  mating  season  and  also  at  the  change  of  the  mon- 
soons, they  hold  mass  meetings  and  make  an  uproar 
alongside  of  which  pandemonium  is  a  Quaker's  gathering. 

If  any  one  wants  to  speculate  in  parrots  let  him  go  to 
Luzon  or  Mindanao  and  get  a  shipload.  If  his  ambitions 
are  larger  he  can  get  ten  shiploads.  In  fact,  the  natives 
would  be  so  glad  to  dispose  of  the  bird  that  they  would 
sell  them  for  less  than  what  they  do  now,  which  is  about 
five  cents  a  parrot. 

The  lakes  and  marshes  are  a  paradise  for  duck  hunters. 
They  are  of  all  colors,  sizes,  and  habits.  Some  are  what 
may  be  called  respectable  birds,  and  eat  a  mixed  diet  of 
worms,  roots  and  mud  like  ducks  at  home,  and  conse- 
quently taste  about  the  same.  Birds  of  this  class  can  be 
bought  in  the  market  for  about  eight  or  nine  cents  apiece. 
Another  variety  lives  upon  water  spinach  and  other 
marine  plants,  and  tastes  very  much  like  canvas  back  but 
is  much  fatter.  A  third  variety  picks  out  small  fishes, 
ancient  bivalves  and  decayed  crustaceans,  and  has  a  taste 
which  consumptive  people  says  is  like  a  poor  quality  of 
cod-liver  oil;  while  a  fourth  variety  lives  upon  some  vil- 
lainous roots  or  grasses  which  ought  to  poison  the  eater, 
but  which  by  some  strange  law  of  Providence  enables  the 
duck  to  almost  poison  his  eater.  The  tame  ducks  have 
been  brought  over  from  China  and  are  excellent.  They 
are  raised  on  small  duck  farms  very  much  the  same  as  at 
Canton,  and  make  exceedingly  good  eating.  Mention 
must  be  made  of  one  little  bird  which  brings  a  never- 


164  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

ending  stream  of  wealth  into  the  Philippines.  That  is 
the  world-famous  sea  swallow  which  builds  the  nest,  sold 
to  Chinese  the  world  over  for  making  birds'-nest  soup. 
These  little  creatures  are  not  true  swallows,  but  really 
sea  birds.  They  are  found  hundreds  of  miles  at  sea,  and 
repair  to  the  land  only  during  the  mating  and  nesting 
season.  The  gum  which  they  gather  is  as  much  a  mys- 
tery to-day  as  it  ever  was.  Some  authorities  claim  that 
it  is  a  special  salivary  secretion  of  the  bird's  mouth,  while 
others  with  more  plausibility  declare  that  it  is  a  gum 
gathered  from  the  sea,  analagous  to  the  pulp  of  the  jelly 
fish  and  the  flesh  tissue  of  the  sea  anemone.  A  third  class 
hold  a  combination  view,  namely :  that  it  is  sea  slime 
which  has  been  acted  upon  by  the  fluids  in  the  bird's 
mouth.  At  any  rate  the  swallows  apply  this  slime,  glue 
or  gum  which  is  white,  yellow  or  brown  in  color,  to  walls 
of  vertical  cliffs  and  caverns,  and  with  it  fasten  sticks 
and  straws  together  until  what  with  glue  and  fiber  they 
make  a  wall  pocket  in  which  they  lay  their  eggs  and 
hatch  them.  This  glue  oxidizes  slightly  on  the  outside 
and  hardens  so  that  it  is  scarcely  affected  by  either  rain 
or  storm  spray.  It  is  collected  by  experts  both  Malay 
and  Chinese,  the  labor  being  hard  and  dangerous.  In 
some  cases  the  gatherer  is  let  down  from  the  top  of  high 
cliffs  from  fifty  to  several  hundred  feet,  and  secures  the 
nests  from  the  rocky  walls  or  from  the  interior  of 
recesses.  Sometimes  the  gatherer  enters  caverns  at  the 
base  of  the  rocks  at  low  tide  and  obtains  the  nests  from 
the  sides  above  high-water  mark.  In  the  former  case  the 
rope  often  breaks  or  is  cut  through  by  the  wearing  of  the 
strands  on  the  rock,  and  in  the  latter  case  the  tide-sharks 
and  poisonous  sea  serpents  put  an  end  to  his  ventures. 
The  nests  when  first  gathered  are  quite  dirty  and  are 
carefully  cleaned  by  hand.  It  takes  considerable  skill  to 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  165 

do  this  work,  and  only  skilled  operators  are  allowed  to 
perform  it.  When  the  glue  is  finally  freed  from  all  for- 
eign matters  it  looks  a  great  deal  like  a  small  cup  made 
out  of  spruce  gum.  It  is  done  up  in  nests  and  sold  to 
Mongolian  epicures.  The  finest  quality  is  almost  white 
and  brings  as  high  as  eighty  and  ninety  dollars  gold  for 
a  dozen,  weighing  scarcely  more  than  a  pound.  The 
dark-brown  opaque  and  dirty -looking  nests  are  the  cheap- 
est, but  these  bring  even  from  ten  dollars  a  pound 
upward.  The  trade  is  very  large  and  is  said  to  bring  in 
over  a  million  dollars  a  year  from  well-to-do  Chinamen 
all  over  the  world. 

The  Chinese  citizens  of  the  Philippines,  who  are  numer- 
ous in  the  cities,  are  great  bird  fanciers,  and  cultivate 
thrushes,  mongolian  larks,  and  most  melodious  of  all,  the 
Mina  bird.  This  is  a  small  black  bird,  which  suggests  a 
minature  edition  of  the  crow.  There  is  a  little  dash  of 
red  upon  its  forehead  which  gives  him  rather  a  jaunty 
appearance.  He  is  said  to  be  carnivorous,  and  to  the 
author's  own  knowledge  evinces  rare  delight  over  a  dish- 
ful of  chopped  raw  meat. 

Every  scientist  who  goes  to  the  Philippines  discovers 
some  new  species  of  birds.  Gironiere  compiled  a  list  of 
one  hundred  and  seventy  species,  the  Verreaux  brothers 
increased  this  list  to  four  hundred  and  fifty,  Dr.  Semper 
added  some  eight  or  ten,  and  each  of  the  late  naturalist 
expeditions  to  the  islands  have  added  from  ten  to  twenty 
apiece. 


166  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

FISHES    AND    EEPTILES. 

A  VISIT  co  the  fish  market  of  Manila  discloses  that  both 
fresh  and  salt  water  afford  an  inexhaustible  supply  of 
food.  Nearly  all  are  more  or  less  strange  to  the  Ameri- 
can eye  but  bear  enough  resemblance  to  our  own  types  to 
seem  half  familiar.  There  is  a  medium-sized  chunky  fish 
with  large  head  and  mouth  which  resembles  the  rock  cod, 
but  is  better  eating.  There  is  an  excellent  sole  and  a  very 
good  fish  which  resembles  the  mullet.  A  handsome  fish 
is  one  which  is  very  long,  narrow,  and  silver-like  in  its 
color.  There  is  also  a  large,  dark-colored  heavy  fish  with 
excellent  meat  and  few  bones.  The  oddest  fish  is  the 
candole,  which  ranges  as  large  as  three  feet  in  length. 
It  has  no  scales,  a  large  head  and  mouth,  and  for  its 
armament  three  large  stiletto-like  horns.  One  is  on  the 
back,  at  the  end  of  the  fin,  and  one  on  each  side  of  the 
chest.  They  grow  from  an  inch  to  two  inches  in  length, 
have  needle  points  and  saw  teeth  on  the  edges.  They 
not  alone  stab  and  cut,  but  appear  to  be  poisonous  as  well. 
Any  person  stabbed  by  one  of  these  spines  is  treated 
about  the  same  as  if  it  were  a  dog  bite.  The  wound  is 
cauterized,  or  washed  with  strong  ammonia  water.  "When 
the  fish  is  feeding,  or  undisturbed,  the  spines  lie  flat  to 
the  body,  but  at  the  slightest  indication  of  danger  they 
spring  up  and  out,  and  there  remain  until  the  danger  is 
past.  They  are  moved  by  very  powerful  muscles  or  car- 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  167 

tilages,  and  appear  to  be  controlled  by  involuntary  as 
well  as  voluntary  nerves.  When  one  of  these  fishes  is 
harpooned  or  shot  suddenly,  the  seines  remain  standing 
and  will  break  sheer  across  before  they  can  be  depressed 
by  main  force.  They  appear  to  be  a  very  excellent  pro- 
tection as  they  are  shunned  by  nearly  all  the  large  fishes. 

There  are  several  kinds  of  crustaceans,  all  palatable 
and  nutritious.  One  is  a  prawn  or  crayfish  about  twice 
the  size  of  a  Florida  prawn.  Another  is  a  crayfish  about 
four  or  five  inches  in  length.  A  third  is  a  little  shrimp 
about  an  inch  long  and  a  sixteenth  of  an  inch  in  diameter 
and  a  fourth  is  a  prawn,  called  the  camerron  or  cam- 
erony.  A  peculiar  thing  about  these  organisms  is  that 
they  are  gray  and  translucent  when  alive  and  some  almost 
transparent,  but  when  thrown  into  boiling  water,  or  when 
baked,  they  assume  the  same  rich  red  as  the  crab  and  the 
lobster. 

The  shark  has  almost  as  hard  a  time  on  the  east  side  of 
the  China  Sea  as  on  the  west.  The  demand  for  the  tail 
and  especially  the  fins  by  the  Chinese  and  the  Japanese, 
has  made  that  savage  denison  of  the  sea  the  favorite  prey 
of  every  fisherman,  Mongolian  and  Malay.  Those  who 
go  to  the  Philippines  after  having  read  the  yellow-covered 
novels  of  America  and  England  in  which  the  China  Sea 
is  depicted  as  being  full  of  man-eating  sharks,  are  griev- 
ously disappointed  at  finding  fewer  large  specimens  in 
that  part  of  the  world  than  upon  the  Atlantic  coast  of  the 
American  or  European  continents.  An  observer  can 
easily  understand  the  reason  when  in  the  market  he  sees 
good  edible  fishes  sold  for  a  few  cents  a  pound,  and 
shark's  fins  scarce  at  fifty,  and  sixty  cents  a  pound.  As 
a  matter  of  fact  the  fish  is  being  exterminated,  and  would 
have  vanished  from  those  waters  if  the  supply  had  not 
been  replenished  from  the  Pacific  and  Indian  oceans. 


168  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

Even  "with  that  supply  the  average  shark  in  the  markets 
is  seldom  more  than  three,  or  three  and  a  half  feet  long. 

The  reptilian  life  is  very  extensive.  The  largest  and 
most  dangerous  is  the  cayman  or  eastern  alligator.  It 
grows  to  very  great  size  some  specimens  being  twelve  and 
fourteen  feet  in  length.  The  Spaniards  themselves  are 
too  lazy  to  hunt  these  fierce  saurians,  and  as  they  do  not 
permit  the  natives  to  own  firearms  the  latter  are  unable 
to  wage  any  successful  war  upon  the  monsters.  They 
inhabit  the  streams,  lakes  and  marshes,  and  every  year 
kill  many  men,  horses,  buffaloes  and  smaller  animals. 
They  have  the  low  cunning  which  distinguishes  all  the 
varieties  of  the  reptile,  and  will  be  a  terror  to  the  Philip- 
pines until  the  natives  are  permitted  to  use  the  rifle  for 
their  own  defense.  In  striking  contrast  with  the  cay- 
mans are  the  iguanas  or  large  land  and  marsh  lizards. 
The  biggest  is  a  giant  often  eight  feet  and  a  half  in 
length.  It  is  of  a  greenish  brown  color  dotted  with 
yellow  spots.  It  is  a  true  amphibian,  living  upon  smaller 
land  and  water  organisms.  Despite  his  size  and  strength 
he  is,  if  not  cowardlj%  at  least  inoffensive,  and  is  killed 
by  the  natives  with  impunity.  The  crested  iguana  is 
another  type  of  lizard,  looking  something  like  the  carica- 
ture of  a  knight  in  armor.  It  is  of  a  yellowish  gray 
color,  and  is  as  harmless  as  its  bigger  cousin.  There  are 
other  and  still  smaller  varieties,  differing  in  color  and 
proportion.  They  are  all  ugly  and  harmless.  But  to 
the  credit  of  the  iguana  family  be  it  said  that  they  are 
all  good  eating.  Their  flesh  is  white,  tender,  and  well 
flavored.  Its  taste  is  about  halfway  between  chicken  and 
turtle  steaks,  and  is  good,  no  matter  in  what  style  it  may 
be  cooked.  Iguana  eggs  are  almost  exactly  like  turtle 
eggs  and  are  equally  delicious  and  nourishing. 

There  is  another  lizard  in  the  Philippines  which,  though 


MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES.  169 

harmless  is  upon  first  acquaintance  an  unpleasant 
neighbor.  It  is  known  as  the  chacon  or  tacon,  and  is 
about  a  foot  long.  The  coloring  is  like  that  of  a  crazy 
quilt,  being  gray,  brown,  black,  yellow,  blue,  and  red. 
"When  the  skin  is  well  tanned  it  makes  a  beautiful 
material  for  pocketbooks,  belts  and  other  articles  of 
personal  wear.  The  chacon 's  peculiarity  is  its  extraor- 
dinary power  of  holding  on  to  anything  by  suction.  The 
feet  are  large,  and  the  toes  are  the  framework  upon  which 
is  stretched  a  stout  elastic  and  muscular  membrane.  This 
can  be  raised  into  hollow  cups  at  will,  and  by  so  doing 
produces  a  vacuum  in  each  cup,  rendering  it  like  the 
leather  suckers  used  by  boys  at  play.  If  they  get  on  a 
person  it  is  very  difficult  to  take  them  off,  so  fast  do  their 
pneumatic  valves  attach  themselves  to  the  body.  They 
have  a  curious  cry  which  is  said  to  sound  exactly  like 
their  name.  To  an  uninstructed  ear  it  sounds  very  much 
like  a  hoarse  sneeze  followed  by  a  well-defined  grunt. 

In  the  woods  there  are  flying  lizards  or  dragons  so- 
called.  The  structure  of  these  graceful  creatures  is  like 
that  of  the  flying  squirrel,  or  flying  lemur;  a  long  thin 
membrane  extending  from  the  body  and  the  sides  of  the 
four  legs  and  hind  legs,  so  as  to  form  an  aeroplane  when 
the  limbs  are  extended  their  full  length. 

The  snake  family  has  attained  a  full  development  in 
these  lands.  The  great  boa  has  already  been  described. 
It  is  one  of  the  largest  if  not  the  largest  snake  known. 
But  very  few  attain  great  size.  Those  of  enormous  size, 
running  over  thirty  feet  in  length,  are  extremely  rare. 
There  are  younger  and  smaller  ones  from  fifteen  to  twenty 
feet  which  may  constitute  a  tenth  of  the  snake  world, 
and  then  there  are  ninety  per  cent,  still  younger,  and 
smaller  ones  which  are  under  ten  feet.  The  Philippine 
boa  is  undoubtedly  undergoing  extermination  through 
commercial  and  industrial  causes. 


170  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

The  skin  makes  a  capital  leather,  and  is  used  for  scab- 
bards, creese  handles,  valises,  and  fancy  leather  work. 
There  is  a  good  demand  for  it  in  China  and  other  orien- 
tal countries.  This  in  itself  would  create  a  very  large 
slaughter  every  year,  but,  in  addition,  nearly  every  native 
tribe  likes  the  meat.  Many  Europeans,  who  have  tried  it 
from  curiosity  or  necessity,  have  also  taken  a  liking  for 
it,  and  use  it  occasionally  upon  the  table.  The  boa  itself 
has  its  own  natural  enemies,  BO  that  it  has  been  suffering 
an  ever  increasing  persecution  with  the  years.  In  the 
past  twenty-five  years  the  destructive  causes  have  been 
increased  by  the  demand  from  zoological  gardens,  and 
the  exertions  of  traveling  naturalists  and  scientific  expe- 
ditions. 

There  are  several  other  snakes  of  the  constrictor  family, 
of  which  the  leading  members  resemble  the  small  rock 
python,  the  black  snake,  and  the  brown  snake  of  Central 
Europe.  The  poisonous  snakes  are  unpleasantly  numer- 
ous. There  is  a  small  serpent  of  a  dull  color  which  lies 
near  the  road  and  attacks  almost  without  provocation. 
Its  bite  is  as  fatal  as  that  of  a  rattlesnake.  It  is  known 
as  the  rice-leaf,  on  account  of  a  fancied  resemblance  be- 
tween it  and  rice  leaves,  when  they  have  attained  their 
growth  and  begun  to  wither.  There  is  a  large  poisonous 
snake  known  as  the  alinmorani,  which  is  sometimes  eleven 
feet  long,  but  which  averages  about  six  feet.  It  is  ex- 
tremely venomous,  aggressive,  and  persistent.  Like  the 
moccasin  and  copperhead,  it  is  easily  killed  by  a  blow 
with  a  pole  or  long  stick.  Large  numbers  of  people  die 
from  snake  bites  in  the  islands,  but  the  fact  seems  to 
excite  little  comment. 

There  are  many  water  serpents,  nearly  all  of  them 
poisonous.  The  Bay  of  Manila  has  two  species  which  are 
famous.  One  is  a  gray  snake  dotted  in  black  and  yellow, 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  171 

from  two  to  five  feet  long.  It  is  not  poisonous, 
but  is  certainly  the  ugliest  snake  extant.  The  hooded 
snake  of  India  is  exceedingly  repulsive,  and  the  African 
puff  adder  is  horrible  to  look  at,  but  this  creature  in 
Manila  Bay  is  simply  loathsome.  The  other  one  is  a  long 
greenish,  or  yellow-greenish  sea  serpent,  unspeakably 
hideous,  clumsy,  but  swift  in  its  movements,  and  deadly 
in  its  bite.  It  is  a  scourge  to  the  fishermen,  who  endeavor 
to  kill  it  wherever  possible. 

At  Manila  there  is  a  feudal  custom  still  in  vogue  per- 
taining to  fishers  and  fishing,  which  is  more  than  a  sur- 
prise to  one  born  in  the  freedom  of  democracy.  It  is  the 
sale  by  the  government  of  the  pescary  of  the  bay,  or  the 
local  fishing  concession.  The  sale  is  held  at  stated  inter- 
vals, and  the  buyer,  who  is  usually  a  shrewd  speculator, 
pays  a  large  amount  of  money  for  the  bargain.  This  gives 
him  the  exclusive  right  to  take  fish  from  the  waters  of 
the  bay  during  the  term  of  the  concession,  and  legally 
makes  him  the  owner  of  every  fish  in  the  waters  during 
that  period.  He  issues  licenses  to  fishermen  and  sporting 
men.  From  the  former  he  usually  exacts  a  fixed  sum, 
and  a  percentage  as  large  as  he  can  make  it  of  the  proceeds 
of  all  the  fish  they  catch.  From  the  sportsman  he  takes 
a  lump  sum  per  individual,  per  party,  per  boat,  and  per 
day.  To  protect  him  the  law  makes  it  a  crime  for  any 
man  to  take  a  fish  from  the  water  without  first  having  a 
license,  or  written  permission  from  the  concessionaire. 
The  author  was  assured  by  a  prominent  citizen  of  Manila 
that  starving  Malays,  who  had  been  caught  taking  fish 
from  the  bay  with  which  to  keep  their  families  alive  had 
been  thrown  into  jail  for  the  offense,  and  that  on  more 
than  one  occasion  the  offender  has  been  shot  by  a  soldier 
or  policeman  for  trying  to  escape  with  a  fish  which  he 
had  caught.  This  extraordinary  and  unjust  law  is,  it 


172  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

must  be  confessed,  not  altogether  peculiar  to  Spain.  It 
prevailed  through  a  large  part  of  Europe  during  the  feu- 
dal period,  and  it  survives  in  a  few  places  in  Great  Brit- 
ain at  the  present  time.  In  Great  Britain  it  is  confined 
to  streams,  ponds,  and  lakes,  which  were  private  property, 
when  their  owner  sold  to  third  parties  the  right  to  the 
fish  they  contained.  In  the  course  of  years  the  right 
became  a  charge,  or  easement  upon  the  land  under  the 
stream  or  pond.  Like  most  easements  it  was  made  into 
a  legal  entity,  and  thence  into  specific  property ;  so  that 
finally  the  land  might  belong  to  one  man,  and  the  right 
to  fish  in  the  water  on  the  land  to  his  worst  enemy. 
English  jurisprudence  and  legislation  have  undermined 
this  right,  and  made  it  nearly  obsolete.  The  British 
government  itself  would  never  dream  of  enforcing  or 
creating  such  a  right  for  its  own  benefit.  But  Spain,  true 
to  its  Bourbon  traditions,  keeps  up  her  practice,  which 
may  have  been  of  benefit  in  the  dark  ages,  but  is  certainly 
a  stigma  upon  its  civilization  to-day. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  173 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

GARDEN,  FARM  AND  FOREST. 

UNLIKE  the  China  coast,  where  there  are  long  miles  of 
sterile  rocky  shore,  there  does  not  seem  to  be  a  spot  in 
the  Philippines  excepting  around  active  volcanoes  where 
there  is  not  an  exuberant  vegetation.  Nowhere  can  be 
found  a  nobler  variety  of  the  color  green.  Its  most  deli- 
cate tinge  is  found  in  newly  sprouting  paddyfiells,  where 
the  young  rice  plant  sends  forth  a  shoot  which  is  white, 
with  just  enough  green  and  gold  to  give  it  character.  At 
the  other  end  of  the  extreme  is  a  wild  grass  which  grows 
on  the  hillsides  so  dark  that  it  seems  black  when  looked 
at  in  most  lights.  There  are  pale  greens  which  are 
almost  like  the  exquisite  uranium  glass  of  Bohemia. 
There  are  silver  greens  brighter  and  more  metallic  than 
the  silver  maple  of  New  England ;  there  are  bronze  greens 
that  seem  as  if  they  had  been  varnished  with  metallic 
paint.  There  is  a  wilderness  of  flowers.  Foreign  mer- 
chants have  brought  from  everj'  part  of  the  world  floral 
souvenirs  of  home,  and  many  have  taken  kindly  to 
their  new  environment.  The  geranium,  so  difficult  of 
nurture  in  the  north  becomes  a  perfect  weed  in  the  gar- 
dens and  fields  of  Manila.  The  heliotrope  grows  into  a 
great  bush  five  and  six  feet  high,  a  dozen  feet  in  diame- 
ter, weighed  down  with  such  a  load  of  blossoms  that  the 
perfume  fills  the  air  for  a  hundred  yards  in  every  direc- 
tion. The  wistaria  thrives  as  does  the  superb  Bougain- 


174  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

•villa,  with  its  cataract  of  orange  gold.  Eoses  flourish,  but 
require  constant  supervision  in  order  to  obtain  handsome 
buds  and  flowers.  Unfamiliar  flowers  meet  the  eye  at 
every  step.  At  one  point  the  visitor  sees  a  clumsy  red 
tulip  tree,  at  another  an  acacia  in  full  bloom  looks  at  a 
distance  like  a  great  banner  of  scarlet  surrounded  by 
rich  green.  The  banaba  tree  covers  itself  every  year 
with  beautiful  flowers  of  the  richest  violet.  The  orange 
and  lemon  are  here  at  home,  and  produce  their  exquisite 
blossoms  by  tens  of  thousands.  There  are  lilies  of  all 
varieties,  from  the  great  tigers  down  to  diminutive  spider 
lilies,  from  the  narcissus  and  proud  gladiolas  down  to 
grass  lilies  almost  as  humble  as  the  daisy  and  violet. 

Flowers  are  so  common  that  they  lose  much  of  their 
significance.  When  a  bouquet  two  feet  in  diameter  can 
be  had  for  five  cents  or  a  basket  of  a  thousand  flowers  for 
ten  or  twelve,  one  is  apt  to  become  a  little  bit  tired,  and 
when  to  this  is  added  a  never-ending  blaze  of  colors  in 
your  yard,  masses  of  blossoms  and  clouds  of  perfume  upon 
every  road, bouquets  in  every  room,  and  loose  flowers  upon 
the  tablecloth  at  every  meal,  and  tubs  and  pots  of  bright 
plants  in  every  window,  veranda  and  hallway,  the  beauty 
palls  upon  you,  no  matter  how  deep  your  love  for  the 
treasures  of  the  vegetable  kingdom.  If  the  flowers  are 
numerous  the  fruits  are  not  less  so,  but  few  of  the  north- 
ern fruits  are  found  in  the  Philippines.  Of  the  native 
fruits  the  mango  is  the  monarch,  if  it  be  not  the  king  of 
all  fruits.  Those  who  have  eaten  the  Cuban,  Brazilian, 
Venezuelan, Central  American  and  Hawaian  varieties,have 
a  treat  in  store  for  them — if  they  do  not  know  and  cannot 
imagine  the  indescribable  superiority  of  the  Manila  mas- 
terpiece. It  is  shaped  something  like  a  pear,  and  is  of  a 
deep  gold  or  red-gold  color.  It  ranges  from  three  to  six 
inches  in  length,  from  two  to  three  inches  in  width,  and 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  175 

from  one  to  two  and  half  inches  in  thickness.  The  in- 
terior is  a  pulp  or  cream  of  rich  gold. 

That  prime  favorite,  the  banana,  is  represented  by 
fifty  distinct  varieties.  Each  is  excellent,  but  all  of  them 
pale  before  the  kind  known  as  the  Lacatan.  This  pos- 
sesses a  golden  pulp  and  a  flavor  and  perfume  that  are 
almost  those  of  the  pineapple.  All  the  banana  family  are 
favorite  foods,  and  are  prepared  in  various  ways.  Among 
these  are  banana  fritters,  banana  ice  cream,  fried  banana, 
a  macedoine  of  banana,  orange  and  pineapple,  banana 
pudding  and  banana  custard. 

The  papaw,  which  flourishes  in  the  central  and  southern 
States  of  America,  reaches  a  larger  size  and  finer  flavor  in 
the  Philippines.  The  pulp  contains  a  vegetable  principle 
or  ferment  resembling  pepsin,  which  gives  the  fruit  great 
medicinal  value.  It  is  recommended  by  the  medical 
faculty  for  dyspepsia,  weak  digestion,  anemia  and  wast- 
ing diseases. 

There  are  pomelos,  or  Oriental  shaddocks,  as  large  as  a 
football;  five  different  kinds  of  oranges;  two  kinds  of 
lemons,  two  of  limes,  one  of  citron;  four  of  guavas;  two 
of  pineapples ;  cocoanuts,  figs,  grapes  and  tamarinds. 

Unfamiliar  dainties  are  the  durien,  which  has  a  deli- 
cious flavor  but  an  odor  like  that  of  Limburg  cheese ;  the 
chica,  which  looks  like  a  small  round  potato,  but  has  a 
cool,  crisp  and  intensely  sweet  taste;  the  lorn  boy  and 
loquot,  which  resemble  large  damsons,  but  have  a  tart  and 
delightful  spicy  flavor;  the  mangosteen,  which  suggests  a 
burned  baked  potato,  but  contains  a  snowy  pulp  within, 
unspeakably  pleasant  and  refreshing ;  the  lanzon,  whose 
taste  is  sweet  and  subacid  like  that  of  a  mountain  straw- 
berry ;  custard-apples,  which  are  fluted  apples  filled  with 
whipped  cream ;  the  santol,  or  Philippine  strawberry,  a 
poor  copy  of  the  northern  fruit ;  bread-fruit,  which  looks 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

for  all  the  world  like  green  egg-plants,  and  when  thor- 
oughly cooked  may  be  mistaken  for  toast;  jack-fruit, 
which  is  an  inferior  kind  of  bread-fruit;  the  mabolo,  a 
large  fruit  of  rare  beauty,  about  halfway  in  appearance 
between  an  apple  and  a  peach;  the  lai-chee,  a  delicious 
thick-skinned  red  globe  filled  with  a  translucent  cream; 
the  macapa,  a  crimson  fruit  tasting  vaguely  like  attar  of 
rose,  and  the  avocado  or  alligator  pear. 

In  addition  to  this  long  list  of  fruits  are  those  brought 
over  by  steamers  from  Formosa,  Foochow,  Amoy,  Hong 
Kong  and  Singapore.  Each  of  these  places  has  a  number 
of  fruits  of  fine  flavor  and  savor,  which  are  known  and 
liked  in  every  part  of  the  far  East.  Examples  are  found 
in  the  black  peach  of  Foochow,  the  pomelos  and  lung- 
ngans  of  Amoy;  the  red  mandarin-orange,  Chinese  goose- 
berry and  mulberries  of  Canton.  Taken  together  these 
make  a  collection  whose  equal  would  be  difficult  to  find 
in  any  other  city  of  the  world.  They  constitute  a  de- 
lightful feature  of  life  in  Manila  which  no  traveler  ever 
forgets.  Further  than  this,  they  give  a  variety  and  excel- 
lence to  the  daily  fare,  which  are  always  favorable  to 
well-being. 

The  forests  of  the  Philippines  are  of  enormous  extent 
and  contain  an  inexhaustible  supply  of  woods  of  all 
sorts,  ranging  from  the  quick-growing  palm  to  the  hard 
woods  which  require  a  century  for  their  full  development. 
Many  are  of  remarkable  beauty  in  color  and  grain,  taking 
a  high  polish  and  undergoing  the  heaviest  strains  or 
severest  wear  without  perceptible  damage.  The  leading 
trees  include  the  molave,  whose  wood  is  scarcely  distin- 
guishable from  boxwood,  and  which  possesses  all  the 
good  qualities  of  the  latter.  It  is  proof  against  insects 
and  is  very  seldom  attacked  by  the  white  ants.  It  is 
used  for  weatherboards  and  for  ship  construction.  The 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  177 

banaba  is  noted  for  the  beauty  of  its  fiber,  which  is  hard, 
tough,  and  of  a  beautiful  rose-pink  color.  It  is  used  in 
the  house-building  trades  and  also  in  cabinet  work.  The 
palomaria  is  a  gum  wood  which  suggests  spruce  to  a  New 
Englander.  The  gum  is  popular  among  the  natives,  who 
use  it  for  bruises  and  sores  externally,  and  for  stomach 
disorders  internally.  The  wood  is  light,  flexible  and 
strong,  resembling  hickory.  It  is  used  for  masts  and 
yards  by  the  natives  upon  their  primitive  craft,  and  also 
for  carrying  poles  by  the  porters  in  the  larger  cities. 
The  mangachafoi  is  a  stately  tree  which  rises  up  a 
slowly  tapering  shaft  eighty,  one  hundred,  and  even  one 
hundred  and  fifty  feet.  The  wood  is  of  uniform  quality 
from  root  to  top  and  is  highly  esteemed  by  the  Chinese  for 
masts  and  flagpoles.  The  anobin  is  a  cousin  of  the  bread- 
fruit tree,  only  four  or  five  times  as  large.  Its  wood  is 
light,  strong,  and  gummy  enough  to  be  water-repellent  if 
not  waterproof.  It  was  the  favorite  material  in  early 
years  for  the  long  war  canoes  of  the  Malays,  and  in  later 
times  for  their  trading  craft  and  pirate  ships. 

The  change  from  wooden  to  iron  and  steel  construction 
has  destroyed  most  of  the  demand,  so  that  the  trees  are 
increasing  in  number  and  size  throughout  the  archipelago. 
Another  gigantic  tree  is  the  narra,  or  Philippine  mahog- 
any. It  grows  to  eight,  ten,  and  fifteen  feet  in  diameter. 
Tables  have  been  made  from  cross  sections  which  would 
comfortably  seat  thirty-five  guests,  and  from  the  planks 
of  a  single  tree  an  entire  brigantine  has  been  constructed. 

An  aromatic  and  picturesque  cedar  known  as  the 
calantas  is  used  by  both  builders  and  cabinet  makers. 
The  balete  has  a  wood  which  is  soft  and  spongy  like  that 
of  the  American  palmetto.  The  inner  bark  can  be  util- 
ized for  cloth-making  and  also  for  the  manufacture  of 
bowstrings,  fishing  twine,  and  fish  nets. 


178  MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

The  lemon  trees  attain  enormous  dimensions,  being  fre- 
quently six  and  eight  feet  in  diameter.  There  are  many 
ebony  trees  which  provide  a  standard  quality  of  wood. 
The  camayon  is  famous  for  its  odd  wood,  which  is  of  a 
pale  tint,  veined  with  black  and  white,  looking  some- 
thing like  precious  marble.  It  has  a  rival  in  the  mala- 
tapai,  whose  timber  is  veined  with  black,  yellow,  brown 
and  red.  The  lanotan  is  often  called  ivory  wood  on 
account  of  the  remarkable  resemblance  it  bears  to  ivory. 
The  dongon  is  a  huge  tree  larger  than  an  oak,  which  is 
employed  for  making  immense  beams  and  girders.  The 
guio  is  very  tall,  as  also  large,  and  supplies  a  good  work- 
ing timber,  a  little  bit  harder  and  stronger  than  pine. 
The  mango  tree  attains  the  size  of  the  live-oaks  of  Flor- 
ida. The  santal  tree  grows  to  about  the  general  size  and 
shape  of  a  chestnut.  The  tamarind  is  one  of  the  most 
beautiful  of  all  the  members  of  the  forest.  Its  foliage 
may  be  mistaken  for  that  of  the  acacia,  while  its  trunk 
and  boughs  look  very  much  like  those  of  the  chestnut. 

The  sapan  tree  is  a  small,  ugly  bush,  like  the  scrub 
pine  upon  the  Atlantic  coast.  The  wood  is  white  when 
first  cut,  but  the  juice  oxidizes  and  becomes  a  deep  red. 
It  is  valuable  to  the  arts  as  a  source  of  excellent  dyeing 
material,  and  is  exported  in  very  large  quantities,  averag- 
ing about  five  thousand  tons  a  year  to  China  and  other 
countries.  The  aranga  is  a  mammoth  whose  trunks  yield 
logs  as  large  as  three  feet  thick  and  seventy -five  feet  long. 
It  is  used  for  piling  and  dock  building.  There  are  many 
others,  including  the  betis,  the  anobing,  the  bancal,  the 
bansalague,  the  batitinan,  the  antipolo,  the  anagap,  the 
guijo,  the  lauan,  the  macassin,  the  supa,  the  yacal,  and 
the  mancono  or  Eastern  lignum  vitse. 

Despite  the  immense  natural  wealth  in  timber,  it  does 
not  bring  one-tenth  of  the  income  to  the  colony  which  it 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  179 

would  under  better  conditions  of  trade.  Before  a  person 
can  secure  any  timber  he  must  enter  into  negotiations 
with  the  authorities,  obtain  licenses  from  the  inspector 
of  mountains,  concessions  from  the  governor-general, 
licenses  from  the  inspector  of  forests,  permissions  from 
the  provincial  governor,  licenses  from  the  church,  and 
permits  from  the  custom  house.  He  must  charter  his 
own  boat,  hire  his  woodchoppers  in  advance,  engage  a 
storey ard  generally  from  the  government,  and  pay  an 
export  tax  and  a  special  harbor  tax  before  he  can  ship  the 
first  log  to  a  foreign  market.  Yet  notwithstanding  this 
red  tape  and  costly  governmental  interference,  the  profit 
is  so  large  that  a  steady  trade  is  done  by  Manila  and 
Iloilo  with  other  parts  of  the  world.  Even  where  they 
enter  into  competition  with  Borneo,  Sumatra,  and  the 
Malay  States,  they  hold  their  own  on  account  of  the  high 
excellence  of  their  lumber.  Nearly  every  steamer  which 
leaves  Manila  carries  cargoes  of  wood  of  some  sort,  and 
where  there  is  no  space  for  a  consignment  of  timber  they 
use  sapan  wood  and  other  small  woods  as  dunnage  and  so 
make  a  double  profit.  The  great  English  house  of  Brown 
&  Company,  Limited,  is  the  chief  mercantile  concern  in 
this  field  of  business.  In  their  reports  they  have  fre- 
quently declared  that  the  Philippine  Islands  are  some 
day  to  supply  the  entire  Eastern  world  with  its  finest 
lumber  and  timber. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

MINES  AND  METALS. 

IT  was  Buckle,  the  English  historian,  -who  said  that 
Spain  \vas  the  last  survival  of  medievalism  in  Europe. 
No  truer  criterion  of  the  statement  can  be  desired  than 
the  attitude  of  its  government  toward  the  mineral  re- 
sources of  its  noble  Eastern  colonies.  What  shall  be  said 
of  an  administration  which  refuses  to  either  examine  or 
develop  its  own  resources,  and  forbids  any  one  else  to 
do  that  which  it  declines  to  do  itself.  Yet  that  has  been 
the  attitude  of  the  authorities  of  the  Philippines  from 
time  immemorial.  What  gold  is  extracted,  and  it  must 
amount  to  a  very  large  quantitj",  is  done  secretly,  and 
not  alone  without  but  against  the  will  of  the  government. 
The  Chinese  blue  books  refer  to  the  Philippines  as  a  land 
of  gold  and  many  precious  ores,  and  the  natives  them- 
selves say  that  the  yellow  metal  has  been  extracted  from 
the  rocks  and  the  soil  from  time  immemorial. 

Of  the  mineral  resources  of  the  country  more  is  known 
in  Hong  Kong  than  in  Manila.  The  freedom  of  speech, 
of  press,  and  of  action,  enjoyed  under  the  British  flag 
makes  even  the  Spaniard  and  the  natives  free  their  minds, 
where  at  Manila  they  preserve  a  discreet  silence.  Gold, 
the  most  valuable  of  all  the  metals,  has  been  found  on  all 
of  the  larger  islands.  As  early  as  1572  there  were  mines 
in  North  Camarines,  which  lies  in  the  southeast  of  Luzon. 

In  the  same  century  the  natives  were  found  extracting 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  181 

gold  from  quartz  in  a  primitive  way  in  Benguet,  Nueva 
Vizcaya,  and  in  Isabella,  in  northern  Luzon.  In  1620  an 
army  officer  found  out  that  some  half-caste  Chinese  were 
extracting  large  quantities  of  gold  from  mines  in  the 
provinces  of  Pangasinan  and  Ilocos  in  northern  Luzon. 
The  Chinese  were  attacked  and  killed,  but  the  victorious 
soldiers  never  found  the  mines.  On  the  Surigoa,  or  eastern 
coast  of  Mindanao,  there  were  gold  deposits  found  in 
both  places,  and  quartz  veins.  A  prominent  captain  of  a 
steamer  trading  in  that  neighborhood  said  that  the  output 
of  the  washings  were  at  least  ten  pounds  a  day  of  his  own 
knowledge,  and  that  nearly  all  of  it  went  to  Chinese 
traders.  Even  in  Manila  province  the  natives  wash  the 
sand  in  the  river  near  Montalban,  and  obtain  enough  gold 
dust  to  pay  them  for  their  trouble.  The  Sulu  warriors 
bring  both  gold  dust  and  nuggets  to  Borneo,  and  claim 
that  there  is  an  inexhaustible  supply  on  Jolo  island  and 
Basilan. 

The  Spanish  historians  speak  of  gold  beds  not  far  from 
Zamboanga,  and  Spanish  official  reports  give  accounts  of 
its  occurrence  on  Panay,  Negros,  and  Cebu.  Silver  is 
found,  though  not  to  so  wide  an  extent  as  gold.  There 
are  very  large  deposits  of  silver-lead  at  Acsubing,  Panoy- 
poy,  and  Eiburan,  on  Cebu  island.  There  is  galena- 
bearing  both  gold  and  silver  in  Dapitan  and  Iligan  in 
Mindanao.  In  the  latter  island  there  is  also  quicksilver, 
platinum  and  tin.  There  is  iron  ore  well  distributed  in 
nearly  every  district.  In  the  last  century  iron  mines 
were  worked  with  great  success  in  Morong,  but  were 
finally  closed  by  the  government  on  the  ground  that  the 
workmen,  who  were  Chinese,  were  not  Christians.  The 
luckless  owner  was  obliged  to  send  all  these  workmen  to 
China  at  his  own  expense,  and  the  government  refused  to 
pay  him  for  the  iron  he  had  delivered  on  the  ground  of 
his  having  insulted  "the  Lord/' 


182  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

The  iron  mines  of  Angat,  in  Bulacan,  are  richer  and 
purer  than  the  best  Spanish  ore  so  much  in  demand  by 
English  forges. 

In  Luzon  and  Mindanao  are  large  outcrops  of  copper 
ores,  which  are  utilized  by  the  savages,  but  not  by  their 
Christian  superiors.  Unlimited  amounts  of  sulphur  and 
arsenic  are  found  in  different  parts  of  the  archipelago. 
Coal  is  found  in  Cebu,  Luzon,  Negros,  and  Mindanao. 
A  small  amount  is  extracted  at  Cebu,  and  that  of  the  poor- 
est quality.  Explorers  report  discoveries  of  marble, 
dolomite,  slate,  gypsum,  borax,  plumbago,  granite,  sand- 
stone, limestone,  coral  rock,  petroleum,  and  lignite;  in 
fact,  the  Philippines  seem  to  be  as  rich  in  mineral  re- 
sources as  the  island  of  Formosa  or  the  Malay  Peninsula. 

All  three  districts  are  of  comparatively  similar  forma- 
tion, and  strangely  enough  each  was  originally  peopled 
by  Malays,  and  each  in  the  course  of  time  was  conquered 
by  an  alien  race.  Although  it  has  a  supply  of  coal  and 
uses  large  quantities  which  it  imports  from  Great  Britain, 
Australia,  and  Japani  the  Manila  administration  prefers 
to  pay  ten  or  twelve  dollars  a  ton  for  twenty-five  thou- 
sand tons  every  year  rather  than  build  a  small  railway 
from  Compostella  on  the  island  of  Cebu  to  the  coast 
which  will  deliver  an  excellent  quality  in  unlimited 
amounts  for  less  than  one  dollar  and  a  half  a  ton,  cost 
price.  The  difference  between  the  prices  represents 
enough  invested  capital  to  build  a  railway  from  one  end 
of  Cebu  to  the  other,  with  enough  left  over  to  connect 
Manila  and  Cavite  by  rail. 

Queerest  of  all,  the  opposition  to  mining  enterprise 
comes  from  the  friars  rather  than  from  the  church,  and 
not  from  the  civil  authorities.  The  motive  underlying 
the  opposition  has  never  been  fathomed.  On  one  occa- 
sion the  Bishop  of  Jaro  said  that  gold  mining  made  men 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  183 

mercenary  and  worshipers  of  mammon,  and  that  gold 
miners  were  notoriously  drunken  and  dissolute.  This, 
however,  must  be  viewed  with  some  suspicion  when  that 
same  dignitary  favors  lotteries  and  the  opium  vice,  and  is 
one  of  the  officers  of  the  council  which  passes  upon  both 
ruinous  evils.  A  Franciscan  friar  at  Cebu  said  that  his 
order  was  opposed  to  mines  and  mining  because  it  would 
upset  the  quiet  and  prosperous  rule  of  the  holy  church, 
and  by  degrees  create  a  revolutionary  and  heretical 
spirit.  That  all  the  rich  mining  countries  had  passed 
into  the  hands  of  heretics  and  infidels,  and  away  from 
their  original  Catholic  owners.  Citing  California,  which 
originally  belonged  to  Spain ;  India,  which  belonged  to 
France;  and  Australia,  which  belonged  to  either  Spain  or 
Portugal. 

Another  friar  explained  his  opposition  on  the  ground 
that  mining  operations  through  the  use  of  explosives  in 
blasting  shattered  the  earth,  and  so  induced  volcanic 
and  earthquake  action,  from  which  the  country  already 
Buffered  more  than  its  share. 

Unless,  therefore,  there  be  a  change  in  the  colonial 
government,  it  is  but  fair  to  presume  that  the  vast  min- 
eral resources  of  the  Philippines  will  remain  neglected, 
or  at  the  best  a  source  of  illicit  revenue  to  half-caste 
speculators  and  Chinese  traders. 


184  MANILA  AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 

TYPHOONS. 

No  grander  spectacle  is  ever  seen  by  mortal  eye  than  a 
great  typhoon.  Unlike  the  squalls  of  the  northern  zone  it 
gives  its  warning  far  in  advance.  Twenty -four  or  even 
thirty-six  hours  ahead  the  voice  of  the  herald  is  heard  in 
the  uneasy  movements  of  the  barometer.  The  mercury 
falls  and  rises,  falls  still  lower  and  rises  again,  just  as  if 
great  blocks  of  atmosphere  were  being  carried  away  by 
viewless  hands  and  replaced  by  smaller  and  lighter  ones. 
It  gets  below  the  twenty-nine  inch  mark  and  then  ani- 
mate nature  begins  to  add  its  warning  to  that  of  the 
mercury.  Sea-birds  fly  anxiously  as  if  looking  for  a  place 
of  refuge.  Fishes  leap  from  the  water  quivering  with 
nervous  excitement  to  fall  back  into  the  waves.  Buffaloes 
come  bellowing  to  their  home.  Cats  shrink  into  corners, 
and  even  the  pariah  dogs  whine  and  growl  in  vague  ap- 
prehension. And  the  air  changes  in  its  tinting,  the 
brightness  dies  out  by  a  haze  slowly  forming,  and  the 
blue  above  changes  slowly  into  a  livid  yellow.  The  breeze 
dies  down,  and  the  city  and  country  seemingly  become 
silent.  Your  voice  appears  to  have  grown  weak,  when 
3'ou  talk  you  are  compelled  to  employ  considerable  exer- 
tion. The  reason  lies  in  the  roar  of  the  far-off  storm 
which  is  already  swallowing  up  the  finer  sounds  and  the 
keener  notes  of  everyday  life.  Upon  the  horizon  is  a 
black  wall  tipped  or  combed  with  vast  masses  of  fleecy 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  185 

snow.  It  is  a  giant  nimbus,  capped  by  a  cumulus  larger 
than  the  Himalayas.  It  moves  slowly  and  majestically, 
the  whirling  storm  within  may  be  circling  at  a  hundred 
or  two  hundred  miles  an  hour,  but  the  storm  itself  moves 
leisurely,  scarcely  faster  than  an  idle  man  walking  along 
a  sleepy  country  road. 

The  sky  grows  from  yellow  to  brown,  and  the  air 
begins  to  taste  as  if  filled  with  dust.  The  birds  have  all 
gone  to  cover  and  every  animal  has  crept  into  hiding. 
What  little  is  left  of  the  sun  glares  out  a  dull  and  sodden 
red.  The  black  wall  now  reaches  up  high  into  the 
heavens,  covering  one-half  of  the  horizon  and  over  it, 
looking  like  an  avalanche  about  to  fall,  are  the  white 
masses  dashed  here  and  there  with  red  from  the  refrac- 
tion of  the  sun's  rays  and  brightened  into  jeweled 
caverns  by  the  play  of  the  lightning.  The  heavy  thunder 
is  indistinguishable  in  the  roar  of  the  wind.  It  is  a  vast, 
continuous  sound,  like  the  boom  of  a  hundred  Niagaras. 

It  devours  all  other  sounds.  In  a  typhoon  off  Manila 
on  one  occasion  a  fort  fired  guns  to  warn  a  ship  a  mile 
away,  but  the  guns  were  unheard  on  board  the  ship  and 
even  at  the  other  end  of  the  fort  itself.  As  the  cloud- 
wall  approaches  there  come  flurries  of  great  raindrops. 
Fine  raindrops  take  their  place,  and  then  a  great  wave 
of  wind  comes  rushing  past  carrying  with  it  boxes  and 
barrels,  roof  tiles  and  signboards,  shutters  and  awnings, 
and  the  thousand  and  one  movable  objects  of  the  city. 
The  rain  becomes  mist  and  everything  fades  into  vague 
outlines  and  half-visible  colors.  There  is  no  standing 
against  the  atmospheric  pressure.  The  strongest  man  is 
thrown  down  or  hurled  against  walls  along  with  th§ 
straws  and  feathers  of  the  street.  Then  balconies  and 
roofs  are  swept  away,  walls  crash,  houses  collapse,  trees 
vanish,  torn  literally  from  the  earth,  and  the  grounci 


186  MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

seems  to  become  alive  with  water,  moving  things,  squirm- 
ing creations,  dying  animals  and  the  debris  of  the  catas- 
trophe. 

In  the  center  of  the  typhoon  there  is  a  period  of 
unearthly  calm,  which  is  described  by  those  who  have 
experienced  it  as  being  like  the  day  of  judgment.  It  is  a 
short  pause,  and  then  the  storm  again  resumes  its  course 
as  if  to  finish  the  destruction  which  it  had  begun.  It 
grows  weaker  and  slower,  and  then  the  cloud  wall  passes 
on  and  the  sunlight  once  more  falls  upon  a  hideous 
wilderness. 

The  great  typhoon  of  July,  1862,  started  from  Luzon, 
devastating  a  long  tract  of  territory  upon  that  island, 
swept  across  the  China  Sea,  missing  Hong  Kong,  but  mak- 
ing a  belt  of  ruin  from  the  China  coast  up  far  into  the 
interior,  including  the  entire  river  frontage  of  the  vast 
city  of  Canton.  Over  fifty  thousand  people  were  killed  and 
twenty  thousand  houses  destroyed.  Professor  Doberck, 
who  is  the  leading  authority  upon  these  storms,  says  that 
they  average  sixteen  a  year  and  occur  almost  invariably 
in  June,  July,  August  and  September. 

The  name  is  a  curious  one.  It  bears  a  striking  resem- 
blance to  the  Greek  tuphon,  a  whirlwind,  and  yet  it  is 
only  the  Chinese  tai-feng,  or  tai-fung,  meaning  a  large 
wind.  It  seems  to  have  been  taken  by  the  navigators  of 
the  sixteenth  century  from  the  Chinese  mariners  and 
applied  to  these  special  storms.  The  force  of  the  wind  is 
something  inconceivable.  Captain  Street,  of  the  P.  &  O. 
steamer  Brindisi,  passed  safely  through  one  in  the 
China  Sea  which  carried  a  heavy  boat  away  from  the 
davits  up  in  the  air  and  held  it  flat  against  the  mast  and 
mainyard  for  fifteen  minutes.  The  O.  &  O.  steamer 
Oceanic,  sailed  through  the  edge  of  one  in  1892  which 
cleaned  the  upper  deck  of  that  steamer  of  everything 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  18? 

as  if  it  had  been  done  with  a  knife,  and  yet  did  not 
injure  the  most  fragile  thing  on  the  forward  part  of  the 
vessel. 

At  Balucan,  in  Luzon,  a  typhoon  struck  and  carried 
away  one-half  of  a  house,  not  leaving  a  piece  behind  a 
foot  in  length,  but  nevertheless  not  injuring  the  other 
half  to  any  noticeable  extent. 

Their  nature  is  well  known  to-day,  and  their  move- 
ments are  figured  out  with  great  accuracy.  When  one 
starts,  which  is  always  near  Luzon,  the  fact  with  an  esti- 
mate of  the  size,  the  direction  and  the  velocity  of  the 
storm,  is  telegraphed  to  every  point  in  the  China  Sea,  the 
China  mainland,  and  the  Island  of  Formosa,  so  that  in 
this  way  people  have  twenty-four,  forty-eight,  and  even 
seventy-two  hours'  notice  in  advance.  Stranger  still, 
veteran  shipmasters  will  sail  their  craft  parallel  with  the 
axis  of  the  typhoon  without  any  serious  consequences. 
On  one  occasion  the  steamship  Zaphiro,  now  attached  to 
Admiral  Dewey's  squadron,  and  on  two  occasions  the 
steamer  Esmeralda  sailed  from  Manila  to  the  China  coast 
between  two  typhoon  axes,  the  storm  on  the  south  being 
about  thirty  miles  distant,  and  the  one  on  the  north 
about  twenty  or  twenty-five. 


188  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTEK   XXIV. 

THE     OTHER     ISLANDS THE     LADRONES THE     PELEWS THE 

CAROLINES. 

EAST  of  the  Philippines  lies  that  part  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean  known  as  Micronesia.  It  contains  many  islands 
arranged  more  or  less  in  groups.  Three  of  these  groups 
belong  to  Spain,  and  in  political  geography  are  attached 
to  the  Philippines.  The  most  important  of  the  three  is 
the  group  known  as  the  Caroline  Islands,  second,  the 
Marianne  or  Ladrone  Islands,  and  third  the  Pelew  or 
Pelao  Islands.  The  islands  are  all  small,  containing  a 
total  area  of  about  eleven  hundred  square  miles, 
and  fifty  thousand  inhabitants.  They  have  lost  much  of 
their  original  importance.  The  Ladrones,  for  example, 
when  first  discovered  had  a  population  of  over  one  hun- 
dred thousand.  What  with  slavery,  religious  fanaticism, 
and  inhuman  treatment  by  officials,  they  now  number  but 
one-tenth  of  the  sum  mentioned.  A  similar  decimation 
has  marked  the  Carolines  and  the  Pelews.  The  unfortu- 
nate natives  of  all  three  groups  are  dwindling  away,  fol- 
lowing the  footsteps  of  the  best  representative  of  their 
race,  the  Mawaian.  While  the  people  resemble  Malays, 
they  are  of  a  different  race  or  subrace  known  as  the 
Polynesian.  They  are  taller,  broader,  and  more  robust 
and  muscular.  Some  of  them  have  features  which  are 
almost  Greek  in  symmetry  and  proportion.  The  men 
are  good-looking,  and  many  of  them  are  more  than  six 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  189 

feet  in  stature.  Many  of  the  women  are  graceful, 
shapely,  and  pretty,  and  a  few  exceedingly  beautiful. 
Some  scientists  believe  that  the  Polynesians  came  orig- 
inally from  Borneo,  and  had  their  origin  in  a  branch 
of  the  Malay  race,  which  at  an  early  age  took  to  seafaring 
or  wandering  in  small  colonies  from  island  to  island. 
The  people  are  remarkably  gentle,  affectionate  and  simple- 
minded.  In  war  they  are  brave  and  fierce  even  to 
frenzy. 

The  Ladrone  Islands  were  discovered  by  Magellan  in 
1521,  who  called  them  the  Islas  de  las  Velas,  or  the 
Islands  of  the  Sails.  It  is  a  pity  this  name  was  not  kept, 
as  it  is  both  beautiful  and  appropriate,  many  of  the 
islands  looking  like  distant  ships  when  seen  by  the  navi- 
gator upon  the  horizon.  Legazpi  called  them  the  La- 
drones  or  Thieves'  Islands,  because  one  of  his  ships  was 
robbed  there.  In  the  seventeenth  century  they  were  called 
the  Lazarus  Islands,  because  a  nervous  captain  saw  a  leper 
at  a  fishing  village,  and  the  St.  Lazarus  Islands  by  a 
Catholic  missionary  who  wished  to  give  them  a  religious 
title. 

They  were  next  called  the  Marianne  Islands,  from 
Queen  Maria  Anne  of  Austria.  The  present  usage  is  to 
accept  the  title  given  by  Legazpi — the  Ladrone  Islands. 
The  Jesuit  Fathers  established  a  mission  in  the  islands 
in  1668.  The  mission  house  was  fortified,  garrisoned 
with  thirty-one  soldiers,  and  armed  with  two  pieces  of 
artillery.  Within  two  years  after  the  landing  of  this 
expedition  an  attempt  was  made  to  curtail  the  liberty  of 
the  natives,  and  to  create  a  system  of  taxation.  The 
natives  revolted,  and  had  their  first  revolution.  There 
were  many  revolts  from  that  time  on,  and  through  the 
last  century.  Many  priests  were  killed  as  well  as 
soldiers,  and  these  deaths  were  avenged  wholesale.  In 


190  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

addition  to  the  cruelties  of  war,  each  outbreak  entailed 
larger  burdens  upon  the  population.  They  were  com- 
pelled to  devote  so  many  days  every  year  to  govern- 
mental work,  and  also  to  pay  over  to  the  fiscal  officers  of 
both  church  and  state  so  many  measures  of  grain, 
pounds  of  yam  and  copra,  and  so  many  pigs  and  fowls. 
That  the  condition  is  as  bad  to-day  as  at  any  time  in  the 
past  is  evidenced  by  the  fact  that  the  Spanish  blue  books 
speak  almost  every  year  of  seditions  or  seditious  natives, 
and  that  less  than  twenty  years  ago  the  governor,  Sen  or 
Pazos,  was  assassinated  in  a  popular  uprising.  The 
Spanish  government  suppresses  nearly  all  information, 
but  the  treasury  reports  tell  an  intelligible  story  in  fig- 
ures which  show  that  the  garrison  is  as  small  as  safety 
permits;  that  the  expense  of  government  has  been  re- 
duced to  a  minimum ;  that  the  taxes  are  universal,  and 
that  the  entire  revenue  is  one-half  of  the  expense  of  the 
administration.  There  are  nine  towns  in  the  islands  and 
the  capital  is  Agana  on  Apra  Creek.  In  all  of  the  is- 
lands, there  are  twenty  schools,  and  twenty-nix  teachers, 
on  paper.  The  number  of  enrolled  scholars  13  about  five 
hundred,  while  the  attendance  is  said  to  be  only  about 
fifty.  A  government  steamer  from  Manila  calls  at  Agana 
three  or  four  times  a  year. 

The  Pelew  Islands  were  known  of  for  many  years  be- 
fore they  were  discovered.  So  many  attempts  were  made 
to  find  them  that  at  one  period  there  was  a  popular  belief 
that  the  islands  were  movable,  and  floated  here  and  there. 
Not  until  long  afterward  was  the  reason  ascertained  to  be 
strong  ocean  currents  which  drove  ships  out  of  their 
courses  without  arousing  the  suspicions  of  the  sailing 
masters. 

The  first  time  they  were  seen  by  European  navigators 
was  in  1G8G,  but  not  until  1710  were  they  located,  and 


H  c 

C/3  o3 

<J  +j 

O  c 


0  -8 


a  * 

M     c 
H     rt 

2  ! 

§1 
S  a 


MANILA  AND  THK  PHILIPPINES,  191 

Occupied  by  an  expedition.  Even  on  this  occasion  noth- 
ing permanent  was  done.  A  warship  from  Manila  found 
two  of  the  islands,  and  oast  anchor  near  the  shore. 
The  natives,  a  fine-looking  set  of  savages,  came  on  board 
the  vessel,  and  presented  them  with  cocoanuts,  herbs, 
and  fish.  Two  zealous  missionaries  on  board  went  ashore 
to  erect  a  cross,  and  were  escorted  by  an  officer  of  the 
soldiers,  and  a  quartermaster  of  the  vessel.  While  they 
were  ashore  the  wind  began  to  increase,  and  the  ship 
was  compelled  to  raise  anchor  to  escape  the  coming 
storm.  When  it  was  over  the  captain  endeavored  to  find 
the  islands,  but  never  found  them,  although  he  searched 
for  a  month.  According  to  the  natives,  the  four  Euro- 
peans were  treated  very  kindly  for  several  years,  when 
they  became  unruly  and  cruel,  and  were  slain.  Not  until 
twenty-five  years  afterward  (1735)  were  the  islands  found 
again,  and  a  settlement  made  by  a  Spanish  expedition. 
The  people  of  the  Pelews  seem  to  have  been  of  a  lower 
type  than  those  of  the  Ladrones.  They  were  polyg- 
amists  and  cannibals.  They  apparently  had  no  religion 
whatever,  worshiping  only  their  chief,  who  was  usually 
the  strongest  and  wisest  man  of  the  community.  They 
had  no  quadrupeds,  domestic  fowl  of  any  sort,  nor  agri- 
culture, living  on  fish,  fruits,  and  roots.  They  were 
strong  and  vigorous,  and  led  savage  but  happy  lives. 
They  knew  how  to  make  a  fire,  and  how  to  weave  strong 
cloth  out  of  banana  fiber.  They  made  hatchets  and 
lances  with  stone  heads,  and  spears  whose  points  were 
formed  by  rubbing  human  bones,  chiefly  those  of  the 
arm  or  the  leg,  down  to  a  point,  or  an  edge  like  a  chisel. 
The  men  wore  loin  cloths  and  the  women  a  skirt,  which 
extended  from  the  waist  to  the  knee.  The  wives  and 
daughters  of  the  king,  and  the  great  warriors  had  combs 
and  ornaments  made  out  of  turtle  shell.  The  Spaniards 


192  MANILA   AND   THE  PHILIPPINES. 

governed  the  Pelews  in  very  much  the  same  style  as  the 
Ladrones.  They  put  a  garrison  in  the  leading  village, 
•which  is  Babeldruap,  and  made  it  the  seat  of  government. 

The3r  also  established  settlements  on  three  other  is- 
lands. The  Pelews  are  a  subdivision  of  the  Caroline 
administration,  which  is  in  turn  directly  responsible  to 
Manila.  Ecclesiastically  the  Pelews  belong  to  the 
diocese  of  Cebu,  their  priests  being  subject  to  the  bishop 
of  that  province.  Legally  the  Pelews  belong  to  the 
judicial  jurisdiction  of  Manila.  This  noble  achievement 
of  red  tape  will  be  properly  appreciated  when  it  is  re- 
membered that  almost  all  difficulties  or  dissensions  arise 
in  regard  to  commercial  matters,  over  which  the  civil 
authorities  have  a  jurisdiction,  in  which  the  church  has 
a  vested  interest,  and  must  be  made  a  party  to  any  legal 
proceeding  and  for  which  redress  must  come  from  the 
supreme  court  at  Manila.  Any  luckless  foreigner,  there 
fore,  unless  he  belongs  to  a  country  possessing  a  strong 
and  virile  government,  is  compelled  in  case  of  a  com- 
mercial difficulty  to  apply  to  all  three  organizations — a 
proceeding  which  is  very  expensive,  very  technical,  and, 
as  might  be  supposed,  very  slow. 

The  Pelews  are  very  poor,  poorer  even  than  the  La- 
drones.  The  government  takes  a  large  share  of  the  prod- 
uce from  the  natives,  and  gives  nothing  in  return.  The 
population  is  gradually  diminishing,  and  is  said  to  be 
about  one-fifth  of  what  it  was  when  the  islands  were 
seized  by  Spain.  Few  ships  touch  at  the  ports.  There 
is  no  commerce  to  attract  them  ;  the  government  has  never 
erected  any  lighthouses,  and  the  naval  authorities  have 
never  taken  the  trouble  to  survey  and  chart  the  islands 
and  surrounding  waters.  What  hj'drographic  work  has 
been  done  in  this  respect  has  been  achieved  by  other 
nations,  notably  the  British.  The  Americans,  Germans, 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  193 

French,  Dutch,  and  even  the  Portuguese  have  added  their 
share  to  the  general  total.  Much,  however,  remains 
to  be  done  before  navigation  in  that  district  will  be  put 
upon  a  civilized  basis. 

The  Pelews  are  sometimes  known  as  the  West  Caro- 
lines, and  sometimes  are  included  with  the  most  westerly 
group  of  the  Carolines  under  the  general  title  of  the 
West  Carolines.  The  Spanish  administration,  which  is 
the  most  authoritative  body  in  this  respect,  divides  the 
great  archipelago  in  an  extraordinary  way  by  making 
them  two  districts,  one  with  the  title  of  the  "East  Caro- 
line and  Pelew  Islands,"  and  the  other  "the  West  Caro- 
line and  Pelew  Islands."  This  certainly  must  be  some 
clerical  error,  as  the  Pelews  lie  to  the  west  of  the  Caro- 
lines, and  are  as  much  a  part  of  the  Philippines  as  they 
are  of  the  Carolines.  The  Spanish  government  undoubt- 
edly meant  the  easterly  half  of  the  Caroline  group  to  be 
known  as  the  East  Carolines,  and  the  westerly  half,  to- 
gether with  the  Pelews,  to  be  known  as  the  West  Caro- 
lines and  Pelews. 

The  famous  Carolines  are  a  group  or  archipelago  reach- 
ing from  about  one  hundred  and  forty  to  one  hundred 
and  seventy  east  longitude,  and  from  four  to  ten  north 
latitude.  They  are,  therefore,  about  eighteen  hundred 
miles  long  and  three  hundred  and  fifty  miles  wide.  They 
are  noted  for  the  equableness  of  their  climate,  the  ther- 
mometer rarely  going  below  seventy-five  degrees,  or  over 
eighty-five.  The  temperature  is  nearly  the  same  day 
and  night,  so  that  the  climate  comes  nearer  everlasting 
early  summer  than  either  Southern  California,  or  Hono- 
lulu. Unlike  the  Marshall  Archipelago,  immediately  ad- 
joining on  the  eastward,  which  seems  to  be  of  exclusive 
coral  formation,  the  Carolines  are  partly  of  coral,  and 
partly  of  basaltic  or  volcanic  formation.  At  some  places, 


i94  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

especially  Ruk,  Yap,  Fefan,  and  Kusaie,  the  basalt  forms 
massive  mountains  of  which  at  least  four  are  three  thou- 
sand feet  high,  and  many  are  two  thousand  feet  high. 
At  some  points  the  rock  would  seem  to  indicate  a  long 
line  of  upheaval  similar  to  that  of  the  Palisades  on  the 
Hudson  River,  or  the  columnar  coastline  of  the  north- 
west of  Scotland.  The  combination  of  the  two  forma- 
tions produces  a  wonderful  variety  of  soil,  which,  added 
to  the  genial  climate  and  the  regular  rainfall,  makes  the 
islands  remarkably  fertile.  Almost  every  vegetable  and 
fruit,  temperature,  subtropical,  and  tropical,  will  grow, 
and  while  many  of  the  northern  vegetable  types  run  to 
•woody  fire  rather  than  to  edible  tissue,  all  thrive  to  an 
extreme  degree.  The  coral  districts  support  the  cocoa- 
nut  and  other  palms,  the  bread-fruit,  taroroot,  yams* 
potatoes,  onions,  and  other  underground  vegetables, 
while  the  soil  of  the  basalt  rock  supports  nearly  every 
other  form  of  plant  life.  Under  savage  and  Spanish 
rule  the  islands  were  famous  for  their  beauty  and  salu- 
brity. While  during  the  thirty  years  when  the  simple- 
minded  islanders  were  under  the  control  of  American 
missionaries  they  enjoyed  phenomenal  prosperity.  The 
islands  reached  a  stage  of  cultivation  which  caused  sev- 
eral of  them  to  be  known  as  the  "gems  of  the  Pacific." 
It  is  popularly  supposed  that  the  islands  were  discovered 
by  Magellan,  but  critical  study  has  disproved  this  belief, 
and  shown  that  his  first  landing,  and  the  first  land  he 
discovered  in  this  part  of  the  world,  was  one  of  the 
Ladrones.  The  existence  of  the  Carolines  became  known 
to  the  Spaniards  in  1721,  when  two  proas  blown  out  of 
their  course  by  heavy  winds  took  refuge  on  a  beach  near 
Agana,  where  at  the  time  Luiz  Sanchez  was  governor. 

They   were  made  prisoners,   and  when  the  governor 
heard  that  they  came  from  rich  and  fertile  islands  to  the 


MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES.  195 

east,  he  fitted  up  a  small  vessel,  putting  on  board  a  crew, 
soldiers  and  a  priest,  and  adding  the  prisoners  as  pilots. 
The  savages  gladly  steered  the  chip  to  their  home,  and 
the  priest  and  soldiers,  seeing  that  the  natives  were  very 
numerous,  declined  to  go  ashore,  but  sailed  back  to 
Manila  for  reinforcements.  That  their  caution  was 
justified  was  soon  demonstrated.  The  new  expedition 
from  Manila  had  several  priests  and  a  large  company  of 
soldiers.  It  reached  the  Carolines,  disembarked, 
attacked  the  natives,  and  was  promptly  resisted  and 
routed.  Nearly  all  the  soldiers  were  slain  as  were  also 
some  of  the  sailors  in  the  landing  boats.  This  discour- 
aging reception  postponed  for  a  long  time  further  at- 
tempts to  subdue  the  natives.  Later  on  an  exploring 
expedition  returned  to  Manila  with  much  interesting  in- 
formation concerning  the  archipelago.  The}'  described 
with  some  accuracy  the  rock  formation,  the  fertility  of 
the  soil,  the  wealth  of  vegetation  and  the  character  of  the 
inhabitants.  This  they  depicted  in  very  forbidding 
colors.  They  were  said  to  be  vicious  naked  warriors  and 
pirates  whose  chief  joy  was  war  and  carnage  and  whose 
amusements  as  well  as  training  exercises  were  mock 
battles.  They  were  cannibals  who  filed  their  teeth,  killed 
and  roasted  all  prisoners,  and  regarded  young  girls  and 
little  children  as  great  delicacies.  The  queerest  story  of 
all  was  that  the  islands  were  full  of  Spanish  half-breeds 
who  were  the  descendants  of  Spanish  sailors  that  had 
been  wrecked  upon  the  shores,  and  had  been  married  on 
account  of  their  strength,  endurance,  and  intelligence  to 
the  native  women.  In  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  cen- 
tury the  Spaniards  took  possession  of  the  islands  by  slow 
degrees,  and  established  a  quasi-government.  They 
were  greatly  disappointed  after  they  came  to  know  the 
archipelago.  There  were  no  precious  metals,  nor  so  far 


196  MANILA   AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

as  they  knew,  metals  of  any  sort.  The  land  was  chiefly 
forest  and  underbrush,  and  the  natives  grew  scarcely 
enough  food  for  their  own  wants,  relying  upon  the  fish  of 
the  sea  and  the  natural  products  of  the  field  and  the 
forest  for  their  sustenance. 

They  were  brave,  obstinate,  and  more  indifferent  to 
death  than  the  Malays  of  the  Philippines.  This  com- 
bination made  them  very  hard  subjects  for  Spanish 
officials.  There  was  almost  nothing  for  the  ingenious  tax 
gatherer  or  the  official  to  put  his  hands  upon.  If  he 
tried  to  arrest  the  natives  and  put  them  to  work  they 
killed  the  soldiers,  and  when  conquered,  laid  down  in 
the  grass  and  died,  or  allowed  themselves  to  be  tortured 
and  slaughtered  by  the  officers  of  the  law.  After  many 
attempts  the  politicians  who  were  sent  out  from  Manila 
to  govern  the  various  communities  lost  all  hope  of  pecu- 
niary gain.  The  more  ambitious  had  themselves  trans- 
ferred to  other  stations,  and  by  degrees  only  unsuccessful 
office-seekers  or  men  who  had  lost  their  hold  upon  the 
administration  would  accept  a  position  in  this  out-of-the- 
way  archipelago.  This  is  well  shown  in  the  Spanish 
blue  books.  For  all  the  East  Carolines  there  is  only 
provision  for  a  lieutenant-colonel  and  staff  with  a  total 
allowance  of  four  thousand  nine  hundred  dollars  a  year, 
while  for  the  more  scattered  West  Carolines  and  Pelews 
together  there  is  allotted  a  lieutenant-colonel  and  staff, 
and  an  expenditure  of  five  thousand  nine  hundred  and 
seventy  dollars.  This  may  be  compared  with  the  unim- 
portant district  of  Mindanao,  where  the  allowance  is 
nearly  twenty  thousand  dollars  a  year.  In  the  Carolines 
the  two  most  important,  if  not  the  largest  islands,  are  Yap 
and  Ponape.  Yap  is  the  center  of  government  for  the 
East  Carolines  and  Ponape  is  the  seat  of  the  vice- 
governor  of  both  the  East  and  West  Carolines. 


1 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES^  197 

While  the  Spaniards  allowed  the  islands  practically  to 
run  themselves,  there  grew  np  a  curious  barter  trade 
between  the  natives  and  venturous  traders,  especially 
British,  American,  and  German.  They  loaded  small  sail- 
ing vessels  with  stocks  of  calicoes,  looking  glasses, 
knives,  tinseled  jewlery,  and  cheap  firearms,  and  ex- 
changed them  with  the  natives  for  food,  and  copra  or  the 
dried  ripe  cocoanut  meat.  The  traders  were  frowned 
upon  by  the  Spanish  government,  which  at  first  tried  to 
suppress  the  traffic  by  imposing  heavy  duties.  The 
traders  thereupon  refused  to  enter  any  ports  where  there 
were  officials,  and  did  business  at  sea  more  than  a 
marine  league  from  the  shore,  the  natives  coming  ofi:  in 
boats.  The  Spaniards  tried  to  suppress  this  with  gun- 
boats, but  the  very  first  collision  occurred  beyond  the 
league  limit,  and  brought  down  such  a  storm  of  protests 
from  the  diplomatic  world  that  the  practice  was  discon- 
tinued. The  gunboats  were  withdrawn  to  Manila,  and 
in  the  last  report  from  Madrid  there  are  two  warships  in 
the  Philippines,  both  of  them  hulks  which  can  never 
be  moved  from  their  anchorage,  and  two  very  small  gun- 
boats employed  for  the  transmission  of  mails  and  the 
official  use  of  members  of  the  administration.  At  the 
present  time  the  copra  traffic  is  a  feature  of  life  in  the 
islands,  and  is  a  distinct  benefit  and  civilizing  agency  to 
the  islanders.  American  missionaries  first  visited  the 
islands  in  the  forties,  and  found  them  a  very  promising 
field.  Although  nominally  there  were  Catholic  churches 
in  every  island  and  the  official  list  gave  the  names,  places, 
and  salaries  paid,  yet  the  lists  themselves  appear  to  have 
been  drawn  by  either  prophets  or  humorists,  for  they 
had  no  foundation  in  fact. 

In  1852  the  American  Board  of  Commissioners  for 
Foreign  Missions  and  the  Hawaiian  Board  of  Missions 


198  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

sent  an  expedition  to  the  Carolines  and  landed  a  number 
of  evangelical  workers  on  the  two  islands  of  Ponape  and 
Kusaie,  which  are  in  the  extreme  eastern  part  of  the 
archipelago.  Their  prompt  success  aroused  great  enthu- 
siasm in  both  New  York  and  Honolulu,  and  many  men 
and  women  followed  the  pioneers  to  these  lands.  In 
four  years  there  were  over  thirty  workers  in  the  field,  and 
the  children  of  the  United  States  built  their  first  mis- 
sionary ship — the  Morning  Star.  It  was  the  first  craft  to 
reach  the  Philippines  which  did  not  contain  a  soldier, 
loaded  cannon,  rifle,  or  barrel  of  rum.  The  Morning  Star 
grew  old  in  the  service  and  was  succeeded  by  a  larger 
and  better  ship.  This,  in  turn,  by  a  third,  and  the 
third  by  the  present  one,  which  has  an  auxiliary  steam 
engine,  which  enables  it  to  proceed  in  calm  weather 
and  to  enter  narrow  harbors  and  rivers  where  a  sailing 
xship  is  often  unable  to  go  ahead.  The  missions  flour- 
ished, island  after  island  being  invaded  by  the  preachers, 
American,  Hawaiian  and  native,  until  there  was  a  church 
and  congregation  upon  nearly  every  island.  The  only 
Spanish  settlement  which  did  in  reality  exist  was  at  Yap, 
and  even  here  no  particular  opposition  was  manifested  to 
the  calling  of  the  Morning  Star  and  to  the  work  of  native 
gospel  readers.  The  work,  though  pleasant,  was  slow. 
The  natives  at  the  outset  were  like  lazy  children  who 
do  not  want  to  bo  bothered  with  lessons,  and  who  run 
away  the  moment  expostulation  is  begun.  In  1885, 
thirty-three  years  after  their  arrival,  thirty  islands  had 
been  Christianized,  and  on  many  of  them  the  heathen 
practices  of  the  forties  had  become  vague  memories. 

Nearly  every  community  had  learned  how  to  build 
houses,  to  till  the  fields,  to  wear  clothing,  to  prepare  and 
preserve  foods,  to  build  roads  and  to  conduct  their  own 
schools.  At  Pingelap,  which  lies  to  the  northwest  of 


MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES.  199 

Kusaie  and  to  the  east  of  Ponape,  the  natives  built  them- 
selves a  church  to  accommodate  eight  hundred  people, 
nearly  all  the  population  of  the  island.  The  missionary 
report  of  1888  gives  the  number  of  churches  as  forty- 
seven,  and  the  members  as  forty-five  hundred.  All  this 
came  to  an  end  in  a  sudden  and  cruel  manner.  As  many 
careless  writers  have  charged  the  closing  of  the  Microne- 
sian  mission  to  fanatical  intolerance,  Jesuitical  plots,  and 
all  sorts  of  causes  excepting  the  true  one,  a  simple  state- 
ment of  the  facts  may  be  of  advantage.  The  Spanish 
administration  knew  of  the  presence  of  the  American  and 
the  Hawaiian  missionaries  in  the  Carolines,  and  made 
such  inquiries  as  they  thought  were  necessary.  When 
they  ascertained  that  no  adverse  claims  were  made  re- 
specting ownership  or  nationality,  and  that  no  attempts 
were  made  to  buy  up  or  control  the  real  estate,  and  no 
acta  done  irreconcilable  with  Spanish  authority,  they 
took  no  action  whatever  against  the  evangelical  organiza- 
tion or  movement.  In  the  late  seventies  a  bishop  of 
Manila,  in  speaking  on  the  subject,  said  it  was  better 
that  the  Indians  should  be  civilized  by  Protestants  rather 
than  remain  heathen  cannibals.  This  condition  of  affairs 
would  probably  have  remained  unchanged  if  it  had  not 
been  for  the  new  policy  of  the  German  Empire.  In  the 
eighties  it  began  to  display  a  desire  to  enter  the  coloniz- 
ing business  like  England  and  France.  It  looked  around 
the  world  and  found  at  that  time  that  the  only  lands 
which  might  be  claimed  were  in  Africa  and  the  Pacific 
and  Indian  oceans.  As  all  readers  know,  they  soon  es- 
tablished their  sovereignty  at  various  points  in  all  these 
districts.  There  were  several  conflicts  and  disagree- 
ments between  Berlin  and  Madrid,  in  most  of  which 
Berlin  retained  the  upper  hand.  In  1885  there  was  a 
rumor  that  a  German  man-of-war  on  the  China  coast  had 


200  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

received  orders  to  prepare  for  a  long  voyage,  and  to  take 
possession  of  some  islands  in  the  neighborhood  of  the 
Ladrones.  The  news  was  cabled  to  Manila  and  Madrid, 
and  in  a  commendably  short  time  the  Manila  administra- 
tion had  dispatched  a  man-of-war  to  Yap,  having  on  board 
Lieutenant  Capriles,  who  had  been  appointed  governor 
of  the  Carolines.  He  arrived  in  due  season  at  Yap,  but 
bejrond  engaging  in  dinner  parties  and  social  functions, 
in  which  he  consumed  three  days,  he  did  nothing.  On 
the  third  day  the  German  warship  Iltis  entered  the  har- 
bor, landed  a  file  of  marines  and  hoisted  the  red,  white 
and  black  flag  of  Germany.  Capriles  returned  to  Manila, 
where  a  panic  immediately  occurred.  The  walls  of  the 
citadel  were  repaired,  earthworks  and  fortifications  were 
thrown  up  on  the  seashore  and  at  Cavite,  and  many  resi- 
dents fled  to  the  suburbs.  The  German  residents  were 
attacked  by  rioters,  and  for  a  time  confusion  reigned 
supreme.  The  news  was  cabled  to  Madrid,  where,  of 
course,  a  larger  riot  immediately  broke  out.  The  Ger- 
man embassy  was  stoned  by  the  mob  and  its  coat  of  arms 
torn  down  and  burned.  There  was  a  warm  diplomatic 
quarrel  between  the  two  countries,  and  the  matter  was 
finally  referred  for  arbitration  to  the  pope.  During  the 
submission  of  the  case  no  movement  was  made  by  either 
the  Spaniards  or  the  Germans;  in  fact,  there  was  no 
government  whatever.  The  matter  was  under  advise- 
ment for  a  long  time,  and  was  then  decided  in  favor  of 
Spain.  This  so  delighted  the  administration  in  Manila 
that  it  gave  a  grand  demonstration  and  fireworks,  and 
did  nothing  for  over  a  year.  In  1887  it  determined  to 
establish  its  authority  in  order  to  prevent  any  further 
troubles  of  the  same  sort,  and  thereupon  organized  the 
existing  system. 

Colonel  Posadillo  was  ruade  governor  of  the  East  Caro- 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  201 

lines,  and  was  sent  to  the  capital,  Ponape.  "With  him 
were  clerks,  a  company  of  soldiers  under  a  lieutenant,  a 
gang  of  convicts,  and  a  small  regiment  of  Spanish  Capu- 
chin Friars.  Posadillo  was  what  we  would  call  a  crank. 
He  went  to  his  pos1;  full  of  gall  and  bitterness.  The 
decision  of  the  pope  had  irritated  him  greatly,  as  it  had 
most  of  the  Spanish  politicians.  The  decision  was  not  hi 
favor  of  Spain,  although  it  was  so  far  as  the  Carolines 
were  concerned.  Spain's  claim  had  been  for  Microne- 
sia, of  which  all  the  islands  had  been  credited  to  her  by 
geographers  and  cartographers  from  time  immemorial. 
Great  Britain,  with  customary  shrewdness,  had  already 
taken  possession  of  the  Gilbert  group,  while  Germany 
had  taken  the  Marshall  group,  including  the  Radak  and 
the  Ralik  islands.  If  the  pope  had  given  the  Carolines 
to  Spain,  he  confirmed  the  title  of  the  Gilberts  in  Great 
Britain,  and  of  the  Marshalls  in  Germany. 

This  to  Posadillo  was  highway  robbery.  Under  form 
of  law,  national,  international,  and  ecclesiastical,  and 
under  the  form  of  religion,  he  and  the  Fatherland  had 
been  robbed  of  two-thirds  of  their  possessions.  It  was  a 
trick,  a  plot,  a  conspiracy.  It  made  him  doubly  mad 
that  his  countrymen  at  Manila  had  rejoiced  over  the 
decision.  He  did  not  believe  that  half  a  loaf  was  better 
than  none,  and  the  action  of  his  compatriots  increased 
his  ire.  His  sentiments  were  so  ferocious  and  his  con- 
duct so  unpleasant  that  it  was  difficult  to  get  any  good 
officer  to  accept  a  detail  under  him  or  any  self-respecting 
priest  to  take  charge  of  Mr.  Posadillo 's  religious  squad. 

The  lieutenant  who  went  was  an  incompetent  sub- 
lieutenant, who  hoped  by  the  sacrifice  to  secure  promo- 
tion, and  the  Capuchin  Friars  are  so  disreputable  a 
lot  of  characters  that  even  in  Spain  they  are  the  butt  of 
the  populace.  Under  such  auspices  there  was  a  very 


202  MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

lively  time.  Posadillo  began  operations  by  arresting 
natives  and  levying  fines  and  taxes  in  every  direction. 
The  soldiers  introduced  liquor,  which  was  unknown 
under  missionary  rule,  and  the  gang  of  twenty-five  con- 
victs whom  Posadillo  had  brought  with  him  to  erect  a 
fort  immediately  started  a  series  of  thefts  and  even 
graver  crimes.  The  missionaries  protested,  and  were 
immediately  insulted  and  browbeaten  by  the  governor. 
The  Rev.  E.  T.  Doane  resented  the  governor's  abomina- 
ble behavior,  and  gave  notice  that  he  would  protest  to 
the  State  Department  at  Washington.  This  was  the 
spark  that  lit  the  magazine.  He  was  promptly  arrested 
and  sent  a  prisoner  to  Manila,  on  June  16,  1887,  just 
three  months  and  two  days  after  the  new  governor 
arrived.  Dr.  Doane  was  tried  by  the  governor-general, 
who  acquitted  him  and  gave  him  not  only  an  honorable 
discharge,  but  a  very  complimentary  testimonial.  Dr. 
Doane  returned  to  Ponape,  and  found  everything  in 
chaos.  Natives  had  been  robbed;  the  missionaries  had 
been  maltreated;  seven  of  the  mission  schools  had  been 
closed;  some  of  the  workers  had  gone  back  to  the  United 
States ;  the  leading  islanders  had  been  enrolled  among  the 
domestic  servants  of  the  governor,  and  were  blacking 
boots,  scrubbing  floors,  carrying  water  and  lighting  the 
pipes  of  the  governor  and  his  staff.  The  less  influential 
citizens  had  been  organized  into  gangs,  set  to  work  like 
convicts  upon  roads,  fields,  and  government  buildings. 
The  Capuchin  Friars  had  begun  to  seize  land,  confiscate 
houses  and  appropriate  the  school  buildings  for  religious 
uses.  In  July  the  natives  who  had  discussed  the  mat- 
ter in  the  evening  after  the  day's  toil  was  over  refused  to 
return  to  their  gangs.  The  lieutenant  reported  it  to  the 
governor  who  declared  the  conduct  treason,  and  sent  the 
officer  with  the  soldiers  to  arrest  and  bring  in  all  of  the 


fe 

2    c 

II 

W     2 


<3 

Q    ^ 


II 

I  * 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  203 

ringleaders.  They  marched  to  the  place  where  the 
natives  were  gathered  with  drawn  swords  and  fixed  bayo- 
nets and  wounded  several  of  the  people.  This  aroused 
the  old  heathen  spirit,  and  the  next  moment  there  was  a 
tremendous  fight  between  the  unarmed  islanders  and 
the  veteran  soldiers.  This  time  discipline  lost.  The 
officer  was  killed,  and  every  man  in  the  troop  was  killed 
or  mortally  wounded.  The  governor  and  the  convicts 
fortified  the  government  house  and  were  besieged  by  an 
angry  mob.  The  Capuchins,  a  cowardly  set,  fled  to  the 
hulk,  Donna  Maria,  which  was  anchored  in  the  harbor 
at  the  first  outbreak  of  hostilities.  The  governor  though 
an  incompetent  was  no  coward.  He  held  the  building 
for  three  days,  and  on  the  night  of  July  4th,  with  his  sur- 
viving companions,  cut  his  way  through  the  enemy  to 
the  beach,  where  the  Capuchins  were  to  meet  >irim  in 
small  boats.  But  the  Capuchins  were  afraid  to  under- 
take the  risk.  The  boats  started  from  the  hulk,  and 
went  back,  and  the  governor  and  his  faithful  criminals 
were  killed  one  by  one.  The  news  reached  Manila  at 
the  end  of  September.  In  November,  the  Spanish 
authorities  sent  three  men  of  war  to  Tonape  with  over 
six  hundred  soldiers  to  retake  possession  and  to  punish 
the  rebels.  Luckily  for  the  brave  missionaries  who  still 
held  on  to  their  posts,  an  American  man-of-war,  the 
Essex,  came  over  from  the  China  coast  in  time  to  protect 
them  from  a  riotous  soldiery.  The  Essex  served  as  a 
monitor  for  the  Spanish  officers.  A  few  individuals 
were  arrested,  and  sent  on  to  Manila,  where  they  were 
tried  by  court  martial.  To  the  credit  of  the  Spanish 
government,  they  received,  it  is  said,  a  very  light  sen- 
tence, while  the  court  in  its  written  judgment  practically 
declared  that  Posadillo  received  no  more  than  he 
deserved. 


204  MANILA  AND  ?HE  PHILIPPINES. 

This  was  a  great  victory  for  the  cause  of  right. 
Things  ran  along  quietly  for  about  two  years  and  a  half. 
In  the  meantime,  General  Weyler,  corrupt  and  cruel, 
became  governor-general  of  the  Philippines.  Through 
him,  or  through  his  administration,  the  Capuchins  re- 
ceived many  concessions  at  the  expense  of  the  islanders. 
One  was  a  grant  of  the  land  at  Oua,  a  mission  station 
upon  which  was  the  mission  church  which  the  islanders 
had  built  themselves,  and  other  little  buildings  which 
they  had  put  up  in  the  course  of  their  practical  educa- 
tion by  American  missionaries. 

The  real  object  of  the  concession  was  to  destroy  the 
mission  house.  It  was  concealed  under  the  garb  of 
patriotism  and  piety.  One-half  of  this  land  was  to  be 
used  for  building  barracks  for  the  troops,  and  the  other 
half  for  building  a  church  to  be  directed  by  the  Capu- 
chins. One  of  the  friars  surveyed  the  land,  and  against 
the  protests  of  the  people  he  located  the  new  building 
within  a  few  feet  of  the  wall  of  the  mission  church. 
This  meant  that  the  moment  the  ground  was  excavated 
for  the  foundation  of  the  church  the  weak  little  edifice 
alongside  would  fall  in.  They  said  as  much  to  the  Capu- 
chins, who  laughed  and  sneeringly  replied,  "If  it  does 
fall  in  all  the  better  for  everybody. "  General  We3rler 
had  neglected  to  supply  the  necessary  materials  for 
either  barracks  or  church.  The  Capuchins  induced  Lieu- 
tenant Porras  to  impress  the  islanders  into  the  service  of 
the  state,  and  compel  them  to  cut  the  necessary  timber. 
Some  were  caught  by  the  soldiers,  who  were  fifty-four  in 
number,  and  taken  with  them  to  the  neighboring  forest. 
The  other  islanders  escaped,  and  though  supposed  to  be 
far  away,  were  lurking  in  the  immediate  neighborhood. 
One  of  the  soldiers  struck  a  native,  and  immediately 
those  who  were  impressed,  and  their  hidden  friends, 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHtu^PitfUS,  $05 

attacked  the  troops,  killing  the  officer  and  twenty-seven 
men,  and  wounding  nearly  all  the  rest.  The  news 
reached  Manila,  and  was  cabled  to  Madrid.  The  cabinet 
held  a  session,  and  at  the  suggestion  of  Canovas,  the 
prime  minister,  it  cabled  the  governor-general  to  punish 
the  rebels  at  his  own  discretion.  He  prepared  a  large 
expedition,  and  in  September,  1890,  sent  six  hundred 
soldiers  on  a  transport,  accompanied  by  a  gunboat. 
Hearing  that  the  natives  had  gathered  in  force,  the  gun- 
boat shelled  the  woods,  using  the  old  mission  house  and 
the  houses  of  the  neighboring  settlement  as  their  target. 
They  annihilated  the  poor  little  town,  but  did  not  injure 
an  islander,  all  of  these  retiring  at  the  outset  beyond  the 
range  of  the  cannon.  The  troops  landed  and  held  a 
celebration  in  honor  of  their  victory.  The  festivities 
were  marred  by  the  discovery  that  they  had  been  very 
poorly  provided  for  by  the  commissary  department. 
They  marched  after  the  savages,  as  the  Spaniards  termed 
them,  confident  that  they  would  exterminate  the  entire 
population,  but  instead  of  that  the  quiet  natives  fought 
like  demons,  defeated  the  soldiers,  and  chased  them 
down  to  the  shore  under  the  protection  of  the  cannon  of 
the  gunboat. 

There  was  neither  medicine  nor  surgical  appliances  on 
either  gunboat  or  transport.  There  was  hardly  enough 
food  left  for  the  return  passage,  and  many  of  the 
wounded  died  from  privation  on  ihf  voyage.  The  com- 
mander of  the  expedition,  a  brave  and  honest  soldier, 
was  so  heartbroken  by  t>£»i'jg  made  the  victim  of  official 
dishonesty  and  corru^t'If'*?  that  he  blew  his  brains  out. 
The  missionaries,  seo/.£g  that  there  was  no  hope  for  them, 
left  Ponape  on  the  I/fiited  States  man-of-war,  Alliance. 
The  law  of  the  PLiiippines  was  immediately  afterward 
applied  to  the  CWolines,  permitting  no  Protestant 


206  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES'. 

sionary  to  ply  his  calling  in  the  territory.  The  Morn- 
ing Star  was  forbidden  to  touch  at  any  port,  or  to  hold 
any  intercourse  with  any  natives  upon  the  sea  except 
under  the  guns  of  the  port  of  the  harbor.  All  Bibles, 
testaments,  and  schoolbooks  were  prohibited,  and  all 
natives  were  forbidden  to  hold  any  intercourse,  directly 
or  indirectly,  by  speech  or  writing,  with  any  of  their 
American  or  Hawaiian  friends.  Since  that  time  little 
has  occurred  to  change  the  simple  life  of  the  Caroline 
Islands.  There  have  been  several  small  riots  in  which 
Spanish  soldiers  have  been  wounded  or  killed,  and  many 
natives  shot  in  return,  but  nothing  has  been  attempted 
to  better  the  condition  of  the  population,  or  to  extend 
the  light  of  civilization  to  the  few  islands  where  no  mis- 
sionaries have  ever  been. 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  207 


CHAPTEK    XXV. 

THE   STORY   0  ff    KIZAL. 

THE  last  insurrection  in  the  Philippines,  which,  though 
suppressed  by  Governor-General  Riviera  broke  out  again 
in  time  to  coincide  with  and  become  part  of  the  Ameri- 
can war  against  Spain,  was  occasioned  largely  by  the 
somber  tragedy  of  Dr.  Jose  Kizal.  Rizal  belonged  to 
the  Province  of  Cavite,  and  is  said  to  have  been  a  half- 
breed,  three-quarters  Spanish  and  one-quarter  Tagal. 
He  was  of  small  stature,  pleasant  manners,  and  great  in- 
tellectual ability.  His  family  was  well-to-do,  and  he 
received  as  good  an  education  as  the  Philippines  pro- 
vide, closing  his  study  year  with  a  course  in  St.  Thomas' 
University,  of  which  Brother  Gomez  was  the  head.  He 
afterward  became  connected  with  the  institution,  and 
lectured  to  the  students.  He  was  a  frequent  visitor  to 
Hong  Kong,  where  he  was  well  known  and  greatly  ad- 
mired by  the  leaders  of  British  society. 

While  unobtrusive  and  even  retiring  in  his  manners, 
he  had  always  the  courage  of  his  convictions,  and  when 
it  was  necessary  expressed  his  opinions  logically  and 
with  power. 

During  his  school  and  college  life,  he  saw  much  of  the 
corruption  of  both  the  state  and  church,  and  the  first 
trouble  he  had  in  life  was  when  he  once  wrote  a  private 
letter  in  which  he  spoke  of  the  necessity  of  a  better  en- 
forcement of  the  laws,  and  especially  of  the  removal  or 


208  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

expulsion  of  dishonest  officials  and  immoral  priests.  This 
letter  got  into  the  hands  of  the  authorities,  and  Rizal  was 
arrested,  and  warned  that  the  communication  was  tainted 
with  treason  and  blasphemy.  He  studied  medicine, 
obtained  his  degree,  and  became  a  skillful  physician. 
At  the  same  time  he  began  to  take  a  deep  interest  in  his 
fellow  citizens,  the  natives.  His  medical  skill,  kindly 
nature,  and  humane  conduct  soon  made  him  very  popu- 
lar, and  ere  he  was  twenty-eight  he  was  a  recognized 
leader  of  the  common  people.  During  this  period  he 
made  a  special  study  of  the  abuses,  administrative  and 
ecclesiastic,  that  came  under  his  notice,  and  those  which 
were  reported  in  the  official  publications.  In  a  short 
time  this  list  made  a  volume  of  which  every  paragraph 
was  an  indictment.  Rizal  was  too  good  a  politician  to 
use  this  material,  much  less  to  publish  it.  He  knew 
that  if  he  did  his  life  would  not  be  worth  a  second's  pur- 
chase. He  was  as  determined  as  ever  in  the  cause  of  re- 
form, and  fondly  hoped  that  by  uniting  all  the  better 
elements  of  the  Philippines  a  more  righteous  state  of 
affairs  could  be  brought  about,  and  in  the  event  of  fail- 
ing at  Manila  that  an  appeal  to  Madrid  would,  in  the 
course  of  time,  result  in  the  desired  amelioration.  His 
colleagues  in  the  movement  were  much  more  distrustful 
of  the  politicians  and  the  friars.  They  kept  on  their 
work  of  organizing  the  moral  sense  of  the  community, 
but  at  the  same  time  they  were  careful  to  do  nothing 
which  could  be  construed  into  a  violation  of  law.  What 
was  of  equal  importance,  they  kept  their  eyes  always  on 
the  leaders  of  those  whom  they  regarded  as  the  enemies 
of  the  state.  In  1890  Dr.  Rizal  published  a  pamphlet 
in  which  he  set  forth  his  views,  and  eloquently  pleaded 
for  juster  laws,  and  the  thorough  enforcement  of  the 
laws  already  existing.  He  depicted  in  a  graphic,  but 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES.  209 

not  a  passionate  way,  the  chief  abuses  which  prevailed, 
and  the  terrible  sufferings  of  the  natives  in  many  dis- 
tricts. The  pamphlet  was  manly,  intellectual,  and 
patriotic.  It  was  frank  and  sincere,  and  represented  the 
best  thought  of  a  Spanish  gentleman,  a  loyal  citizen,  and 
an  upright  Roman  Catholic.  "Within  a  week  the  work 
was  suppressed  on  the  ground  that  it  was  seditious  and 
heretical.  liizal  was  denounced  by  the  ultramontane 
and  Jesuitical  press  of  Manila,  and  his  prosecution  was 
demanded  by  at  least  one  of  the  suffragan  bishops.  The 
governor-general  at  that  time  was  General  Weyler,  \vho, 
after  debating  the  matter,  determined  to  arrest  Rizal. 

The  latter,  however,  had  been  warned  in  time  and 
escaped  from  the  port  on  a  British  steamer  to  Hong 
Kong.  It  is  said  that  he  was  sent  on  board  in  a  per- 
forated box,  and  lay  there  until  the  ship  was  under  way. 
He  reached  Hong  Kong  where  he  was  received  with  open 
arms  by  his  friends,  who  had  been  notified  by  cable  of 
his  coming.  The  newspapers  of  the  city,  the  Hong 
Kong  Telegraph,  Mail,  and  Daily  Press  took  up  his  cause 
with  great  earnestness,  but  he  with  rare  modesty  refused 
to  express  any  opinion.  Nevertheless  the  action  of  the 
papers  was  made  into  another  offense  by  the  church 
dignitaries  of  Manila,  and  brought  up  against  him  after- 
ward on  his  trial.  For  about  a  year  he  attended  to  his 
private  business,  and  took  no  part  in  public  matters. 
This  silence  made  his  enemies  all  the  more  apprehensive. 
In  their  endeavor  to  get  him  within  their  power  they 
planned  as  cruel  and  wicked  a  conspiracy  as  ever  ema- 
nated from  a  Spanish  brain.  The  governor-general  of  the 
Philippines  wrote  him  a  special  dispatch  stating  that  he 
was  too  good  a  citizen  for  the  state  to  lose  his  services; 
that  his  past  offenses  were  forgiven,  and  that  he  could 
come  back  at  any  time  in  perfect  safety.  He  promised 


210  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

perfect  immunity  from  all  prosecution,  civil  and  criminal, 
and  added  that  the  only  condition  he  must  insist  upon 
was  that  in  the  future  Kizal  would  abstain  from  similar 
action.  Rizal  was  homesick,  and  was  delighted  to  re- 
ceive the  communication.  His  compatriots  advised  him 
against  returning,  declaring  that  there  was  a  trick  in  the 
matter,  but  his  British  friends  took  the  other  side,  and 
said  that  the  governor-general  could  not  afford  to  violate 
his  written  promise;  and  the  governor-general  did  not. 

Rizal  went  back  to  Manila  with  full  confidence  in  the 
governor-general.  He  knew  that  there  were  other  foes, 
and  took  every  precaution  against  them.  Thus  when  the 
ship  arrived  he  compelled  the  customs  officers  to  search 
thoroughly  all  his  baggage  and  that  of  his  servant,  and 
to  examine  the  clothing  of  both.  He  had  them  mark 
everything  with  pencil,  and  had  it  done  in  the  presence 
of  the  officers  of  the  steamship.  He  landed,  took  rooms, 
received  a  hearty  welcome  from  his  patients  and  rela- 
tives. 

Two  days  after  his  arrival,  while  he  was  absent  attend- 
ing a  sick  friend,  a  squad  of  soldiers,  led  by  an  infamous 
church  spy,  broke  into  his  rooms  and  forced  all  his 
trunks.  The  spy  found  in  them  several  copies  of  Rizal's 
pamphlet,  and  several  manuscripts,  giving  the  details  of 
outrages  by  friars  in  the  savage  districts.  Rizal  was 
thereupon  arrested,  indicted  and  tried.  On  the  trial  he 
denied  that  he  had  ever  imported  the  books,  or  that  he 
had  ever  seen  them.  He  stated  that  they  were  not  where 
they  were  found  when  he  left  his  rooms  two  hours  before, 
and  that  if  they  had  been  found  there  they  had  been  put 
there  by  somebodj'  either  in  his  absence  when  the  room 
•was  unoccupied,  or  in  the  presence  of  the  searching  party. 
He  asked  the  court  to  call  the  customs  officers  who  had 
searched  his  trunks  on  the  steamer,  or  the  steamship 


MANILA  AND  THE   PHILIPPINES.  211 

officers  who  bad  seen  the  search.  The  request  was 
denied.  He  asked  the  court  to  call  the  owner  of  the 
room,  and  the  soldiers  who  took  part  in  the  search. 
This  was  denied.  He  asked  that  he  be  allowed  to  pro- 
duce witnesses  as  to  his  truthfulness  and  honesty.  This 
was  denied.  He  then  asked  permission  to  produce  wit- 
nesses to  prove  that  the  church  spy,  the  only  witness 
against  him  was  a  convict,  a  thief,  a  liar,  and  a  profes- 
sional perjurer,  and  this  request  was  denied.  The  arch- 
bishop was  at  the  trial,  and  took  part  in  the  delibera- 
tions. The  court  returned  in  a  few  minutes,  and  found 
the  accused  guilty  of  sedition  and  blasphemy,  and  sen- 
tenced him  to  a  year's  imprisonment  and  transportation 
to  the  jail  at  Jolo  in  the  Sulu  Archipelago.  They  denied 
leave  to  appeal,  and  shipped  him  the  next  morning  upon 
a  gunboat.  So  outrageous  was  the  wrong  that  the  Brit- 
ish consul  at  Manila  filed  a  protest  with  the  governor- 
general,  and  riots  broke  out  in  Cavite  and  South  Luzon. 
The  latter  part  of  the  outrage  on  Rizal  was  committed 
not  by  Weyler,  but  by  his  successor  Despujol.  "When 
Eizal  regained  his  liberty  he  left  the  Philippines  and 
went  again  to  Hong  Kong.  After  staying  here  some 
time  he  joined  a  committee  of  Philippine  patriots,  styled 
revolutionists  by  the  Spaniards,  who  went  to  Madrid  to 
lay  their  grievances  directly  before  the  throne.  The  ex- 
pedition, it  is  needless  to  remark,  was  time  and  trouble 
thrown  way.  The  officials  and  friars  had  worked  up  so 
strong  a  sentiment  against  the  patriots  that  when  they 
landed  in  Spain  they  were  mobbed.  This  not  proving 
sufficient  to  deter  them,  they  were  arrested  and  sent 
back  on  the  old  [charges  of  sedition  and  impiety.  They 
were  tried  in  Manila,  and  found  guilty  upon  a  concealed 
clause  in  the  indictment,  which  charged  them  with  being 
members  of  a  revolutionary  society.  On  December  6, 


212  MANILA   AND  THE   PHILIPPINES. 

1896,  Rizal  was  led  from  his  cell  out  into  the  yard  of  the 
Manila  prison,  and  there  shot  by  a  file  of  soldiers. 
"When  the  revolution  against  Spain  broke  out,  one  of  the 
very  first  to  join  the  insurgents  was  Rizal's  widow. 
"When  the  United  States  declared  war  upon  Spain  the 
first  prominent  Spaniard  to  leave  was  the  archbishop  of 
Manila,  who  is  now  a  refugee  under  the  British  flag  at 
Shanghai,  China. 


MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


CHAPTER   XXVI. 

THE   FUTURE    OF    THE    PHILIPPINES. 

THE  future  of  the  Philippines  depends  chiefly  upon  the 
great  powers  of  to-day.  The  land  is  marvelously  rich  in 
minerals,  in  lumber,  in  agriculture  and  in  water  power. 
It  has  numerous  bays  and  harbors  which  are  safe,  com- 
modious and  convenient.  Its  climate  is  naturally  salu- 
brious, and  under  a  wise  and  beneficent  government  the 
territory  could  support  a  hundred  million  human  beings 
in  comfort,  and  a  smaller  number  in  luxury.  Properly 
directed,  it  could  be  made  the  scene  of  extensive  manu- 
factures, and  an  invaluable  market  for  the  New  World  in 
the  East  and  for  Asia  in  the  West.  From  its  ports  fleets 
of  steamers  would  carry  its  own  products  and  bring  back 
those  of  other  lands.  All  that  it  requires  are  justice  and 
wisdom.  Its  people  are  good  types  of  poor  humanity,  no 
better  and  no  worse  than  other  communities  around  the 
globe.  Under  favoring  influences  the  race  to  which  the 
islanders  belong  has  proven  itself  capable  of  civilization 
and  of  progress.  The  Tamil  cities  of  southern  India  are 
among  the  quietest  and  most  industrious  communities, 
and  the  great  island  of  Java  has  for  more  than  a  century 
poured  a  Niagara  of  wealth  into  its  parent  country,  the 
Netherlands.  The  Malays  of  Singapore  make  law-abid- 
ing and  orderly  British  citizens,  and  even  under  the 
cruel  rule  of  the  Spaniards  many  Tagal  and  Yisaya  sub- 
jects have  demonstrated  their  high  ability  and  worth. 


214  MANILA   AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

With  law  and  order  established,  with  roads  connecting 
all  the  districts,  with  schools  and  a  kindly  government, 
the  islanders  could  be  raised  to  a  high  level  of  civiliza- 
tion in  a  single  generation.  Nature  has  been  lavish  in 
generosity,  and  only  a  little  is  demanded  from  those  of 
her  children  who  have  for  those  who  have  not.  What 
would  become  of  the  islanders  if  their  destinies  were 
committed  to  themselves  is  difficult  to  predict.  They 
could  not  go  very  far  wrong,  because  the  gunboats  of 
civilization  do  not  permit  the  impulsive  savage  to  inter- 
fere with  the  welfare  or  enjoyment  of  his  next-door 
neighbors.  The  submissiveness  and  discipline  which 
three  centuries  have  stamped  upon  the  Philippine  char- 
acter would  not  be  outgrown  in  fifty  years,  and  would 
undoubtedly  preserve  the  peaceful,  social  and  political 
conditions  without  which  there  can  be  no  progress. 
Among  their  own  people  are  many  who  would  take  the 
reins  of  power  the  moment  their  countrymen  enjoyed  the 
liberty  and  independence  which  self-government  involves. 
The  worst  possible  fate  for  the  islands  is  to  restore  them 
to  their  inhuman  and  wicked  owners.  No  matter  from 
what  point  of  view  it  be  regarded,  such  a  transaction 
would  be  at  variance  with  every  law  of  right.  So  far  as 
progress,  science,  ethics,  and  civilization  are  concerned, 
Spain  is  deaf,  dumb  and  blind.  The  years  have  taught 
her  no  wisdom,  but  have  only  torn  out  her  teeth,  ex- 
tracted her  claws  and  paralyzed  her  muscles.  The  tiger 
of  Alva  is  the  snarling  but  impotent  senile  beast  of  1898. 
It  knows  but  one  principle  of  government,  the  extermina- 
tion of  all  who  object  to  its  rulings.  Its  treatment  of 
the  Philippines  has  never  changed.  It  has  been  the  same 
as  that  of  the  Carib,  of  the  Inca,  of  its  own  children  in 
foreign  lands.  The  population  of  the  Ladrones  sank  in 
two  hundred  years  from  more  than  a  hundred  thousand 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  215 

to  one  tenth  of  that  number;  the  population  of  the 
Philippines  has  been  killed  off  from  twenty  or  twenty- 
five  millions  to  six  or  eight  millions.  Iniquitous  laws 
and  practices  have  stolen  all  the  lands  from  the  inhabit- 
ants and  given  them  to  the  church  and  the  state.  A 
once  happy  people  are  now  miserably  poor,  while  the 
tangible  results  of  their  labor  have  been  taken  away  in 
the  huge  fortunes  of  politicians  and  officials  or  the  enorm- 
ous funds  and  swollen  treasuries  of  the  religious  orders. 

If  the  war  with  the  United  States  had  never 
occurred  the  crushing  process  would  have  continued  un- 
til Japan,  Germany  or  Great  Britain  interfered  and  did 
for  the  Philippines  what  America  is  doing  for  Cuba. 
What  the  Philippines  need  is  not  annexation  by  any 
country,  but  only  a  protectorate  which  will  enable  them 
to  develop  morally,  socially,  industrially, as  well  as  polit- 
ically. No  matter  what  that  protectorate  may  be,  even 
were  it  Chinese,  it  would  be  far  kinder  and  more  benefi- 
cent than  Spanish  rule.  The  best  protectorate  is  that 
which  would  be  furnished  by  either  the  United  States  or 
Great  Britain — the  two  countries  which  more  than  all 
others  recognize  the  sacredness  of  human  liberty,  the 
organic  rights  of  the  individual,  and  the  duty  of  the 
state  toward  the  education  and  amelioration  of  the 
citizens. 

Under  such  a  protectorate  the  Philippines  would  soon 
come  to  look  upon  their  Spanish  thraldom  as  an  awful 
ghost  of  the  night  which  had  passed  away  forever.  Nor 
should  we  forget  that  under  decent  government  the 
Philippines  would  soon  be  the  best  market  for  the  Western 
and  Pacific  States. 

The  climate  is  too  warm  to  grow  wheat  and  the  north- 
ern cereals,  yet  the  people  have  learned  the  palatability 
and  nourishing  qualities  of  bread,  and  purchase  it  when- 


216  MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES. 

ever  they  can.  Cotton  does  not  thrive  well,  although 
cotton  cloths  are  always  in  heavy  demand.  While  the 
natives  are  skilled  weavers  and  utilize  the  natural 
resources  to  the  utmost,  producing  matchless  pineapple 
cloth,  banana  cloth  and  silk  goods,  yet  these  are  costly 
tissues,  and  are  intended  for  the  wealthy  few  and  not  for 
the  masses.  The  bulk  of  the  people  for  their  daily  attire 
prefer  cotton  goods,  colored  and  gaudy.  In  wheat  and 
flour  the  nearest  rival  of  San  Francisco  is  Bombay.  In 
cotton  goods  the  nearest  rivals  are  Japan  and  China. 
But  in  this  rivalry  there  is  but  little  danger  for  the 
American  manufacturer.  He  exports  these  goods  to 
Japan  and  China  at  the  present  time,  and  competes  with 
the  native  manufacturers  in  their  own  market.  Doing 
this  he  needs  scarcely  fear  them  in  markets  as  strange  to 
them  as  to  himself. 

There  will  be  a  vast  field  in  the  Philippines  for  narrow 
gauge  railways  and  for  cheap  and  strong  steamboats.  In 
the  movement  of  the  products  of  the  field  and  the  forest, 
transportation  is  a  more  serious  question  than  produc- 
tion. There  are  millions  of  magnificent  trunks  in  the 
interior  of  Luzon  and  Mindanao  which  have  either  an 
insignificant  value  or  no  value  at  all  at  the  present  time 
which  would  possess  high  value  if  they  could  be  carried 
at  a  reasonable  cost  to  the  nearest  seaport,  and  thence  be 
sent  to  Japan,  China,  or  Hong  Kong.  With  cheap  trans- 
portation to  the  nearest  harbor,  and  without  the  paralyz- 
ing burden  of  Spanish  taxation,  a  lucrative  commerce  in 
hard  woods  and  cabinet  woods  would  spring  up  between 
the  Philippines  and  all  the  great  cities  of  America  on  the 
Pacific  coast.  A  larger  market  still  will  consist  of  ready- 
made  iron  or  steel  frames  and  roofs  for  earthquake  and 
typhoon  houses.  Under  the  existing  Spanish  law  there 
is  even  to-day  a  profitable  trade  in  iron  beams,  iron 


MANILA  AND   THE   PHILIPPINES.  2J7 

roofing  and  iron  clapboard  ing.  Taxes  and  red  tape  make 
the  iron  shell  of  the  Philippine  house  cost  more  than  an 
entire  steel  structure  would  under  free  trade  conditions. 
The  land  improperly  cultivated  produces  an  excellent 
coffee,  one  which  like  the  Java  variety  has  been  singu- 
larly free  from  the  disease  microbes  that  destroyed  the 
plantations  of  Ceylon. 

Under  scientific  cultivation  the  Philippine  coffee  plan- 
tations would  in  ten  years  equal  those  of  Java,  or  even 
the  more  famous  ones  of  southern  Arabia.  With  decent 
government  foreign  capital  would  be  only  too  glad  to  ex- 
ploit and  develop  the  mineral  resources  of  the  archi- 
pelago. The  little  stream  of  gold  which  flows  illegiti- 
mately into  Chinese  pockets  would  become  a  great  stream, 
enriching  all  classes  alike.  The  sugar  plantations  of  the 
islands  are  the  richest  on  the  globe,  and  would,  under 
wise  management,  afford  an  inexhaustible  supply  to  the 
United  States  as  well  as  to  Japan  and  China.  Under 
existing  conditions,  thousands  of  tons  are  exported  from 
the  three  treaty  ports  every  year,  a  quantity  which  would 
be  soon  quadrupled  after  the  sugar  tax,  the  harbor  tax, 
the  export  tax,  the  land  tax,  and  the  church  tax  of  the 
Spanish  dominion  were  repealed  by  the  new  government 
of  the  Philippines. 

What  Cuba  once  was  to  the  Atlantic  States,  the  Philip- 
pines would  soon  be  to  the  Pacific  States.  They  would 
take  by  the  shipload  our  flour,  textiles,  iron  rails,  beams 
and  machinerj",  our  leather,  paper,  preserved  meats, 
canned  foods,  boots  and  shoes,  agricultural  implements 
and  cutlery,  and  they  would  send  in  return  sugar,  hemp, 
hard  woods,  dye  woods,  coffee,  indigo,  spices,  hides  and 
skins,  gold  and  silver,  cigars  and  cigarettes.  If  Ameri- 
can policy  had  no  higher  motive  than  the  commercial 
prosperity  of  the  American  people,  it  would  establish  a 


218  MANILA  AND  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

protectorate  over  the  Philippines  the  moment  that  the 
dogs  of  war  were  called  back  to  their  kennels.  If  its 
policy  is  based  upon  the  regeneration  and  upbuilding  of 
a  long-suffering  race,  it  will  either  establish  that  protec- 
torate cr  one  jointly  with  its  mother-nation  across  the 
sea. 


THE  END. 


n»i_  i  v-»ni  M    i  w  11  ic  on  ouicuiui  t  ucrors.  ui   ai  ly 

University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 


7] 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

(510)642-6753 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals    and    recharges    may    be    made    4    days 

prior  to  due  date 


UJs 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


APR  1  8  1996 


_  REC.MOFFIITJUL1  1'96 


FORA 


20,000  (4/94) 


LD21-100m-7,'33 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY